Hampton Police Division Policy & Procedures Manual (VFOIA, 2022)

Hampton Police Division
Policy And Procedure Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
F
DATE 100 DIVISIONAL PHILOSOPHY
05/29/19 100 DIVISION WRITTEN DIRECTIVE SYSTEM
05/30/98 101 STRATEGIC POLICE OBJECTIVES
07/15/86 102 CRIME AND CRIME PREVENTION
04/08/99 103 ENFORCING THE LAW
07/15/86 104 LOYALTY
04/25/22 105 COMMAND AUTHORITY / RELATIONSHIPS /

DEVELOPMENT
07/15/86 106 TRAINING PHILOSOPHY
03/04/14 107 DISCIPLINARY PHILOSOPHY
03/15/98 108 PHILOSOPHY ON ALLEGATIONS OF MISCONDUCT
11/27/06 109 POLICE REPORTING SYSTEM
08/13/10 111 CODE OF ETHICS
03/15/98 112 PHILOSOPHY OF PROFESSIONAL STANDARDS
07/27/86 113 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT PHILOSOPHY
09/11/86 115 INSPECTIONS PHILOSOPHY
03/29/10 116 PROMOTIONAL PHILOSOPHY
10/11/89 117 SAFETY PHILOSOPHY
05/30/98 118 USE OF FORCE PHILOSOPHY STATEMENT
09/04/03 119 HOMELAND DEFENSE PHILOSOPHY

500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
01/27/21 501 RELATIONSHIPS WITH COMMONWEALTH

ATTORNEY AND OTHER
AGENCIES/REFERRALS
01/09/07 502 MASS ARRESTS
02/17/21 503 POLICE INVOLVEMENT IN DOMESTIC DISPUTES
01/04/21 504 HANDLING OF INDIVIDUALS WITH PHYSICAL OR

MENTAL DISABILITIES ILLNESS OR INJURY
08/16/12 505 RELATIONSHIPS WITH JURISDICTIONS WITHIN THE

CITY OF HAMPTON
12/16/02 506 UNAUTHORIZED PERSONS PROHIBITED ON
SCHOOL PREMISES
01/20/11 507 UNAUTHORIZED USE VEHICLE COMPLAINTS
10/05/15 508 VEHICLE SEIZURE AND FORFEITURE
3/22/2022 509 PUBLIC INFORMATION
02/05/21 510 VICTIM/WITNESS ASSISTANCE
08/11/14 511 POLICE - FIRE DIVISION OPERATION
11/20/18 512 AWARDS PROGRAMS
02/28/17 513 REPORTING CONFISCATED FIREARMS
09/28/09 514 TRAVEL EXPENSE
11/20/18 515 INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM (ICS)
02/17/21 516 HIGH RISK SITUATIONS and CRITICAL INCIDENTS
03/03/21 517 DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CRIME

ANALYSIS UNIT
04/19/04 518 MULTIPLE HIT PROGRAM
12/14/20 519 TACTICAL UNIT APPLICANTS AND MEMBERS
12/14/20 519.1 MRT Mobile Response Team
03/27/19 520 BOMB THREATS
03/27/19 521 DISPOSAL OF EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS

03/03/08 522 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
07/09/14 523 LINE OF DUTY DEATH/SERIOUS INJURY
04/08/15 524 CRISIS NEGOTIATIONS
10/27/16 525 SPECIAL EVENT PLANNING AND COORDINATION
05/02/18 526 DIGNITARY PROTECTION
09/30/08 527 SPECIAL CONSERVATORS OF THE PEACE
03/26/07 528 SPECIAL OPERATIONS
11/06/18 529 CONCEALED WEAPON AUTHORIZATION
11/20/18 530 HOMELAND SECURITY UNIT
04/20/20 531 INFECTIOUS DISEASE CONTROL
04/23/13 532 CLOTHING
10/12/21 533 USE OF FORCE & RELATED EQUIPMENT
11/13/19 534 AUTOMATED SYSTEMS
11/01/04 535 INTERAGENCY MONITORING OF

PROBATION/PAROLE CLIENTS
11/04/11 536 USE OF THE AUTOMATED EXTERNAL
DEFIBRILLATOR (AED)
01/29/19 537 POLICE ACTION DEATH INVESTIGATIONS
03/01/18 538 REPORTING PROCEDURES FOR DISCHARGE OF

FIREARMS
05/02/18 539 CRITICAL INCIDENTS and STRESS MANAGEMENT
09/03/98 540 ORDER MAINTENANCE AND CROWD CONTROL AT

CITY EVENTS
01/23/20 541 POLICE HONOR GUARD
09/05/19 542 SEPARATION FROM EMPLOYMENT
10/21/14 543 ACTIVE THREATS
05/09/05 544 BIAS BASED PROFILING
10/12/20 545 Senior Police Officer

10/12/20 546 Master Police Officer
11/27/17 547 DIVE TEAM
12/17/19 548 GANG ACTIVITY
3/22/2022 549 MOBILE DATA TERMINALS
09/12/05 550 RESPIRATORS
05/24/06 551 MOST WANTED PROGRAM
09/16/2021 552 Continuity of Operations Plan (COOP)
10/26/2021 553 Automatic License Plate Readers (LAPR)
10/23/18 554 ANIMAL CONTROL
12/30/21 555 SUBSTANCE ABUSE
11/14/16 556 USE OF NALOXONE & RELATED EQUIPMENT
05/12/22 557 (UAS) UNMANNED AERIAL SYSTEM
07/17/17 558 RESTORATIVE RESTING PERIODS
02/05/19 559 CYBER SECURITY AND INFORMATION SECURITY

PRACTICES
10/06/21 560 INTERACTION W/LGBTQI INDIVIDUALS
600 ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE PROCEDURES
08/25/21 601 INJURY PROCEDURES
02/03/20 603 PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING
06/03/21 604 ACCREDITATION
11/14/16 605 DISTRIBUTION OF POLICE DIVISION

CORRESPONDENCE
08/29/06 606 EQUIPMENT AND EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES ISSUE
AND REPAIRS
07/15/90 607 MEALS BREAKS, COFFEE BREAKS, EATING WHILE
ON DUTY
03/01/16 608 RIDE-ALONG PROGRAM
11/20/18 610 PROPERTY MANAGEMENT
05/11/21 613 FIREARMS SAFETY AND RANGE OPERATIONS
07/08/03 615 DIVISION GYMNASIUM
06/16/08 616 POLICE ARMORY
11/13/19 618 PHYSICAL FITNESS AND WELLNESS
12/08/04 620 GOALS AND OBJECTIVES
05/30/98 621 CITY OF HAMPTON GRIEVANCE PROCEDURE
04/08/05 622 PROBATIONARY OFFICER EVALUATIONS
06/05/06 624 TOWED VEHICLES
01/09/19 625 POLICE WRECKER LIST PROCEDURE
10/15/03 626 FORMS DEVELOPMENT AND REVIEW
05/13/21 627 DIVISION TRAINING
07/02/15 628 TRAINING ACADEMY
02/04/21 629 CAREER DEVELOPMENT
11/29/11 630 EDUCATIONAL INCENTIVE PROGRAM
03/28/11 632 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS
08/15/98 633 STAFF/COMMITTEE MEETINGS
05/12/00 634 WARRANTLESS ARRESTS
01/04/21 635 FISCAL MANAGEMENT
11/28/18 636 SICK LEAVE
01/11/21 637 JOB ANALYSIS AND POSITION CLASSIFICATION
02/01/01 639 NOTIFICATION OF REPORT DISCREPANCIES
12/02/19 641 POSITION ASSIGNMENT MANAGEMENT
12/07/94 646 ISSUANCE OF VIRGINIA UNIFORM SUMMONSES

FOR USE BY PRIVATE SECURITY COMPANIES
05/01/02 647 CONTRACTUAL AGREEMENTS FOR LAW
ENFORCEMENT SERVICES
09/03/93 648 POLICE DIVISION SENIOR MANAGEMENT
POSITIONS
05/27/2020 649 EXTRA-DUTY EMPLOYMENT & CITY-SPONSORED
EVENT ASSIGNMENT
12/16/20 650 SECONDARY EMPLOYMENT (MOONLIGHTING)
700 INVESTIGATIVE PROCEDURES
09/08/09 701 HOMICIDE SCENE ROUTINE
08/16/12 702 CRIME SCENE PROTECTION
01/25/16 703 CAREER CRIMINAL PROGRAM
10/27/16 704 SEARCH AND SEIZURE OF COMPUTER RELATED

EQUIPMENT
02/20/03 705 STOLEN PROPERTY FILE
02/28/17 706 INVESTIGATION OF SEXUAL ASSAULT
05/25/21 707 EXECUTION OF SEARCH WARRANTS
11/10/00 708 CASE FILES
02/23/07 709 POLYGRAPH OPERATIONS
01/24/06 710 INTERVIEW / INTERROGATION ROOMS
01/24/06 711 RECORDING CUSTODIAL INTERVIEWS /

INTERROGATIONS
08/20/18 712 FORENSICS UNIT INVESTIGATIVE
RESPONSIBILITIES
08/22/12 713 EYEWITNESS IDENTIFICATION
04/22/2019 714 FORENSICS UNIT fAND VEHICLES
11/30/98 715 DETECTIVES RESPONDING TO CALLS
01/17/07 716 IDENTITY THEFT CRIMES
08/05/19 717 MISSING PERSON & RUNAWAY INVESTIGATIONS

02/24/20 1001 PUBLIC VEHICLE PERMITS
05/10/95 1002 USE OF SUBPOENA FOR WITNESS FORM
11/04/11 1003 HIT AND RUN INVESTIGATIONS
01/27/15 1004 ACCIDENT AND REVIEW BOARD
04/21/09 1005 POLICE TRAFFIC RADAR OPERATIONS
12/04/01 1006 ACCIDENTS INVOLVING DAMAGE TO CITY

PROPERTY/EMPLOYEES
05/04/94 1007 TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL
1007A TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL Appendix
10/08/20 1010 TRAFFIC ACCIDENTS - INVESTIGATING AND

REPORTING
08/30/11 1011 FATAL TRAFFIC ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION
02/28/20 1011A FELONY/FATAL ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION

CHECKLIST
08/30/11 1012 TRAFFIC UNIT
05/07/14 1013 MOTOR CARRIER WEIGHT AND INSPECTION

OPERATIONS
11/18/09 1014 SEAT BELT ENFORCEMENT
12/05/08 1015 SCHOOL CROSSING GUARDS
05/01/02 1016 TRAFFIC VIOLATIONS - SPECIAL

CASES/PROCESSING
10/20/04 1017 TRAFFIC SAFETY AND ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES
10/20/04 1018 TRAFFIC RECORDS
10/20/04 1019 TRAFFIC RELATED ACTIVITIES
1100 PATROL PROCEDURES
09/21/21 1102 PERSONAL APPEARANCE
09/20/08 1102Appendix PERSONAL APPEARANCE APPENDIX

12/10/15 1103 STOP AND FRISK
12/07/94 1104 LOUD MUSIC COMPLAINTS, LOUD PARTIES, AND

UNRULY GATHERINGS
06/28/21 1105 OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR CANINE CORPS
11/04/11 1106 REFLECTORIZED CLOTHING
06/04/15 1107 POLICE MOTORCYCLES
08/16/18 1108 HANDLING OF INJURED, SICK OR HOSPITALIZED

PRISONERS
08/06/07 1110 PROTECTIVE VESTS
06/28/21 1111 EMERGENCY SUBSTANTIAL RISK ORDER(ESRO)
01/17/07 1112 REPORTING OF SAFETY AND HEALTH HAZARDS

OR OTHER CITY MATTERS
05/28/97 1113 INDUSTRIAL ACCIDENTS
12/30/21 1114 TRAFFIC STOPS
05/01/09 1120 POLICE CHAPLAIN PROGRAM
11/29/11 1121 FUNERAL ESCORTS
05/28/97 1122 DEATH NOTIFICATIONS
07/18/97 1123 ROLL CALL
03/03/21 1125 SEARCH OF A MOTOR VEHICLE
05/25/21 1126 SEARCH INCIDENTAL TO ARREST
10/11/18 1127 AUXILIARY POLICE UNIT
11/30/21 1128 POLICE PURSUITS
07/17/17 1129 DUI CASE PROCESSING/PREPARATION
01/17/07 1131 CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS
08/30/11 1132 POLICE CADETS
02/01/98 1133 SCENE SUPERVISION
01/27/95 1134 MULTIPLE UNIT RESPONSE

11/16/20 1135 UNIFORM PATROL
05/30/01 1136 FIELD CONTACT CARD AND ARREST SHEET
12/06/21 1137 MOBILE AUDIO VIDEO RECORDINGS
07/06/04 1138 PARKING ENFORCEMENT
09/18/07 1139 ALCOHOL ENFORCEMENT PROGRAM
03/24/21 1140 TRAFFIC LAW ENFORCEMENT
01/27/95 1141 PROVIDING POLICE ESCORT SERVICE
09/12/97 1142 ASSISTING MOTORISTS
03/21/07 1143 EMERGENCY/ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION

EQUIPMENT
09/11/06 1144 PROCESSING REVOCATION/SUSPENSION CASES
03/30/10 1146 METHODS OF HANDLING SHOPLIFTING

OFFENDERS
05/13/19 1147 CUSTODY AND TRANSPORTATION OF DETAINEES
1200 RESERVED
12/10/15 1201 PATROL SERVICE OFFICERS
1300 RESERVED
1400 COMMUNICATIONS AND RECORDS PROCEDURES
03/08/21 1401 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER
07/09/14 1402 RADIO OPERATIONS
12/23/12 1403 EMERGENCY MEDICAL DISPATCHING
3/22/2022 1404 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES
3/22/2022 1406 POLICE CENTRAL RECORDS
05/07/15 1408 DISPATCH OPERATIONS
04/04/17 1410 DIVISION ISSUED CELLUAR MOBILE TELEPHONES
02/07/05 1416 WARRANT SERVICE
08/15/98 1418 ISSUANCE OF PERMIT TO DEAL IN PRECIOUS

METALS
02/20/03 1423 PROCESSING SUMMONSES
01/20/11 1424 REPORTING AND RECOVERING STOLEN VEHICLES
11/20/18 1429 RECORDING AND REPORTING SYSTEM
01/21/05 1430 CRIME LINE TELEPHONE PROCEDURES
1500 POLICE VEHICLE PROCEDURES
01/28/10 1501 CAR KEYS AND GARAGE GAS KEYS
04/08/15 1502 OPERATION OF POLICE VEHICLES
05/30/98 1503 OPERATION AND CARE OF CANINE VEHICLES
10/21/14 1504 TAKE HOME CAR PROGRAM
10/28/15 1505 TACTICAL UNIT VEHICLE
01/11/21 1506 MARINE PATROL OPERATIONS
08/09/00 1507 USE OF SAFETY BELTS
10/21/20 1508 BICYCLE PATROL
03/26/03 1509 DEADLINING POLICE VEHICLES
03/19/19 1510 MOBILE COMMAND CENTER
02/01/18 1511 SPECIAL PURPOSE VEHICLES
1900 CRIME PREVENTION PROCEDURES
07/09/14 1901 DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CRIME

PREVENTION/COMMUNITY RELATIONS UNIT
04/15/04 1902 PUBLIC PROGRAM REQUEST
02/25/20 1903 DIVISION SOCIAL MEDIA NETWORKING
09/10/14 1904 POLICE EXPLORER PROGRAM
04/15/04 1905 NEIGHBORHOOD WATCH COMPLAINT FEEDBACK
04/15/04 1906 POLICE FUNERALS
03/01/16 1907 LAW ENFORCEMENT INTERN PROGRAM
11/04/15 1908 VOLUNTEER PROGRAM
2100 PLANNING AND ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
10/14/19 2101 PLANNING UNIT RESPONSIBILITES
01/19/22 2102 REAL TIME INFORMATION CENTER
09/05/06 2104 PROJECT RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
10/14/19 2106 GRANT ADMINISTRATION
12/16/20 2107 Workload Assessments

Redaction Date: 9/28/2022 5:45:43 PM
Redaction Log
Total Number of Redactions in Document: 1
Redaction Reasons by Page

Page Reason Description Occurrences
The identity of a victim witness or

undercover officer and/or investigative
INVEST
7 techniques and procedures has been 1
TECHNIQUES redacted pursuant to Va. Code
§2.2-3706(B)(10).
Redaction Log
Redaction Reasons by Exemption

Pages
Reason Description (Count)

undercover officer and/or investigative 7(1)
INVEST TECHNIQUES techniques and procedures has been
redacted pursuant to Va. Code
§2.2-3706(B)(10).
POLICY & PROCEDURE SERIES # 100 PAGE 1 OF 17
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
05/29/19
DIVISION WRITTEN DIRECTIVE SYSTEM OVERSIGHT
Support Services
DISTRIBUTION AMENDS/SUPERSEDES/CANCELS
ALL MANUALS P&P #100 dated 01/09/07 and Chief’s Directive 100.4 dated 11/04/15.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish a formal written directive system for the
Hampton Police Division. The Chief of Police has the ultimate authority to issue,
modify, or approve agency written directives (with the exception of City Policy and
State Code).
II. POLICY:
The effective operation of an organization depends upon its ability to direct,

coordinate, and control members and activities. The basic mechanism for doing so
is a formal written directive system. A well designed and correctly implemented
written directive system provides employees with a clear understanding of the
constraints under which they should operate and expectations they should fulfill.
The purpose of the Hampton Police Division written directive system is to provide
uniform direction and control of members and activities.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The Hampton Police Division’s Written directive system shall consist of the
following elements:
1. RULES AND REGULATIONS
Rules and Regulations are issued by authority of the Chief of Police.

They are designed to cover those circumstances in which no deviation
or exceptions are permitted. All personnel will have access to the
“Manual of Rules” containing the Rules and Regulations on the
Division Intranet page of the Hampton Police Division. Unit
Supervisors will be responsible to review the Rules and Regulations
and any changes issued with the personnel within their unit. It is the
responsibility of every member of the Division to read and understand
the Rules and Regulations. Members will receive changes and
updates to this manual via e-mail as issued by Professional
Standards. A distribution list will be maintained with the Rules and
Regulations change e-mail to show who received the information.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #100 – DIVISION WRITTEN DIRECTIVE SYSTEM Page 2 of 17
Rules and Regulations are numerically indexed according to subject

matter. The “Manual of Rules” serves as a guide for conduct and
responsibility for all members of the Division. A hard copy of the
Division Rules and Regulations will be maintained in the Office of the
Chief of Police, each Branch Commanders office, Communications
and the primary Wythe and Chesapeake Field Offices. The Day Shift
Commanders will be responsible for updating and maintaining the
Field Office Policy Manuals.
2. POLICIES AND PROCEDURE:
Policies and Procedures are issued by authority of the Chief of Police.

Generally, policies and procedures provide information and guidance
for Division personnel. They establish approved methods for
accomplishing tasks. The policy and procedure is numerically
indexed by functional responsibility. All personnel have access to the
“Policy and Procedure Manual” and are responsible for its contents.
Policy and Procedures are maintained by the Accreditation Office on
the Police Divisions Intranet web page which is available to all
members. Hard copies of the Policy and Procedure Manual shall be
maintained in the Office of the Chief of Police, each Branch
Commanders Office, Communications and the primary Wythe and
Chesapeake Field Offices. The Day Shift Commanders will be
responsible for updating and maintaining the Field Office Policy
Manuals.
New and revised policies will be distributed Division wide via e-mail,
and updated on the Intranet web page. Members will be responsible
for reading and understanding these policies. Policy review
documentation will be done on the Division’s Training Network
PoliceOne, creating a read receipt. Personnel are required to log onto
their PoliceOne account and review these policies and complete the
training requirement within 30 days when possible. Civilian employees
will do the same on LocalGovU for those policies that pertain to them.
Policies and Procedures are available to field personnel via their

Mobile Data Terminal (MDT). Officers without an MDT are
encouraged to maintain the electronic copy in a folder on their e-mail
for quick access. Members may use their Division issued cellular
phone to access their e-mail account. Superseded/cancelled Policies
shall be deleted. The Policy and Procedures web page includes a
Table of Contents and an Alphabetical Index of topics which is also
maintained by the Accreditation Office. The format for Policy and
Procedure is identified in Appendix B. The Accreditation Manager will
maintain the distribution list for each policy update or new policy
issued.
All sworn personnel prior to being issued their firearms shall be issued
copies of P&P 537 Use of Deadly Force, and P&P 533 Use of Force
and Related Equipment and be instructed on their contents.
3. DIVISION PLANS:
A Division plan is a comprehensive and systematic method for

achieving specific objectives. Plans normally include those
procedures or techniques utilized by a particular segment of the
Police Division in performing its duties. Division plans are issued by
the authority of the Chief of Police and are distributed to personnel in
the respective organizational component affected by the plan.
Additionally, copies of all Division Plans will be maintained in the
Office of the Chief of Police, Branch Commanders, Accreditation and
on the Division’s Intranet Web Site. Access to the manual should be
made available to all sworn personnel by their Branch Commanders.
The format for Division Plans is identified in Appendix C.
4. GENERAL ORDERS:
A General Order is a written order issued by the Chief of Police

setting forth a new rule or organizational change, which affects all
members and employees of the Division. General Orders are
distributed to all personnel via Division e-mail and are normally filed in
chronological order. General Orders will be maintained in the Office
of the Chief of Police and on the Division Intranet site. The format for
General Orders is identified in Appendix D.
5. SPECIAL ORDERS:
A written order issued by the Chief of Police which affects and is

distributed to certain segments or members of the Division. Special
Orders may include personnel assignments, promotions, transfers,
and procedures, which govern Special events and circumstances, and
are self-canceling by nature. Special Orders are normally filed in
chronological order and shall be maintained in the Office of the Chief
of Police and are available to all personnel on the Division Intranet.
Special Orders will be distributed via Division e-mail and also will be
available to all personnel on the Division’s Intranet. The format for
Special Orders is identified in Appendix E.
6. TRAINING ORDERS:
A written order issued by the Professional Standards Commander

under the direction and authority of the Chief of Police or the
Professional Standards Commander. Training Orders are utilized in
the assignment of Division personnel to specific training sessions.
These orders are distributed to affected personnel, their supervisors,
and Branch Commanders. Training Orders are maintained in the
Training Academy of the Professional Standards Branch and are
indexed chronologically. The format for Training Orders is identified

in Appendix F.
7. INSTRUCTOR ORDERS:
A written order issued by Professional Standards under the direction

and authority of the Chief of Police or the Professional Standards
Commander. Instructor Orders (similar in nature to Training Orders)
are issued to assign qualified individuals for teaching duties. These
orders are distributed to affected personnel, their supervisors and
Branch Commanders. Instructor Orders are maintained in the
Training Academy of Professional Standards and are indexed
chronologically. The format for Instructors Orders is identified in
Appendix G.
8. PERSONNEL ORDERS:
A written order issued by a Branch Commander under the direction

and authority of the Chief of Police. The personnel order is used
when an employee is transferred within the particular Branch. These
orders are maintained in the Branch and distributed through Division
e-mail. The format for Personnel Orders is identified in Appendix H.
9. CHIEF’S DIRECTIVES:
Written instructions issued by the Chief of Police to govern

procedures to be followed in a particular circumstance. The Chief’s
Directive is issued to affected personnel (it may impact the entire
Police Division or specific individuals). Chief’s Directives are indexed
by subject area as are policy and procedures. The Chief’s Directive
can be used in a manner similar to policy and procedure, but with a
limited distribution requirement. The Chief’s Directive may be used as
an interim change to policy and procedure. Chief’s Directives are
maintained in the office of the Chief of Police. The format for chief’s
Directives is identified in Appendix I.
10. PERSONNEL DIRECTIVES:
Personnel Directives (similar in nature to Training and Instructors

Orders) are issued by the Professional Standards Branch for specific
personnel assignments such as assessments, division physicals,
meetings and boards. These orders are distributed to affected
personnel, maintained in the Training Academy of the Professional
Standards Branch and are indexed chronologically. The format for a
Personnel Directive is identified in Appendix J.
11. BRANCH DIRECTIVE:
A written instruction issued by a Branch Commander establishing

procedures to be followed affecting operations within a Branch. The

directive is distributed to all personnel and is indexed and filed in
chronological order. The directive is maintained by the issuing
Branch. The format for Branch directives can be located in Appendix
K.
12. MEMORDANDUM:
An informal statement issued among units and personnel to clarify,

recommend or transmit information. Normally, a memorandum will
not contain a policy statement, but will only clarify existing policy,
procedures, orders and directives.
13. ABRIDGED HAMPTON CITY CODES:
A link to the Hampton City Codes will be located on the Division

Intranet web page. These City Codes will be maintained and updated
by the Training Academy. Training Bulletins will be sent to all sworn
personnel when a change in City Code affecting police enforcement
codes occurs and the web site will be updated.
14. VIRGINIA STATE CODES:
The Virginia State Code and abridged versions of the same are
recognized by the Division as written directives. The Division
maintains a complete set of Virginia State code books in the Crimes
Against Property side of Investigative Services. In addition, State
Code can be accessed in the legal library of the Circuit Court Building
and on the Internet.
15. CITY PERSONNEL POLICES
City Personnel policy manuals can be located in the Office of Human

Resources and on the City Internet web site.
16. TRAINING BULLETINS
Training Bulletins issued by the Training Academy are used to provide

guidance and/or affect the performance or conduct of employees.
Training Bulletins may provide written direction on how to conduct
certain tasks or procedures. Training Bulletins are issued
electronically and maintained for reference purposes on the Division
Intranet site under Training.
B. All Rules and Regulations, Policy and Procedures, Chief’s Directives, and
General, Special, Training, Instructor and Personnel Orders and Directives
will be assigned a control number. In addition, these directives will contain a
subject title, whether it is an original, amendment, or cancelation of a
previous directive; the effective date and the signature of the proper
authority.
C. The following procedures will be utilized for indexing, purging, updating and
revising written directives:
1. The Accreditation Manager will continually review policies and

procedures to ensure validity and compliance with Accreditation
Standards. Changes to existing policy or creation of a new policy will
be initiated after conferring with the appropriate Unit Commander,
legal advisor, or other person with knowledge. Policy changes may
also be initiated by the Chief of Police or any member who has noted
a need for review, provided the need for change has been approved
by the appropriate Unit Commander.
2. The policy will then be sent through the Policy and Procedure
Committee for review.
3. Once changes have been made, the policy will then be sent for Staff
Review.
4. The final step in the review process is a review by the City Attorney’s
Office.
5. After completing the review process and necessary changes have

been made, the policy will then be presented to the Chief of Police for
approval and signature.
D. When applicable each Branch Commander will maintain a written receipt that
indicates that appropriate major documents have been distributed and
received by sworn officers under their command (Appendix A).
E. An effective communications system requires concise, clear, and timely

distribution of information. Equally as important, a formal receipt system will
ensure that each member receives the information.
F. Unit Commanders will ensure that major documents are presented for roll-
call training in an effort to clarify and reinforce information contained within
the document.
G. This written directive system is established under the authority of the Chief of
Police. Any revisions, deletions, additions, or changes will remain the
discretion of the Chief of Police.
APPENDIX A
HAMPTON POLICE DIVISION

DOCUMENT/TRAINING SIGN-OFF SHEET
TITLE (Insert Title)
I have received and understand the above document/training:
NAME SIGNATURE NAME SIGNATURE

APPENDIX B
POLICY & PROCEDURE SERIES # PAGE 1 OF

SUBJECT EFFECTIVE DATE
OVERSIGHT
ALL MANUALS P&P #
I. PURPOSE:
II. POLICY:
III. DEFINITIONS: (if needed)
IV. PHILOSOPHY (if needed)
V. DISCUSSION (if needed)
VI. PROCEDURE:
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
APPENDIX C
(Insert Plan Title)
Revised: (Insert Date)

APPENDIX D

Office of the Chief of Police
GENERAL ORDER: (Order no.) (Date)
SUBJECT:
(INSERT NAME)
Chief of Police
Distribution:
Division Wide by E-mail
APPENDIX E

Office of the Chief of Police
SPECIAL ORDER: (Order no.) (Date)
SUBJECT:
(INSERT NAME)
Chief of Police
Distribution:
Division Wide by E-mail
APPENDIX F

Training Academy
Training Order: Date
The following personnel are scheduled for training as indicated:

School:
Dates: Time(s):
Location:
Personnel: (See attached sheet)

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS (AS CHECKED BELOW) :
Contact Administrative Branch one week prior to the training date.
Return the attached sign-off sheet within 5 days upon completion of training.
Use a city vehicle
Attached is a PIC-1 form that is required for out-of-state training in order that proper in-service
credit is received by DCJS. Have this form signed and forward it with a copy of the course
curriculum/ agenda to (Training member).
This training is required for State Re-certification. Officers listed above are not to schedule any court
during their training dates, and any court set for these dates will be continued.
ALL OFFICERS ARE REMINDED TO NOTIFY (Training member) (727-2896) AT ONCE IF A
CONFLICT EXISTS BETWEEN SCHEDULED TRAINING AND COURT CASES SET FOR TRIAL. IN
EVERY INSTANCE, COURT CASES WILL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER TRAINING.
IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY, ILLNESS OR UNFORESEEN CIRCUMSTANCE THAT THIS
TRAINING CANNOT BE ACCOMPLISHED, PLEASE NOTIFY YOUR IMMEDIATE SUPERVISOR
AND THE TRAINING UNIT.
Anyone having questions should contact the Training Section. Division member(s) will make
arrangements with the Unit Commander to schedule flex time (as appropriate).
By: (Insert name) , Commander

Professional Standards
Distribution:
APPENDIX G

Training Academy
INSTRUCTOR ORDER: Date:

TO:
YOU ARE ASSIGNED TO INSTRUCT:
SUBJECT:
Dates: Time(s):
Location:
TOTAL HOURS REQUIRED:

TYPE OF SCHOOL: Basic Academy In-service Other
Special Instruction:
Please make arrangements with your supervisor for rescheduling of duty time to accommodate this
assignment. If this cannot be accomplished, compensatory time will be awarded.
Anyone having any questions should contact the Training Unit.
By: (Insert Name), Commander

Professional Standards
Distribution:
APPENDIX H

(INSERT APPROPRIATE BRANCH)
COMMANDER’S OFFICE
PERSONNEL ORDER: (#) (Date)
The following assignment is effective as noted:
__________________________
Asst. Chief (Insert Name)
Commander, (INSERT APPROPRIATE BRANCH)
Distribution:
Division Wide E-mail
APPENDIX I

OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF POLICE
CHIEF’S DIRECTIVE: (Insert number) (Insert Date)
SUBJECT:
(INSERT NAME)
Chief of Police
Distribution:
APPENDIX J

PROFESSIONAL STANDARDS BRANCH
PERSONNEL DIRECTIVE: (insert name) Date: (insert date)
SUBJECT: (insert subject title)
ALL OFFICERS ARE REMINDED THAT IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO

CONTINUE COURT CASES WHICH MAY CONFLICT WITH THIS SCHEDULE.
Anyone having any questions should contact the Training Section, Sgt. (insert name
and phone extension). Division member(s) will make arrangements with their Unit
Commander to schedule flew time (as appropriate).
(insert name), Commander

Professional Standards Branch
Distribution:
APPENDIX K

(Insert Branch Name)
(Insert Branch Name)BRANCH DIRECTIVE: (Insert #) (Date)
SUBJECT: (Insert subject)
PURPOSE: (State purpose and procedure)
Asst. Chief (Insert name)

Commander, (Insert Branch Name)
Distribution:
SUBJECT EFFECTIVE DATE
STRATEGIC POLICE 05/30/98
OBJECTIVES OVERSIGHT
CHIEFS OFFICE
ALL MANUALS P&P #101 dated 07/15/86
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to set forth the Hampton Police Division’s philosophy on
strategic objectives in the delivery of police services.
II. POLICY:
A. The strategic plan of the Hampton Police Division is primarily concerned with:
1. Crime prevention and/or reduction

2. Crime suppression investigation of crimes and apprehension of offenders
3. Movement and control of traffic
4. Maintenance of public order
5. Public and emergency services
B. The activities of all Branches, Units and Squads are to be directed toward the
fulfillment of these objectives. This direction should be accomplished within
the legal, ethical and moral framework of the City and citizens which we serve.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
A. Through the Division’s community policing activities we will be proactive in working

to enhance the quality of life by improving neighborhood safety, fostering a better
understanding of cultural diversity, and promoting a responsive and flexible
approach to quality of life issues. We continually strive to increase the level of
service, satisfaction and knowledge of employees, residents and businesses by
utilizing community-oriented policing strategies to their maximum potential. We are
committed to strengthening our partnerships with the community through continuous
communication, interaction and education in an effort to assure customer delight
and create quality in everything we do.
B. These concepts should be considered flexible and dynamic. Furthermore, the

Division shall continually seek new and better ways of serving the public through
innovative techniques.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #103 - ENFORCING THE LAW Page 2 of 2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
CRIME AND 07/15/86
CRIME PREVENTION OVERSIGHT

Operations
I. PURPOSE:
To establish the philosophy by which the Hampton Police Division can work toward
the goal of crime prevention and suppression.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the entire Police Division to be conscious of this philosophy
and to make crime prevention and suppression the main goal in providing police
service.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
The problems which crime creates do not only have an impact upon the police, but
are problems, which concern the entire community. The Police Division’s
responsibility is to suppress and prevent crime from occurring, and to solve crime
once it does occur. At the same time, we realize that we can neither prevent all
crime from occurring, nor solve every crime, which occurs. With this in mind, we
must strive to obtain the greatest possible degree of active cooperation, assistance
and moral support of the citizens of Hampton.
This concept can be expounded upon using the two classical concepts of what must
occur in order for a crime to transpire; there must be the desire of the offender to
commit the crime, and he must have the opportunity to complete the act. Our efforts
as police officers are directed primarily toward eliminating and minimizing the
opportunity of the potential criminal. On the other hand, the desire to commit a
criminal act is controlled by an individual and his interactions with his community.
Police crime prevention techniques, which have proven most successful, are
aggressive and conspicuous patrol, with calculated deployment of patrol resources
against demonstrated problems. This patrol effort must be augmented by a
meaningful crime prevention program, which involves all police officers and solicits
and encourages community support through well organized crime prevention
programs.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #102 - CRIME AND CRIME PREVENTION Page 2 of 2
Although specialized units within the division have the primary function of managing
the crime prevention program, this in no way diminishes the responsibility of all
members to consider crime prevention a primary function of their individual
assignment. This necessity occurs since each citizen views every police officer as
the Police Division, with no restriction to specialty. For this reason, each police
officer is responsible for preventing those crimes, which are preventable by police
action, and to take appropriate action when crimes or emergencies occur.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
04/08/99
ENFORCING THE LAW OVERSIGHT
CHIEFS OFFICE
I. PURPOSE:
To set forth the Hampton Police Division’s philosophy as it relates to enforcing the
law.
II. POLICY:
All members of the Hampton Police Division will reflect this philosophy in the
performance of law enforcement duties.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
The primary purpose for the existence of law enforcement is to provide necessary
regulation of individual members of society. This enables all citizens to exist free
from criminal attack as they move about in the community and exercise their rights,
privileges, and freedoms. The enforcement of law must be directed towards those
whom, by engaging in criminal activity, deprive others of their rights and personal
safety. Furthermore, although police assume the major responsibility for arresting
persons who violate the law, every member of society has the duty and responsibility
to arrest and detain criminals who commit felonious acts against the State.
The Virginia Constitution and the State Code require all personnel, prior to assuming
sworn status, to take an oath to enforce the law, uphold the Constitution of the
United States and the Constitution of the Commonwealth of Virginia, and to faithfully
and impartially discharge all duties incumbent upon them to the best of their ability.
The enforcement of every law in every instance is neither desirable nor economical.
For this reason, enforcement must be selective in nature, based upon time and
location, relative importance of the crime or service, crimes that are actually
preventable by police action, and those crimes that may cause additional or more
serious crimes to occur.
Discretion in enforcing the laws must be exercised by every officer due to the limited
resources available to the Division to deal with our many responsibilities.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #103 - ENFORCING THE LAW Page 2 of 2
Also, because of the ambiguity of some laws and the many alternatives to arrest,
each officer should use the most effective methods of accomplishing the purpose of
what the law was intended to accomplish. For instance, when minor violations occur
which involve a regulatory law with no victim, the police objective can many times be
best served by a courteous warning. On the other hand, officers at no time are
justified in scolding, lecturing, humiliating, or inconveniencing any offender,
regardless of the offense.
The Division must strive to impartially enforce the law with the purpose for which the
law was intended. This enforcement must be accomplished without regard to a
person’s race, creed, sex, religion, political persuasion, social status, or profiling
based on any of these attributes.
In conclusion, we must remember that the offender being detained or arrested is no

less of a person than the officer who is enforcing the law, and should be treated
accordingly.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
07/15/86
LOYALTY OVERSIGHT
CHIEFS OFFICE
I. PURPOSE:
To set forth Hampton Police Division philosophy as it relates to loyalty to the law
enforcement profession and the Division.
II. POLICY:
All members of the Hampton Police Division will demonstrate the highest standards of
loyalty to the profession, organization, supervisors and laws.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
Loyalty is defined as the quality or state of showing unswerving allegiance or

faithfulness in the face of any temptation to renounce, desert or betray. All members
have the responsibility to be loyal, both to the organization and to the supervisors who
manage the organization. This loyalty to the supervisors should be earned by leaders
who set examples of conduct through their lawful and ethical conduct. Also, the
conduct of every supervisor and officer must be in accordance with divisional policy
and ethical standards of the law enforcement profession. Furthermore, the highest
loyalty every member of the division can express is their staunch devotion to the
community they serve, since their service to the public is the sole justification for their
position within the City.
Loyalty is reciprocal in nature between the supervisor and subordinates. Supervisors

must support employees in the proper actions of their duty, and in return, officers must
give their loyalty to the supervisor and command personnel of the division. This
support and loyalty does not include protecting one another against justified discipline
for misconduct.
We must encourage personal loyalty at all times within the division. However, we
cannot encourage or accept over protection of fellow officers who violate the law
and/or divisional policies, rules or regulations. Such overprotection would be
damaging to the law enforcement profession and the citizens of Hampton.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1140 TRAFFIC LAW ENFORCEMENT Page 3 of
5
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
COMMAND AUTHORITY / 02/14/2022
RELATIONSHIPS / DEVELOPMENT OVERSIGHT
Professional
Standards
I. PURPOSE:
To identify the hierarchy of command authority in the absence of the Chief of

Police, establish authority and command relationships, and develop the span of
control within the Police Division command structure.
II. POLICY:
A system for command authority is established to provide effective supervision of

Police Division employees and ensure that continuity of command and leadership is
available when the Chief of Police is incapacitated, off duty, out of town, or otherwise
unable to act. Provide succession of command and development for Command &
Executive leaders within the Division.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. COMMAND AUTHORITY
1. Scheduled Absences of the Chief of Police
When the Chief of Police is scheduled to be out of town or otherwise

unavailable for carrying out command duties, an Assistant Chief shall
be designated by the Chief of Police to act as Assistant Chief in
Charge until the return of the Chief of Police.
2. Unscheduled Incapacitation of the Chief of Police
If the Chief of Police unexpectedly becomes incapacitated and an

Assistant Chief in Charge has not been designated, the following
succession of command shall exist:
a. Commander of Investigative Services Branch

b. Commander of Operations Branch
c. Commander of Support Services Branch
This established succession of command shall not preclude the

appropriate Branch or Service Commander being notified of certain
situations when necessary.
APPROVED:
INTERIM CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #105 - COMMAND AUTHORITY / RELATIONSHIPS / DEVELOPMENT Page 2 of 5
3. Staff Duty
Staff Duty is a function that designates selected Division Staff Officers

(Lieutenant and above) to be notified of all major and or unusual
events during a prescribed operational period and time. This
assignment will concentrate on weekends with a starting time of 1630
hours on Friday and ending at 0800 Monday. Dates involving
scheduled holidays will have additional days of coverage for the
selected Staff Officer. In practice; if a Staff Officer is working during
the scheduled staff duty period, they will be the default “Staff Duty”
representative. Duties of the Staff Duty Officer are as follows:
a. Be available for communication by phone or radio, able to

respond to incident locations(if needed), and become the
Incident Commander of various situations as needed.
b. Communicate with the Chief of Police on major or unusual
events that could have citizen, Division personnel, and or
political implications.
c. Provide guidance and assistance to on-duty supervision toward
the security, maintenance, collection, resources, and
processing of major crime scenes and situations.
d. Ensure the Public Information Officer (PIO) is notified of all
major or unusual events.
B. COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS
1. Staff Command
According to currently accepted thinking in the field of police science,

staff command is defined as the issuance of orders by an agent who
has no authority in his own right but performs the routine tasks of
command as a service for a principal. Examples of this type of
command include a dispatcher sending a police unit on an
assignment, or investigators directing the activities of Forensic
Technicians at a crime scene. Staff command affords little opportunity
for delegation of tasks. The span of control is limited only to the
immediate task at hand.
2. Line Command
The exercise of authority delegated by the Chief of Police to his

immediate subordinates and by them to their subordinates down the
lines of direct control to the lowest level. This delegation allows
managers to use their time more effectively. A supervisor’s
effectiveness will be determined by his ability to delegate tasks.
Each employee is accountable to only one supervisor at any given

time. Delegation will occur when there is an increase in supervisory
workload. On a first-line supervisory level, delegation of task(s), shall
depend on the nature of the task(s), the immediacy with which the
task(s) must be completed and the availability of a capable
subordinate to perform the task(s). Commensurate authority must
accompany the task(s) delegated in order for the subordinate to
execute it effectively. Employees are accountable for the use of
delegated authority. The delegating supervisor will also be held
accountable for all results of the subordinate’s efforts. The
subordinate will be responsible to the immediate delegating supervisor
for the execution of that commensurate authority. Regardless of
whether this delegation is of long or/short duration, the delegating
supervisor should define the task, the scope of responsibility, its
commensurate authority, and the time constraints associated with
execution of the task. It will be the responsibility of the delegating
supervisor to ensure that the subordinate clearly understands the
task(s).
Once the task is delegated, the subordinate should also be given the
latitude to accomplish the task(s). The optimum span of control should
be considered throughout the entire rank structure of this division. The
optimal number of subordinates per supervisor will vary according to
the particular level of management. As the ranking structure
increases, the span of control should decrease. Special
circumstances such as the nature of task(s) to be completed, the
scope of the tasks, and other managerial responsibilities may limit
managerial time. These circumstances may, therefore, alter the
number of subordinates so as to reflect a greater or fewer number of
subordinates. The number of subordinates per supervisor should not
exceed twelve in the case of first line supervisors, and proportionally
less as rank increases, except where no practical alternative exists.
Although each divisional component is under the direct command of

only one supervisor, any member of the division in a supervisory
position may, in an emergency situation or under circumstances where
the interest and welfare of the division or public are in jeopardy,
assume command over a subordinate outside his pyramid of authority
without violating the unity of command principle. It should be noted
that during a single police operation in which there is more than one
unit participating, unless specified in the operational plan, divisional
protocol allows the ranking officer responsible for the operation to
relinquish operational control to a junior member with greater expertise
or more experience. This does not, however, relieve the ranking
officer of his supervisory responsibilities.
The conditions, which must exist to justify “cutting across the lines of
authority or command” must be decided by the individual. Accordingly,
he must be prepared to defend whatever position is taken and
immediately thereafter, or as soon as possible, advise the person in
direct command of the subordinate of the actions and its justification.
C. SUCCESSION OF COMMAND: TRAINING & DEVELOPMENT
As Command and Executive leaders leave the Division, institutional

knowledge and leadership will leave with them. The Hampton Police Division
will strive to identify and develop both Command and Executive level leaders
for positions beyond their current rank. This process takes initiative from the
Chief of Police and combines training/education, additional responsibilities,
position management, and knowledge transfer/mentorship to be effective.
1. Training & Education: Command and Executive leaders should seek

leadership and management development from reputable
organizations. Though not an exhaustive list, the options below are
examples. Application for these types of educational opportunities can
be made through the Training Unit.
a. FBI National Academy
b. Senior Management Institute for Police (SMIP)
c. FBI-Law Enforcement Executive Development Association
(LEEDA)
d. Police Executive Leadership (PELS) through the University of
Richmond School of Professional Development and Continuing
Studies.
e. Arbinger Institute for Leadership
f. Membership to professional organizations such as Police
Executive Research Forum (PERF), International Association of
Chiefs of Police (IACP), and the FBI National Academy
Association.
g. Hampton Police Academy
h. Hampton Roads Regional Academy of Criminal Justice.
2. Additional Responsibilities: Duties outside the confines of one’s job

description will benefit leader development and knowledge in
preparation for higher-level positions. Examples include:
a. Command/Deputy Command or service on a specialty team
b. Project Management
c. Community Engagement/Presentations
d. Attendance at Executive/Command level meetings
e. Chair a Division committee
f. Serve as an Incident Commander
g. Project/Event Planning
3. Position Management: Command and Executive Officers are not

relegated to Policy 641 in regards to position management.
Opportunities to allow Command and Executive Leaders to move
positions, on a reasonable timetable, would provide opportunity to
learn and develop a greater knowledge of the Division as a whole.
4. Knowledge Transfer:
Transfer of tacit institutional knowledge is vital to the organization to
ensure the continuity of operations. Tacit knowledge makes up to 80
to 85 percent of an individual’s institutional knowledge and
encompasses insight, judgment, and “know-how”. This type of
knowledge can be shared utilizing several different strategies;
mentoring, job shadowing, and/or a knowledge transfer guide. When
feasible all three approaches are the best strategies. However, due to
manning and/or timing only one or a combination of these strategies
may be practical.
a. Mentorship: This begins with the Chief and flows downward

through the Command Staff. The Chief prepares and guides
the Assistant Chiefs, who prepare and guide the Captains, who
do the same for the Lieutenants. Open communication,
opportunities, regular and intentional feedback, and mentorship
will promote the development of leaders for subsequent
positions and provide a means of sharing institutional
knowledge.
b. Impending Separation: When feasible fill the position early to
allow for knowledge transfer by means of “field training” prior to
the separation.
c. Knowledge Transfer Guide: Prior to Command Staff being
transferred to a different position or leaving the organization, a
Knowledge Transfer Guide should be completed. This guide
should include, but not limited to, required routine meetings,
contacts, networks, recourses, best practices, and answers to
frequently asked questions.
1) Prior to the transfer taking place an informal meeting
should take place to discuss the Knowledge Transfer
Guide and discuss position related questions or
concerns.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
07/15/86
TRAINING PHILOSOPHY OVERSIGHT
Prof. Standards
ALL MANUALS P&P # 106 dated 09/01/76
I. PURPOSE:
To establish Division philosophy on the importance of training and keeping abreast of the
latest Law Enforcement advancements and techniques.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division that all personnel will be highly trained
and maintain a high state of readiness and proficiency.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
The training process is a continuing, never ending process, which must involve all
members of the Division. The goals and benefits emphasized by training include
development of professional attitudes of members who can more effectively and
efficiently accomplish the Division objective.
The implementation of comprehensive training reflects directly upon the staff of the
Division, since training is a function of Command. All supervisory and Command
Officers are obligated to provide training to their subordinates. Supervisory training
enhances the efforts of the Division Training Unit, but this bounded duty is a separate
responsibility which must be aggressively incorporated into a supervisory function.
All members are encouraged, in addition to Division training, to further their formal
education. The purpose of this education should be aimed at increasing members
personal abilities and potential within the Law Enforcement profession, and to meet the
demands of good citizenship. With this in mind, the Division will make every attempt to
adjust member’s work schedule to allow the members educational schedule to be met.
This arrangement will be accomplished as long as it does not adversely affect Division
operations.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
03/04/14
DISCIPLINARY PHILOSOPHY OVERSIGHT
CHIEF’S OFFICE
ALL MANUALS P&P # 107 dated 03/15/98.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to outline the Hampton Police Division’s disciplinary
philosophy.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to administer discipline in a fair and
consistent manner. Discipline in a police organization must be maintained in order to
ensure organizational integrity and effectiveness, and to maintain both public and
internal trust.
III. DEFINITIONS:
Fairness: Understanding the circumstances contributing to the behavior and applying

consequences in a way that reflects this understanding.
Consistency: Holding everyone similarly accountable for similarly unacceptable

behavior based upon the totality of the circumstances.
IV. PROCEDURE:
The following factors will be the guiding principles considered in order to determine a
consistent and fair corrective action when considering discipline:
A. Employee Experience: A relatively inexperienced employee may be shown

more understanding when making judgment errors than a more experienced
employee.
B. Employee Motivation: An employee who violates a directive in an effort to

accomplish a legitimate police purpose may be given more positive
consideration in the determination of consequences than one who was
motivated by personal interest.
C. Intentional/Unintentional Errors: Generally, intentional errors will be treated

more seriously and carry greater consequences than unintentional errors.
D. Degree of Harm: The greater the degree of harm generally warrants a greater
degree of discipline. Degree of harm is measured by a variety of means,
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P 107 – DISCIPLINARY PHILOSOPHY Page 2 of 2
including but not limited to: monetary cost to the Division, impact on public and
organizational trust of the officer.
E. Employee’s Record: In accordance with the City’s progressive disciplinary

philosophy, both positive and negative employee behavior in the past will be
taken into consideration when determining discipline.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
PHILOSOPHY ON ALLEGATIONS 03/15/98
OF MISCONDUCT OVERSIGHT
Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
To establish a philosophy on how to best prevent allegations of misconduct and how

they will be dealt with when they occur.
II. POLICY:
All members of the Hampton Police Division should understand this philosophy and
carry themselves so as to minimize allegations of misconduct.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
Every police officer must set high personal standards in his public and private life
which reflect a positive example for others. This standard of conduct must be of a
higher level than what is expected of the average citizen. Furthermore, officers must
not only live an exemplary life, but they must avoid even the appearance of
misconduct.
To insure the protection of both citizens and police officers, all complaints and
allegations directed against members of the Division will be investigated thoroughly
and objectively. Unfortunately, some citizens falsely accuse police officers of
misconduct. For this reason, officers must realize that vindication and support can
only be achieved by a thorough and objective investigation.
The Division has a necessity for continuous internal inspections to assure compliance
with established rules and policies. The objective of these inspections is to safeguard
and maintain the high ethical standards of the law enforcement profession. Members
who live by a high code of ethics should not, and will not, consider such inspections as
a personal affront to them.
It is well recognized that the person who never makes a mistake is the person who is
not taking any action. Also, all actions taken by police officers involve some decision
making prior to the officer exercising his authority. For this reason, there will always be
some honest mistakes in judgment which result from police action. However, even
honest mistakes in judgment cannot be concealed when they are not justified. This
presents itself since admitting mistakes is the first step toward correcting the error and
preventing its recurrence.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #509 – NAME Page 2 of 2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
11/27/06
POLICE REPORTING SYSTEM OVERSIGHT
Support Serv.
I. PURPOSE:
This policy establishes procedures for an administrative reporting system that provides
documentation on a day to day operational basis and provides a mechanism for
reporting activities outside the immediate structure of the agency.
II. POLICY:
Each unit of the Police Division complies with all procedures for a formalized reporting
system. The information, to the best of the recorder’s knowledge, is true and accurate.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
The Hampton Police Division provides the community with a full range of efficient and
effective police services through coordination and evaluation of its activities; as well as
predicting workload, determining manpower and other resources needs, and preparing
the Division’s budget with reliable and pertinent information.
IV. PROCEDURES:
Each unit of the Police Division complies with all formalized reports with information
that is true and accurate. This serves to provide management information on
Divisional activities.
A. Administrative Reporting
Daily reports provide a summary of significant occurrences during the previous

24 hour period. The purpose of daily reports is to keep personnel informed of
major crimes, accidents, arrests and other important activities. The daily report
is compiled by the Communications section, to be distributed to the Branch
Commanders and the Chief of Police for review and further distribution.
Monthly reports provide Branch Commanders with an opportunity to account

for the activities in their units during the previous month. These reports are
used to discuss administrative matters, comparative data (previous month;
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #109 – POLICE REPORTING SYSTEM Page 2 of 2
same month previous year or year to date). The monthly report also allows
Commanders to identify objectives for their units for the next month. Unit
Commanders are responsible for compiling a monthly report for his/her
respective units. The Unit Commander makes distribution to the Branch
Commanders and the Chief of Police.
B. Incident Reporting and Statistics
The Division records all reported crime, traffic accidents and other police
incidents accurately and completely. Incident Reports are in compliance with
the Incident Based Reporting System. Accident reports are taken in compliance
with Virginia Division of Motor Vehicle standards.
The accurate reporting of incidents allows for the analytical development of

trends and patterns of criminal and traffic activity. The scope of our crime
problem and the proper and effective police response is identified through
accurate statistics.
However, crime and accident statistics reflect only those incidents, which are
reported to or discovered by the police. Therefore, our statistics will never
reflect all of the incidents, which actually occur. We encourage citizens to
report all crimes and traffic problems, which they observe. This undoubtedly
increases the statistical rates, but to be truly effective, we must know the
location and scope of the problems we face as police officers.
P&P #109 – POLICE REPORTING SYSTEM Page 3 of 2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
08/13/10
CODE OF ETHICS OVERSIGHT
Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
To establish support for and adherence to the prescribed Law Enforcement Code of
Ethics and the City of Hampton Code of Conduct.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division that all officers will abide by the
basic tenets set forth in the Law Enforcement Code of Ethics. All members of the
Division shall adhere to the Standards of Conduct for City Employee’s as set forth in
City Policy. Ethics training will be provided for all personnel at least biennially.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
The public demands that the integrity of police officers is above reproach. For this
reason, the dishonesty of a single officer can impair public confidence and cast
suspicion upon all members of the Division. Officers must avoid conduct, which
might compromise their integrity or the integrity of their fellow officers.
The Law Enforcement Code of Ethics was adopted to provide police officers
guidance by which to live and work. Just as other professional men and women take
oaths to their duty, so must you to yours as police officers.
LAW ENFORCEMENT CODE OF ETHICS
AS A LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICER, my fundamental duty is to serve mankind, to

safeguard lives and property, to protect the innocent against deception, the weak
against oppression or intimidation, and the peaceful against violence or disorder; and
to respect the constitutional rights of all men to liberty, equality and justice.
I will keep my private life unsullied as an example to all; maintain courageous calm in
the face of danger, scorn, or ridicule; develop self-restraint; and be constantly
mindful of the welfare of others. Honest in thought and deed in both my personal
and official life, I will be exemplary in obeying laws of the land and the regulations of
my Division. Whatever I see or hear of a confidential nature or that is confided to me
in my official capacity will be kept ever secret unless revelation is necessary in the
performance of my duty.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #111 – CODE OF ETHICS Page 2 of 2
I WILL never act officiously or permit personal feelings, prejudices, animosities or

friendships to influence my decisions. With no compromise for crime and with
relentless prosecution of criminals, I will enforce the law courteously and
appropriately without fear or favor, malice or ill will, never employing unnecessary
force or violence and never accepting gratuities.
I RECOGNIZE the badge of my office as a symbol of public faith, and I accept it as a

public trust to be held so long as I am true to the ethics of the police service. I will
never engage in acts of corruption or bribery, nor will I condone such acts
by other police officers. I will cooperate with all legally authorized
agencies and their representatives in the pursuit of justice. I know that I
alone am responsible for my own standard of professional performance
and will take every reasonable opportunity to enhance and improve my
level of knowledge and competence.
I will constantly strive to achieve these objectives and ideals, dedicating myself
before God to my chosen profession…Law Enforcement.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
PHILOSOPHY OF 03/15/98
PROFESSIONAL STANDARDS OVERSIGHT

Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
To establish a basic philosophy with regard to investigating allegations of

malfeasance, misfeasance or non-feasance on the part of Division employees.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Division of Police to investigate all allegations of

employee misconduct received from any source, either outside or inside the Division.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
It must be recognized that no police agency could maintain internal order if employee
misconduct were rampant, just as it could not maintain social order if public anarchy
were rampant.
The Hampton Police Division is committed to correcting actions, practices, and

attitudes that may contribute to community tensions and grievances.
Discipline and accountability are an integral part of, and essential to, the police
agency. When properly employed, disciplinary measures create a positive rather than
a negative image of the police officer, and inspires public confidence in the police body
as a whole. Furthermore, it must be clearly understood that each employee is
accountable for the use of delegated authority, as well as the failure to use it.
A complaint must not be regarded as a dispute between two people (the officer and
the complaining citizen) but rather as a criticism that the delivery of police services did
not meet the complainant’s expectations.
It must be clearly understood however, that essential fairness is the key to the police
administrative discipline system; and standards must be set to assure this. Shifting
standards defeat an effective internal discipline system, and thwart the development of
self-discipline.
In order to effectively administer the disciplinary regimen in a manner consistent with

maintaining parity between officer’s rights and that of the community, close attention
must be paid to the following:
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #112 – Philosophy of Professional Standards (Continued) Page 2 of 2
A. Clearly defined policies and rules should be formulated and provided to the
officers in writing so that they understand what is expected of them.
B. The pursuit of discipline must contain itself to the erring individual and not
become so broad in scope that the majority suffers because of the offenses of
the few.
C. No barrier nor hindrance shall be placed in the way of any person desiring, for
good cause, to make himself heard regarding a complaint against any member
of the Division.
D. No one shall in any manner, either by personal bearing, manner of speech,

method of approach or any other thing create fear of reprisal in any
complainant.
P&P #112 – Philosophy of Professional Standards (Continued) Page 3 of
2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT 07/27/86
PHILOSOPHY OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
To set forth the Police Division’s philosophy on Traffic Law Enforcement.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Division to provide effective traffic enforcement

operations so as to prevent and reduce the number and severity of accidents occurring
in the city.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
The traffic obligation of any police organization is to prevent accidents. Accidents that
cannot be prevented, should be reduced in severity, and those that cannot be either
prevented or reduced in severity, should have legal sanctions controlling the violating
operators as a deterrent to other violations.
In the Division’s effort to provide a viable and effective Selective Enforcement Program,
it is essential to have an accurate base of information. The information that is needed
will correlate accident and traffic violations with times, locations and causes. This
information is obtained mainly from accident reports. Traffic Engineering and Traffic
Safety programs are designed around need based information which comes from
accident reports and court records. It is a proven fact that the quality and quantity of
traffic enforcement directly relates to the reduction of injury accidents, frequency rates
and fatal crashes.
Police Officers are required, by law, to report violations of the Motor Vehicle Code of
Virginia. One method of reporting violations is through the judicial system. It is through
the enforcement process that DMV and the courts become aware of habitual offenders,
revocations may be imposed. When a police officer does not place a charge in an
accident, it many times leads to more difficult litigation for the parties involved when the
civil issue is to be resolved.
The very vast majority of complaints pertaining to police officer misconduct stem from
misunderstandings involving accidents that are not charged. If the officer maintains a
bearing on the traffic obligations that are placed before him from a legal and moral
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P 113 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT PHILOSOPHY Page 2 of 2
posture both, then the question of discretion is placed in it’s proper perspective as a
most valuable police tool.
It is the Division’s policy that it’s officers utilize all the resources and tools available to
them in order to prevent and/or reduce accidents. Discretion should be used judiciously,
and if so done, will be one of the most valuable assets attributable to good traffic
enforcement.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
09/11/86
INSPECTIONS PHILOSOPHY OVERSIGHT
Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
To set forth Hampton Police Division philosophy as it relates to the inspections of

Division functions and operations.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to inspect all functions and
operations of the Division to assure quality delivery of police services and economy of
operations.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
Generally, organizations are divided into two categories: private or public; profit or
non-profit. Private organizations generally provide a service or product for a profit.
Public organizations are generally supported by tax revenue and provide a public
service. Both types of organizations are bound by the same managerial constraints.
Whether an organization is public or private; it must be productive, and in order to be
productive, guidelines and standards must be established to direct the organization’s
operation. Organizational guidelines and standards cannot be ignored or allowed to
deteriorate. Therefore, it is the obligation of administrators and managers to devise
and set in motion a quality assurance mechanism to inspect the resources that make
up the organization – personnel, material, physical plant and its finances. To neglect
any part is to invite dysfunction in all parts.
An organization cannot be set in motion and expect to function efficiently and

productively on its own momentum. A police department is no exception to this rule.
Every unit and service must be inspected on a recurring basis to assure smooth
functioning of all the parts, as they relate to one another, in order to reach a common
goal; the delivery of the best police services that we can provide.
Since the police division is a diverse organization with many distinctive parts and
functions, the person charged with its operation cannot be personally aware of all
matters. Therefore, the Inspections Unit of the Hampton Police Division is set up to
assure that policies and procedures are being followed and that goals and objectives
are being met.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #115 – INSPECTIONS PHILOSOPHY Page 2 of 2
Sound management principles are equally applicable to thriving private businesses

and law enforcement agencies. The public demands and expects full value from a
reputable business firm, and should demand and expect the same from their law
enforcement agency, namely: full value for each tax dollar, courteous and efficient
service, and good public relations. Inspections is a means of assuring honest,
impartial and quality enforcement, plus efficient and economical operations.
P&P #115 – INSPECTIONS PHILOSOPHY Page 3 of 2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
03/29/10
PROMOTIONAL PHILOSOPHY OVERSIGHT
Prof. Standards
ALL MANUALS P&P #116 dated 08/06/07.
I. PURPOSE:
To set forth the promotional philosophy of the Hampton Police Division.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to fill positions through promotion
based upon qualifications and merit. This selection shall be made without regard to
race, color, national origin, ancestry, age, marital status, religion, sex or handicap.
III. PHILOSOPHY:
The evaluation and selection of personnel for promotion begins with the identification
of employees who appear to have the potential for assuming greater responsibility and
who possess the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to perform at that level.
The Department of Human Resources in accordance with existing city policy shall
accomplish the identification and ranking of qualified and suitable employees for
promotional consideration.
The Commander of the Professional Standards Branch and/or his designee shall be
the liaison with the Department of Human Resources which shall be responsible for
administering the Police Division’s promotional process and shall ensure the security of
all promotional materials to protect the integrity of the process. Promotion materials will
be maintained in locked cabinets in Human Resources prior to, during and after the
promotion process.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #509 – PUBLIC INFORMATION Page 2 of 2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
03/29/10
Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
II. POLICY:
III. PHILOSOPHY:
promotion process.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
03/29/10
Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
II. POLICY:
III. PHILOSOPHY:
promotion process.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
10/11/89
SAFETY PHILOSOPHY OVERSIGHT
Support Serv.
ALL MANUALS NEW POLICY
I. PURPOSE:
To promote a philosophy of safety within the Division and to coordinate compliance

with the City’s safety program. Also, to identify specific areas of concentration
where safety procedures must be practiced.
II. POLICY:
It’s the policy of the Hampton Police Division to provide the safest possible working
environment for its employees. Practicing a safe, conscious approach to duty is
worthwhile because of the potential for saving lives, preventing injuries, and limiting
damage to property and equipment. Safety is the responsibility of the Chief of
Police, Managers, Supervisors, and every member of the organization. All Division
members are expected to comply with safety procedures and practices as regulated
by State Laws, City Ordinances, City Policy and Division Policy.
Safety is a state of mind, which should be possessed by every employee, and

exhibited through his/her conscientious effort to alleviate hazardous working
conditions, minimizes the risk, loss, and/or injury.
A. Division leadership is a key element in the safety program. Every manager

and supervisor within the Hampton Police Division has an inherent
responsibility to know safety procedures; promote a positive safety attitude;
enforce existing safety procedures; recognize hazardous conditions; and
correct safety violations.
B. Employees are required as a condition of employment to exercise due care in

the course of their work to prevent injuries to themselves and to their fellow
workers. Each employee shall:
1. Report all unsafe conditions to his/her supervisor.

2. Keep work area clean and orderly at all times.
3. Report all accidents immediately to his/her supervisor.
4. Obey all safety rules and follow published work instructions.
5. Wear required protective equipment.
6. Actively participate in and support the safety program.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #117 – SAFETY PHILOSOPHY Page 2 of 2
C. The Division has identified specific areas where safety is an important

concern. All Division members will familiarize themselves with safety
guidelines and policies as they pertain to the following areas:
1. Firearms handling and use procedures.

2. Daily vehicle operation.
3. Police pursuit driving techniques.
4. Office (workplace) safety procedures.
5. Appropriate use of force requirements.
6. Arrest techniques.
7. Physical fitness safety.
8. Building security.
9. General training safety.
10. Hazardous material precautions.
11.Communicable disease precautions.
12.Proper use of issued equipment.
13.Traffic direction procedures.
14.Vehicle stop procedures.
15.Handling and storage of workplace chemicals.
D. The Hampton Police Division supports the safety requirements of the City
Manager, Risk Management and the City Policy manual, and to this end, all
Division members should accept the responsibility for a safe work
environment. The consistent application of the Division’s safety procedures
will reduce the accident experience by revealing unsafe conditions and
practices, and emphasizing remedies to potential problems.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
USE OF FORCE 05/30/98
PHILOSOPHY STATEMENT OVERSIGHT

CHIEFS OFFICE
I. POLICY:
A. Members of the Hampton Police Division believe a police officer shall exert only
the minimal amount of force that is necessary to reduce the level of resistance
to law enforcement efforts.
B. Use of force applies to the equipment issued to police officers of this Division,
as well as any other items which could be utilized as a weapon, such as a motor
vehicle.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
HOMELAND DEFENSE 09/04/03
PHILOSOPHY OVERSIGHT
CHIEFS OFFICE
ALL MANUALS NEW POLICY
I. PURPOSE:
To promote a philosophy of Homeland Defense within the Division and a

partnership with citizens, businesses, and other city and government agencies to
ensure a safe and secure region.
II. PHILOSOPHY:
It is the philosophy of the Hampton Police Division to provide the safest possible
region for our citizens. Practicing an aggressive, proactive approach to Homeland
Defense is worthwhile because of the potential for saving lives, preventing injuries,
and limiting damage to property. Homeland Defense is the responsibility of every
member of the organization. All Division members are expected to be vigilant in their
conduct and always alert to potential threats to our security.
Homeland Defense is a conscious effort which should be practiced by every

employee, and exhibited through his/her conscientious effort to alleviate threats to
our region.
A. Division leadership is a key element in Homeland Defense. Every manager

and supervisor within the Hampton Police Division has an inherent
responsibility to be aware of current threats to our community, promote a
proactive Homeland Defense, and coordinate information with other areas of
the Police Division and outside organizations.
B. Employees are required as a condition of employment to exercise diligence in

the course of their work to proactively address areas of Homeland Defense.
Division employees, as first responders, have the greatest potential to save
lives and limit casualties. Each employee shall:
• Report all incidences that pose a threat to Homeland Defense to

his/her supervisor.
• Keep current on threats to the region.
• Work with citizens, businesses, and other city and government
agencies to eliminate and/or reduce threats to our region.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #114 – HOMELAND DEFENSE Page 2 of 2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
02/24/2020
PUBLIC VEHICLE PERMITS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The Purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for conducting investigations of

applicants for a City Taxicab Drivers Permit. (See Hampton City Code Chapter 38)
II. POLICY:
The Police Division will investigate all applicants for a City Taxicab Permit in
accordance with current Federal, State and City laws.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Investigations of applicants for a City Taxicab Drivers Permit:
The following procedure will be adhered to by all Central Records Unit

personnel in the course of receiving applications and public vehicle driver’s
license and conducting investigations as to the accuracy of the information
found therein:
1. The application will be completely filled out by the individual seeking the
taxicab permit. The applicant will provide all information required by the
City Code.
2. Each applicant will be questioned as to his/her understanding of the

questions and if there is any part of the application which he/she does
not understand. Explanations will be provided about any portion of the
form which the applicant may not understand.
3. Each application will be notarized only after all information requested on

the form is provided and number “B” of this procedure is completed.
4. A Record Information Requisition will be filled out by Central Records

personnel from information received from the Application for Public
Vehicle Driver’s License form.
5. The copy of the requisition, and any information received from the
requisition will be attached to the application and will be made a part
thereof.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1001 – PUBLIC VEHICLE PERMITS Page 2 of 2
6. The Central Records Section Commander, or his designee will review

the application in whole and will recommend issuance or rejection of all
applications for accuracy, in accordance with the Hampton City Code.
7. Records information may not be requested or received via the telephone

from any source.
8. The personal history of an applicant may be discussed with an applicant

only if and limited to areas germane to the application.
B. Inspections of Public Vehicles
1. Each public vehicle and the equipment therein in use within the city will
be inspected by the Special Projects Unit at least once annually in
accordance with Hampton City Code Sec. 38-24.
2. The Special Projects Unit will also be responsible for ensuring that every
taxicab for which a certificate is issued subsequent to July 1, 2010 is no
more than seven (7) model years of age. (Determined by the model year
of the vehicle not the manufactured date. i.e. a model year 2018 vehicle
which was manufactured in September 2017 may be in use until January
1, 2026).
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
02/24/2020
PUBLIC VEHICLE PERMITS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The Purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for conducting investigations of

applicants for a City Taxicab Drivers Permit. (See Hampton City Code Chapter 38)
II. POLICY:
The Police Division will investigate all applicants for a City Taxicab Permit in
accordance with current Federal, State and City laws.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Investigations of applicants for a City Taxicab Drivers Permit:
The following procedure will be adhered to by all Central Records Unit

personnel in the course of receiving applications and public vehicle driver’s
license and conducting investigations as to the accuracy of the information
found therein:
1. The application will be completely filled out by the individual seeking the
taxicab permit. The applicant will provide all information required by the
City Code.
2. Each applicant will be questioned as to his/her understanding of the

questions and if there is any part of the application which he/she does
not understand. Explanations will be provided about any portion of the
form which the applicant may not understand.
3. Each application will be notarized only after all information requested on

the form is provided and number “B” of this procedure is completed.
4. A Record Information Requisition will be filled out by Central Records

personnel from information received from the Application for Public
Vehicle Driver’s License form.
5. The copy of the requisition, and any information received from the
requisition will be attached to the application and will be made a part
thereof.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
6. The Central Records Section Commander, or his designee will review

the application in whole and will recommend issuance or rejection of all
applications for accuracy, in accordance with the Hampton City Code.
7. Records information may not be requested or received via the telephone

from any source.
8. The personal history of an applicant may be discussed with an applicant

only if and limited to areas germane to the application.
B. Inspections of Public Vehicles
1. Each public vehicle and the equipment therein in use within the city will
be inspected by the Special Projects Unit at least once annually in
accordance with Hampton City Code Sec. 38-24.
2. The Special Projects Unit will also be responsible for ensuring that every
taxicab for which a certificate is issued subsequent to July 1, 2010 is no
more than seven (7) model years of age. (Determined by the model year
of the vehicle not the manufactured date. i.e. a model year 2018 vehicle
which was manufactured in September 2017 may be in use until January
1, 2026).
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
USE OF SUBPOENA FOR 5/10/95
WITNESS FORM OVERSIGHT

Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
To establish the proper procedures for using the Subpoena for Witness Form in
appropriate circumstances.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of this Division to:
A. Establish and implement procedures to be followed concerning the use of the

form, and
B. Encourage use of this form whenever possible, which will minimize the
inconvenience to officers and citizens.
III. DISCUSSION:
AUTHORITY:
A. Virginia Motor Vehicle Code § 46.2-939:
1. Any police officer, in the course of their official duties in the investigation
of a motor vehicle accident, may, at the scene of any accident, issue a
subpoena to any witness to appear in court and testify with respect to
any criminal charge brought against any person as a result of an
accident.
2. This will have the same force and effect as if issued by the Court.
B. Code of Virginia § 16.1-260:
1. In cases where a juvenile is charged with an alcohol related offense and

is released to the custody of a parent/guardian pending the initial court
date, the officer shall issue the parent/guardian a Subpoena for Witness
Form, at the time of release, for the same court date, in the case of the
Commonwealth of Virginia vs. the juvenile charged.
2. This will likewise have the same force and effect as if issued by the
court.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1002 – USE OF SUBPOENA FOR WITNESS FORM Page 2 of 2
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. The subpoena will be filled out by the officer at the scene of the accident or
prior to a juvenile’s release.
B. All information will be printed legibly so as to appear on all copies, with witness
address directly below his name.
C. Telephone number of witnesses will be obtained in case of continuances.
D. The witness will be requested to sign the subpoena; issuance is affected

without witness signatures, and recipients are legally bound to come to court.
E. After the officer has signed the subpoena, the witness will be given their copy
(#3).
F. Officers will retain the fourth copy for their records and forward the other copies
to the Court. If a summons is issued for the same case, the witness subpoena
should be attached to it to ensure that they stay with the proper case.
G. Should the officer to be notified of a continuance, all witnesses should be

contacted by the officer to ensure their appearance on the new date. Should
the Court notify the officer of a continuance by sending the officer a court copy
of the subpoena form, the date and time the officer notified the witness should
be noted on the form and the form returned to the Court.
P&P #1002 – USE OF SUBPOENA FOR WITNESS FORM Page 3 of 2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
11/04/11
HIT AND RUN INVESTIGATIONS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
To establish the policy and procedures governing the investigation of “hit and run”
accidents.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of this Division:
A. To assign an officer to conduct a preliminary investigation of all at-the-scene

reported “hit and run” accidents.
B. To assign follow-up investigators to those accidents requiring a follow-up.
C. To administratively close all “hit and run” accident investigations which have
obviously reached a conclusion even though the perpetrator could not be
identified.
III. PROCEDURE:
Any officer assigned to investigate a “hit and run” accident will complete the preliminary
investigation to the extent possible, considering investigative leads, time available and
his supervisor’s discretion. All police accident reports, resulting from the preliminary
investigations of “hit and run” accidents, will be turned in to the Central Records Unit
when the officer completes his tour of duty. If the Patrol Officer intends to conclude
the investigation, he will indicate so in writing, attached to the accident report. A copy
of the report will be sent to the officer for completion. All “hit and run” accidents with no
investigative leads will be inactivated by the initial investigating officer.
A. Felony Hit and Run Investigations
1. Any Hit and Run accident meeting the criteria in Virginia State Code
(§46.2-894) will be investigated as a Felony.
2. A case file will be completed on these cases as in any other felony

investigation in accordance with Policy and Procedure and turned in to
Records and forwarded to Investigative Services for filing. A copy of the
case file will be forwarded to the Commonwealth’s Attorney by
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1003 – HIT & RUN INVESTIGATIONS Page 2 of 2
Investigative Services. Officer’s will sign-out the case file for court from
Investigative Services and return it after court is completed.
B. All reports of “hit and run” accidents with possible investigative leads will be
reviewed by the Central Records Supervisor or their designee who will make
one of the following decisions:
1. Allow the preliminary Investigating Officer to follow-up the investigation if

the officer has indicated his intent to follow-up the investigation, or if
there are investigative leads requiring reasonable local follow-up.
2. Assign the “hit and run” follow-up to the Traffic Unit for further
investigation. This is done when the follow-up requires going outside the
local area (Hampton/Newport News), or will consume an extensive
amount of time, where it would be impractical for the Uniform Shift Patrol
Officer to conduct the follow-up.
3. “Hit and run” accidents may be administratively closed by the initial

investigating officer/follow-up investigator after all information pertaining
to the accident has been reviewed with the investigator's Supervisor and
it is reasonably determined that the identity of the perpetrator cannot be
determined.
These procedures will be used in conjunction with all relevant existing Divisional
policies, procedures, rules and regulations.
P&P #1003 – HIT & RUN INVESTIGATIONS Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
01/28/10
ACCIDENT AND ELIGIBILITY
REVIEW BOARDS OVERSIGHT
CHIEF’S OFFICE
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this Policy and Procedure is to outline the responsibilities of the Police
Division Safety and Accident Review Board and the Take Home Car Eligibility Review
Board.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division that all motor vehicle and industrial
accidents (a serious/severe job related injury to an employee not falling under the
motor vehicle accident guidelines) involving Division personnel and/or equipment will
be reviewed by the Safety and Accident Review Board.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. ACCIDENT REVIEW BOARD: This board will be comprised of no less than 5

members of the Hampton Police Division of varying ranks appointed by the Chief.
The senior ranking member appointed to the board will serve as chairperson. This
board may not meet unless the chairperson is present (a quorum of 3 must be
present).
B. The Safety and Accident Review Board will determine the cause, responsibility, and
the preventability of all industrial and police vehicle accidents.
C. The Safety and Accident Review Board will investigate all complaints pertaining to
industrial accidents and will take whatever corrective measures are deemed
necessary. The Board will make itself aware of the safety environment of the
Police Division and will make recommendations to the Chief of Police on what
measures they view as being necessary for the safety of all employees.
D. The Safety and Accident Review Board will review accidents involving police
vehicles to determine if the accident was preventable or non-preventable.
a. The Accident Review Board will convene monthly to review police vehicle
accidents.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1004 – ACCIDENT AND ELIGIBILITY REVIEW BOARDS Page 2 of 3
b. DECISION CRITERIA This review will consider whether each accident was
preventable or non-preventable based on the following criteria: facts of the
particular accident as they pertain to compliance with existing laws and
policies, negligence, contributing factors, and if the officer(s) involved in the
accident used due care and caution.
c. Any Member who has an accident brought before the board has the right to
be present during the inquiry and to request the presence of any other
member of the Division or witness to be present in order to answer inquires
relative to the facts at issue.
d. The Accident Review Board will not recommend disciplinary action.
e. ACTION OF THE BOARD Within 5 (five) days of the Accident Review

Board, the Chairman will forward in writing the boards findings and
reasoning to the Eligibility Review Board Chairman.
E. ELIGIBLITY REVIEW BOARD: This board will be comprised of all Division

Captains (a quorum of 3 must be present) and the Operations Branch Major who
will serve as the chairperson.
a. It is the responsibility of the Eligibility Review Board Chairman to assure that

notice regarding the findings of the Accident Review Board (from “e” above)
are forwarded to the officer in question within 15 (fifteen) calendar days of
the date of the Accident Board reviewing the accident.
b. The Eligibility Review Board will review all preventable accidents for a period
of the previous three (3) years from the date of the officer’s most recent
accident and make recommendations to the Chief of Police on the action to
be taken in each case
c. DECISION CRITERIA: This review will consider each preventable accident

in terms of the following criteria: if the officer used due care and caution,
negligence on the part of the officer, frequency (accident history, periods
between accidents and patterns of the particular officer), contributing
factors, and extent of damage/injury to officer, citizen or property.
d. ACTION OF THE BOARD: Recommendations of the Board may be made

at the following levels. However, actions taken at these decision levels will
be based upon the “Decision Criteria” listed above. Nothing in this process
shall preclude the Eligibility Board from taking those actions that are
appropriate to the particular case with regard to the “Decision Criteria”.
(1) First Preventable Accident – Counseling will be conducted by

the officer’s immediate supervisor and will include an entry on
the “Supervisor’s Record of Employee” card. The officer will be
required to attend an eight (8) hour defensive driving course.
(2) Second Preventable Accident (within the 3 year period) –

Letter of Reprimand and the officer will be required to attend an
P&P #1004 – ACCIDENT AND ELIGIBILITY REVIEW BOARDS Page 3 of 3
eight (8) hour defensive driving course. In cases where the

officer is a participant in the Take Home Car program their
privilege will be removed for a period of 60 days (the vehicle will
be parked at their respective Field Office). The officer will be
expected to meet ALL of the requirements for initial eligibility. In
the event additional preventable accidents occur during this
period; extended eligibility requirements will be applied where
applicable.
(3) Third Preventable Accident (within the 3 year period) – One

Working Day Suspension Without Pay and the officer will be
required to attend an eight (8) hour defensive driving course. In
cases where the officer is a participant in the Take Home Car
program, they will be removed from the program for a period of
one (1) year. The officer will be expected to meet ALL of the
requirements for initial eligibility. In the event additional
preventable accidents occur during this period; extended
eligibility requirements will be applied where applicable.
(4) Additional preventable accidents could result in further disciplinary

action up to and including dismissal.
(5) These findings will serve only as guidelines for recommended

actions. Each accident review will be specifically applied to the
particular accident.
F. In the event a preventable accident is reviewed that involves an officer who is not a
participant in the Take Home Car Program, the action of the Board will also involve
the extension of eligibility. In these cases the officer’s ineligibility will be extended
for a specified time from the date they would have become eligible.
SUBJECT:
EFFECTIVE DATE
TRAFFIC RADAR/LIDAR 04/21/09
OPERATIONS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the operation of RADAR/LIDAR
to ensure highway safety.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to utilize police traffic RADAR/LIDAR to
maximize speed enforcement efforts and to ensure that only trained and certified
RADAR/LIDAR operators are assigned to speed enforcement.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Operational Considerations:
1. RADAR operators will set up and test their instruments as soon as is

practical at the beginning of their tour of duty. LIDAR operators will test
their instrument at the LIDAR testing site located at police headquarters
prior to any enforcement actions.
2. Because the RADAR/LIDAR instrument is only a tool to verify a speeding

violation, RADAR/LIDAR operators will monitor the movement of traffic in
a diligent manner.
3. RADAR/LIDAR operators will employ sound judgment during

enforcement of speed violations and ensure the safety of both
pedestrians and motorists while engaged in radar operations.
4. At a minimum, RADAR/LIDAR instruments will be tested for accuracy

prior to and again at the end of the tour of duty. In addition to this
minimum requirement, the RADAR/LIDAR instrument will be tested
periodically during the shift to ensure the instrument is continuing to
function properly.
5. The auto-lock and the audio-alert feature found on some instruments will
not be used by RADAR operators for enforcement purposes. This does
not pertain to LIDAR.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1005 – TRAFFIC RADAR / LIDAR OPERATIONS Page 2 of 3
6. It is not required that violators speed be locked on the RADAR’s visual

display, but operators may MANUALLY lock violator speed if an
adequate tracking history has been obtained prior to the locking of the
speed. The LIDAR instrument will automatically lock the violators speed.
7 The Audio-Doppler on RADAR and the Audible Tone on LIDAR will be

utilized during all enforcement actions.
8. RADAR/LIDAR will not be operated during weather conditions that could

make enforcement operations unsafe or impractical, i.e., fog, rain or
snow.
9. When not in use, RADAR/LIDAR instruments will be stored in such a

manner as to prevent damage or theft due to negligence.
10. RADAR/LIDAR operators will consider the traffic and roadway

conditions, the safety of others and the demonstrated need for
enforcement actions when selecting optional locations for their
enforcement activities.
11. LIDAR operators are not required to show the violator their speed on the
LIDAR unit, but can if they choose to do so.
B. Operator Qualifications:
1. Only officers who have satisfactorily completed the Department of

Criminal Justice Services “Basic Training Program in RADAR Speed
Measurement” shall be certified as Police Traffic RADAR Operators.
This includes all RADAR field training requirements. Only officers who
have satisfactorily completed the “Basic Training Program in RADAR
speed Measurement” and the additional training for the operation of
LIDAR shall be certified as Police Traffic LIDAR Operators.
2. In addition to the basic training program, RADAR/LIDAR operators will

receive RADAR/LIDAR in-service training every three years from the
year of certification. Familiarization training will also be provided for each
new type of radar instrument assigned prior to its use.
3. Only certified police traffic RADAR/LIDAR operators will be assigned to

speed enforcement activities.
C. Equipment:
1. The Hampton Police Division will utilize only police traffic RADAR/LIDAR
instruments that meet or exceed current National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration needs.
2. Each police traffic RADAR/LIDAR will be assigned to specific units for

use as designated by the unit commander.
P&P # 1005 – TRAFFIC RADAR / LIDAR OPERATIONS Page 3 of 3
3. All maintenance and calibration records will be maintained by the

Special Projects Unit of the Hampton Police Division. Officers may
obtain certified copies of all calibrations for court purposes.
4. All officers assigned to the RADAR/LIDAR instruments will be

responsible for the proper care and upkeep of the equipment and shall
report all damage to the RADAR/LIDAR or malfunctions which render
the unit inoperative to their immediate supervisor, who shall notify the
watch commander. All LIDAR operators are responsible for immediately
notifying the Special Projects Unit Commander of any discrepancies with
the testing site.
5. When a RADAR unit malfunctions, the unit and all tuning forks will be
delivered to the Property and Evidence unit. The same procedure will
apply to any LIDAR unit that malfunctions. The officer will also place a
special report inside the RADAR/LIDAR case that describes the
malfunction.
6. Proper calibration of RADAR/LIDAR units will consist of prescribed tests

of the instrument. Failure of the unit to perform properly will result in the
RADAR/LIDAR being immediately removed from enforcement duty until
repairs are completed.
7. Maintenance and/or repairs on RADAR/LIDAR units will only be done by

a certified technician who will also re-certify the accuracy of the
RADAR/LIDAR unit after performing any maintenance or repairs.
8. Under no circumstances will unauthorized modifications be made to any

RADAR/LIDAR instruments.
P&P # 1005 – TRAFFIC RADAR / LIDAR OPERATIONS Page 4
of 3
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
12/04/01
ACCIDENTS INVOLVING DAMAGE TO
CITY PROPERTY OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P 1006 dated 08/17/93
I. PURPOSE:
To establish responsibility of the Police Division in cases where accidents have

resulted in damage to city property or injury to city employees.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Police Division to thoroughly investigate accidents, involving
any motor vehicle, on-road, off-road or industrial, which results in damage to city
property or injury to a city employee, when the employee is on duty or operating a city
vehicle.
III. PROCEDURE:
In order to facilitate the handling of claims against other parties as well as to insure
that the office of the City Attorney and Department of Risk Management have
complete and accurate information that will assist in protecting the city against
unnecessary loss, any type of accident involving any motor vehicle resulting in damage
to city property or injury to city employees shall be investigated using the following
guidelines:
A. In all accidents involving damage to city property or injury to city employees,

except those involving police vehicles, shift supervisors shall insure that officers
assigned to investigate accidents have completed a sixteen-hour basic accident
investigation school. (A basic accident investigation school is a specialized
school beyond the recruit school level.)
Investigation of accidents involving police vehicles will follow existing policy by

assigning supervisors (Corporal and above) to the investigation.
If a police vehicle accident occurs outside the City, the officer’s supervisor will
insure that an appropriate investigation is conducted by the law enforcement
agency having jurisdiction. If the officer is injured to the extent that medical
attention is required, the supervisor will travel to the location of the accident
unless circumstances are prohibitive. The officer involved in a police vehicle
accident outside the City of Hampton will, if possible, request that the
investigation include photographs.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1006 ACCIDENTS INVOLVING DAMAGE TO CITY PROPERTY/EMPLOYEES Page 2 of 2
B. Photographs will be taken in all accidents involving damage to city property

or injury to city employees. Photographs taken by the Police Division will be
in addition to photographs taken by other departments.
C. At the end of each tour, every officer who has investigated an accident
involving damage to city property or injury to city employees, shall
immediately forward a copy of the report to the Sector Commander’s office.
The original report will be forwarded to Records in accordance with existing
Division policy.
The Sector Commander will review each report for accuracy and
completeness. If there are deficiencies in the report the Sector Commander
will conduct or cause to be conducted, such investigation as may be required
to correct the report and forward the completed report to Professional
Standards – Training Unit. The Training Unit will be responsible to forward
the completed report to the Department of Risk Management. Any pictures
of the accident need to be sent to Risk Management when they are received.
D. Members assigned to investigate accidents involving damage to city property

or injury to city employees will make every effort to be as thorough as
possible in the investigation, and will pay particular attention to the following
areas:
1. Accurate diagram of the accident scene.
2. Detailed written statements of all persons involved.
3. Accurate measurements.
4. Photographs.
5. Verification of correct address, phone number, etc. of parties

involved.
6. Name of insurance company and policy number (where applicable) of

non-city employees.
7. Identify, and take written statements from all witnesses.
E. Notification - Officers investigating accidents involving damage to city

property or injury to City employees shall insure that the following
notifications are made:
1. City department responsible for the damaged property or employee

involved.
2. The Department of Risk Management, during their normal work hours.

P&P #1006 ACCIDENTS INVOLVING DAMAGE TO CITY PROPERTY/EMPLOYEES Page 3 of
2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
TRAFFIC DIRECTION 05/04/94
AND CONTROL OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P #1007 dated 9/11/86 and P&P #1008 dated 9/11/86
I. PURPOSE:
To establish procedures governing those activities which directly affect the movement
and control of vehicles and pedestrians, including periods of adverse road and weather
conditions.
II. POLICY:
A. Personnel of the Hampton Police Division will at all time give due consideration
to their safety and that of the public while performing traffic direction and
control.
1. Adverse road and weather conditions may include:
a. Accidental hazards, such as debris that has fallen onto the

roadway from another vehicle, downed power lines, trees or
signs, etc.
b. Acts of nature, such as fog, ice on the road, high water, etc.
c. Engineering hazards, such as an exposed guardrail end or other

objects that might be hazardous due to hill crests or curves, etc.
2. Upon discovering an adverse road or weather condition, Division

personnel shall cause appropriate agencies and persons to be notified
for the purpose of correcting the condition.
3. Division personnel will provide traffic direction and control services in the
vicinity of the adverse road or weather condition, as appropriate. These
services will be continued until the condition is rendered safe.
4. During extended periods of providing traffic direction and control services

supervisors shall ensure that adequate relief is scheduled for assigned
officers. If the conditions persist beyond a shift change such relief shall
be arranged as required.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1007 – TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL Page 2 of 6
The Police Division will carry out its responsibilities for traffic direction and control in
concert with other authorities by providing and managing appropriate personnel and
other resources to deal with necessary traffic direction and control services.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The major objective of those performing traffic direction and control is to

maintain and/or restore the safe and efficient movement of vehicular and
pedestrian traffic. In doing so, we have the responsibility for:
1. Regulating traffic flow
2. Controlling turning movements
3. Coordinating vehicle movements with the flow at adjacent intersections
4. Detouring traffic, as necessary
5. Arranging for removal of traffic obstructions
6. Controlling pedestrian movements
7. Facilitating emergency vehicle movements
8. Rendering aid and assistance to motorists and pedestrians
B. Manual Traffic Direction and Control
1. Personnel shall employ uniform procedures (signals, gestures, etc.) to

enhance driver and pedestrian recognition and response to their
directions. Personnel shall wear their safety reflectorized vest and wear
the uniform hat for high visibility in accordance with existing policy and
procedure.
2. Personnel performing manual traffic direction and control will ensure that
their presence and purpose are well demonstrated to drivers and
pedestrians by:
a. Positioning themselves so that they can clearly be seen by all,

usually in the center of an intersection or street.
b. Standing straight with weight equally distributed on both feet.
c. Allowing hands and arms to hang easily at the sides, except when
gesturing.
3. Signals and Commands
a. To stop traffic the officer should first extend his arm and index
finger toward and look directly at the person to be stopped until
that person is aware or it can be reasonable assumed that he is

aware of the officer’s gesture. (See Illustration #1 in Appendix)
Second, the pointing hand is raised at the wrist so that its palm is
toward the person to be stopped, and the palm is held in this
position until the person is observed to stop. (See Illustration #2
in Appendix) To stop traffic in both directions on a two-way street
the procedure is then repeated for traffic coming from the other
direction while continuing to maintain the raised arm and palm
toward the traffic previously stopped. (See Illustrations 3 & 4 in
the Appendix)
b. To start traffic the officer should first stand with shoulder and side
toward the traffic to be started, extend his arm and index finger
toward and look directly at the person to be started until that
person is aware or it can be reasonably assumed that he is aware
of the officer’s gesture. (See Illustration #5 in Appendix) Second,
with palm up, the pointing arm is swung from the elbow, only,
through a vertical semi-circle until the hand is adjacent to the
chin. If necessary this gesture is repeated until traffic begins to
move. (See Illustration #6 in Appendix)
To start traffic from both directions on a two-way street, the

procedure is then repeated for traffic coming from the other
direction.
c. Right turning drivers usually effect their turns without the

necessity of being directed by the officer. When directing a right
turn becomes necessary, the officer should proceed as follows: if
the driver is approaching from the officers right side, his extended
right arm and index finger and gaze are first directed toward the
driver, followed by swinging the extended arm and index finger in
the direction of the driver’s intended turn (See Illustrations 7, 8 &
9 in the Appendix). If the driver is approaching from the officers
left side, either the same procedure may be followed utilizing the
left arm extended or the extended left forearm may be raised to a
vertical position from the elbow while closing the fingers so that
the remaining extended thumb points in the direction of the
driver’s intended turn.
d. Left turning drivers should not be directed to effect their

movement while the officer is also directing oncoming traffic to
proceed. Therefore, the officer should either direct opposing
vehicles to start while avoiding left turn gestures directed at
turning drivers, which will lead them to complete their turn only
when there is a gap in the oncoming traffic, or to stop or hold
oncoming drivers, after which the left turning driver can be
directed into his turn. The officer’s right side and arm should be
toward the oncoming traffic, and the left side and arm should be
toward the left turning driver. After stopping oncoming traffic by
using the right arm and hand, the right hand should remain in the
halt gesture, then the extended left arm and index finger and the
officer’s gaze is directed toward the driver who intends to effect a
left turn. When the left turning drivers attention has been gained,
the extended left arm and index finger are swung to point in the
direction the driver intends to go. (See Illustrations 10, 11 and 12
in the Appendix)
e. Signaling Aids
1. The whistle is used to get the attention of drivers and

pedestrians. It is used as follows:
a. One long blast with the STOP signal.

b. Two short blasts with the GO signal.
c. Several short blasts to that the attention of a driver or
pedestrian who does not respond to the given signal.
2. The whistle should be used judiciously. It should not be

used to indicate frustration, but the volume should be just
that sufficient to be heard by those whose attention is
required. Therefore, whistle blasts directed at pedestrians
should be moderate in volume. The whistle should be
used only to indicate stop, go, or to gain attention, and
when its purpose has been achieved the officer should
cease sounding the whistle. If the whistle is utilized
continuously it ceases to hold meaning for drivers and
pedestrians.
3. The voice is seldom used in directing traffic. Arm gestures

and the whistle are usually sufficient. There are numerous
reasons why verbal commands are not used. Verbal
orders are not easy to give or understand and often lead to
misinterpretations which are dangerous. An order which is
shouted can antagonize the motorist.
C. Manual Operations of Traffic Control Signals
1. The following circumstances may warrant the manual operations of

traffic control signals:
a. Malfunctioning of the signal
b. Facilitating movement at traffic accidents or other emergencies
c. Providing a thoroughfare for motorcades.
2. Supervisors will ensure that prior to the manual operation of a traffic

control signal the responsible officer has knowledge of and is trained in
the operation of the manual control of such devices.
3. The Police Division shall provide an adequate number of keys in order to

allow ready access to the traffic signal control boxes by operational
personnel.
D. Use of Temporary Traffic Control Devices
1. Temporary traffic control devices include movable barriers, portable

signs and other apparatus intended for temporary deployment to assist
the safe and efficient movement and control of vehicular and pedestrian
traffic.
2. Temporary traffic control devices may be deployed in support of traffic

direction and control activities only with approval of supervisory
personnel.
3. As soon as practical following termination of the need for the temporary

traffic control device, the supervisor authorizing deployment of the device
will see to its removal/deactivation.
4. Portable or part-time signs may be utilized in conjunction with providing

traffic direction and control at special events. In this case the Officer-In-
Charge shall be responsible for the deployment and removal of such
devices.
P&P #1007 – TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL Page 6 of
6
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
10/08/2020
TRAFFIC ACCIDENT: OVERSIGHT
INVESTIGATING & REPORTING Operations
I. PURPOSE
To establish the guidelines governing the investigation of traffic accidents and the
reporting of “late” reported traffic accidents.
II. POLICY
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to thoroughly investigate and
document traffic accidents reported to the Division pursuant to legal standards.
III. DEFINITIONS
a. Traffic Accident – An unintended collision involving a motor vehicle in motion

that resulted in property damage, injury, or death.
b. State Reportable – Any traffic accident that occurred on public streets or

properties in or maintained by the City of Hampton that resulted in the following
either at the time of and at the scene of the accident or thereafter and
elsewhere (§ 46.2-373.)
i. Injury to or death of any person or,
ii. Total property damage to an apparent extent of $1,500 or more
c. Non-State Reportable – Any traffic accident that does not meet the criteria set
forth for state reportable accidents.
d. Traffic Accident Investigation – Collection of factual information identifying and

describing people, roads and vehicles involved; describing the results of the
accident in terms of damage to vehicle and roadside objects, injuries to people,
marks and residue on the road at final resting positions of vehicle and bodies;
interpretation of these facts in terms of behavior of road users involved; an
attempt to specify the combination of factors required to produce the particular
accident.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1010 – TRAFFIC ACCIDENT: INVESTIGATING & REPORTING Page 2 of 8
e. Traffic Accident Reporting – Basic data collection to identify and classify a

traffic accident and the persons, vehicles, time/location, movements involved
and possible contributing factors such as traffic law violations.
IV. PROCEDURE
a. Report Documentation
i. Virginia Police Crash Report (FR300)
1. Required to be completed for all state reportable traffic

accidents and non-reportable accidents as defined below..
Refer to the FR300M Crash Report Manual regarding report
completion requirements.
ii. Citizen’s Reported Accident Form (420-142)
1. If a citizen wishes to come to Headquarters, non-state

reportable traffic accidents and hit and run accidents with no
investigative leads that occurred on private property may be
reported by having an involved driver / reporting party (for
private property hit and runs) complete a Citizen’s Reported
Accident Form (420-142).
2. Whenever possible, Form 420-142 shall be issued by a
member of the Records Section. If this is not possible, the
complainant shall be directed to a patrol officer.
3. The following incidents require investigation and reporting via

Police Crash Report (FR300) and cannot be reported on a
Citizen’s Reported Accident Form (420-142.)
a. When injury or death has occurred as the result of an

accident.
b. When an accident results in total damages exceeding

state reportable amounts.
c. When the accident is a hit and run and there is evidence

which may lead to a perpetrator.
d. When the accident occurs on a city street and at least

one party remains at the scene.
The information for Form 420-142 may be taken by an officer

over the telephone. However, complainants should be
encouraged to come to headquarters and obtain the report

form. If the complainant does not wish to, or cannot come to
Headquarters, an officer shall be dispatched to his/her location.
b. Reporting Requirements
i. Traffic accidents reported to the Division will be investigated and

documented on either the Virginia Police Crash Report (FR300) or the
Citizen’s Accident Report Form (420-142).
ii. State reportable accidents require officer response, on-scene accident
investigation, and documentation on the Police Crash Report (FR300)
to include:
1. Interviewing drivers, other involved parties, and witnesses

2. Examining and recording vehicle damage
3. Examining and recording effects of the accident on the roadway
4. Taking measurements, as appropriate
5. Taking photographs, as appropriate
6. Collecting and preserving evidence
7. Exchanging information among drivers and other involved
parties as necessary.
iii. Non-state reportable accidents
1. Officers responding to traffic accidents meeting non-state

reportable criteria may complete and provide involved parties
with the Division’s Citizen’s Accident Report Form (420-142) if
the following conditions are met:
a. The estimated combined damage between both vehicles

is obviously minor and therefore significantly below state
reporting requirements.
b. All required reporting information for all involved parties

is confirmed.
c. All involved parties agree to damage estimates and the

Citizen’s Accident Report Form process.
1) Recorded pursuant to P&P 1137 Mobile Audio /

Visual recordings.
2. Officers responding to traffic accidents meeting non-state

reportable criteria will investigate and document the accident on
the Police Crash Report (FR300) if the following circumstances

exist:
a. Any of the involved parties’ information cannot be

verified.
b. The estimated combined damage between both vehicles
is questioned by any of the involved parties.
c. The involved parties do not agree to the Citizen Accident
Report Form process.
iv. Private Property Accidents
1. Private property accidents resulting in the following require
officer response for investigation and documentation on the
Police Crash Report (FR300):
a. Death
b. Injury
c. Total property damage in excess of state reportable
amounts
d. Hit and run with investigative leads
e. DUI in parking lot
f. Involvement of hazardous material
2. All other private property accidents will be documented by
having those involved complete a Citizen Accident Report
Form.
c. Response
i. Dispatch of officers to traffic accident scenes reported to the Division.
1. When directed to respond to a traffic accident, officers will be

informed of the exact location, severity of the accident, traffic
conditions and other units assigned (including ambulance,
wrecker or fire apparatus), to the extent that this information is
available to the Division.
2. Officers directed to respond to an accident scene should

choose the best possible approach route, considering traffic
flow and congestion problems, based upon their knowledge of
conditions normally existing in the area.
3. While enroute to the scene, officers should be alert for vehicles

which give an indication of involvement in the accident.
4. Upon approaching the accident scene, officers should remain

alert for and avoid obliterating or destroying evidence (e.g., tire
marks, debris, etc.)
5. During the approach to the scene, officers should be alert for

specific conditions or factors that may have contributed to the
accident (e.g., visibility/view obstructions, inoperative traffic
control devices, road hazards, etc.).
ii. Notification by officers of traffic accidents encountered by them.
1. As soon as possible upon encountering an unreported accident,

officers shall notify headquarters of the accident location,
probable severity, assistance required and any other pertinent
information.
2. The officer discovering the unreported accident shall be the

investigating officer/officer-in-charge, unless otherwise advised.
iii. Upon arrival at the accident scene:
1. Officers should park their police vehicle in such a manner as to

provide maximum protection of the scene without jeopardizing
their patrol vehicles or endangering the public.
2. Officers should assess the scene to determine need for

assistance in protecting the scene, controlling traffic and
summonsing appropriate assistance (e.g., emergency medical
care, ambulance, firefighting personnel and equipment, etc.).
3. The control of traffic should be such that the situation at the

accident scene is kept from becoming worse. This may require
the use of flares, traffic cones, manual control of traffic signaling
devices and use of additional personnel for traffic point control.
4. In general, the first officer arriving at the scene is expected to

take charge and shall retain charge of the scene until
completion of operations.
a. Exceptions to this may include the subsequent arrival of

a supervisor or assigned investigating officer.
b. Notwithstanding that officers should retain charge of the

accident scene, when authorized emergency medical
personnel arrive; authority for the care of injured persons

should be entrusted to them.
iv. Officers will conduct such on-scene traffic investigative and reporting
activities as are necessary and appropriate, given the nature and
circumstances of the accident.
1. The Police Crash Report will contain all available information

relevant to the accident and include:
a. The exact location, time and date of the accident

b. The insertion of information in each appropriate block
and space
c. Drivers statements form each driver involved
d. A clear, accurate diagram detailing how the accident

occurred
e. A brief, concise statement describing the events of the

accident
f. Which driver was charged and what charges were

placed.
2. If information is unknown to the officer, he shall place a “U” in

the appropriate block or space.
v. Officers will take enforcement action based upon the evidence

obtained from their investigative and reporting activities.
vi. Consistent with the need to deal with injuries and actual or potential
hazards, and with the need to obtain and preserve evidence, officers
will arrange for the prompt and safe removal from the scene of all
involved vehicles and debris.
vii. Development of follow-up information on traffic accidents is

undertaken in support of possible prosecution. This follow-up
information may include but not be limited to:
1. Collecting “off-scene” data
a. Additional photographs and measurements
b. Physicians reports on nature and extent of injuries
c. Further examination of vehicles

d. Analysis and collection of paint or glass for matching

purposes.
2. Obtaining/recording formal statements of witnesses.
a. The purpose of a formal statement is to obtain a written

record of exactly what a particular person says about the
accident. These statements may not include everything
that the person knows if he is willing to tell all he knows.
It may include things he has imagined but does not
know and it may include lies. For these reasons it is
imperative to record statements accurately in the event
he does not remember and changes his statement at a
later time. All statements must be documented on
addendums or additional standard paper and attached to
the original report.
b. Generally, statements should be obtained in the following
manner:
i. Find out what he will or will not say about the accident
ii. Reduce this to writing
iii. Attempt to get the individual to agree to what has been
written
iv. Attempt to obtain statements in each driver’s presence.
3. If the accident is such that it may result in the placement of

felony charges, the investigating officer shall follow the same
procedural guidelines established for other felony criminal matters.
viii. The reconstruction of an accident may include two levels of

reconstruction. The level will be determined by the degree of expertise
required in reconstructing the particular accident.
1. Reconstruction by the investigating officer.
a. Make measurements to prepare the accident diagram

b. Measure grades, sight distances, view obstructions, and
determine surface friction of the road
c. Observe visibility of vehicles, pedestrians and traffic
control under specified conditions.
d. Discover and record what participants and other
witnesses say about the accident.
e. Examine in detail lamps, tires and occupant restraints.
f. Examine in detail damage to the vehicles.
g. Examine skids, yaws and other evidence in an effort to

determine speeds.
ix. Other Expert Testimony
1. Professional reconstruction is an effort to determine from

available information, how the accident happened. Professional
reconstruction usually involves data collection beyond the
competence of Division personnel and experiments conducted
for specific purposes.
2. On those occasions when follow-up investigations may require

special skills and technical assistance beyond that available
from divisional personnel, the Police Division will use the
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services or other resources
as deemed necessary and appropriate.
x. The preparation of formal reports to support charges arising from the

accident.
1. Accident investigations will be recorded on state accident from

as directed in the Division of Motor Vehicle Police Officer
Instruction Manual. An exception to this will be the reporting
process, established in this policy for handling parking
lot/private property accidents.
2. In all felony accident investigation, case files and the

appropriate reports will be completed and included as part of
the case file.
3. In the event the accident involves a fatality, additional reporting

requirements will be followed.
xi. Supervisors will review for completeness and accuracy and sign-off on
all accident reports prior to them being turned in at the end of the shift.
xii. At the end of each duty tour, every officer who has investigated a
traffic accident shall forward the field notes to records by placing them
in the basket labeled “Traffic Records” in the Information Section
(NOTE: Community Policing Center Patrol Officers turn their reports in
to a supervisor, who then makes the distribution).
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
FATAL TRAFFIC CRASH 08/30/11
INVESTIGATION OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
To establish standard procedures for the investigation of motor vehicle crashes in

which death has occurred or is most likely to occur.
II. POLICY:
When death occurs as a result of a motor vehicle crash, several additional duties and
responsibilities become involved in the investigative process. Therefore, emphasis is
placed on the accomplishment of these additional duties and responsibilities to insure
that a complete and quality investigation is conducted. The Fatal Crash Supervisor
(AKA: Fatality Accident Supervisor) is responsible to assign whatever resources are
necessary to complete the fatality investigation.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Communications will notify the Road Sergeant, Watch Commander and Traffic
Unit Supervisor immediately upon determination that a fatal/possible fatal crash
has occurred. The Watch Commander will then notify the Deputy Commander
of Field Operations/Staff Duty Officer. The Traffic Unit Supervisor or designated
Fatality Crash Supervisor will be assigned to be responsible for the supervisory
responsibilities of the investigation. This assignment should be made as early
in the investigation as possible.
1. Because of the necessity for a complete on scene investigation, a

second Fatality Investigator should be assigned by the Fatality Crash
Supervisor to assist the primary investigating officer. The second officer
shall assist the primary investigating officer until released by the crash
supervisor. These investigators will not be available for any other
assignments until the Fatality Crash Supervisor determines the urgent
requirements of the investigation have been accomplished.
2. In all fatal crashes involving large trucks or buses, the Fatality Crash
Supervisor will assign a Level 3 Motor Carrier Inspector to assist the
Fatality Investigator.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1011 – FATAL TRAFFIC CRASH INVESTIGATION Page 2 of 5
3. All vacation, compensatory leave or assigned days off will be temporarily

cancelled for the investigating officer(s) until the progress and status of
the investigation is satisfactory, as determined by the crash supervisor.
4. It shall be the responsibility of the investigating officer, or the crash

supervisor, to insure the notification of the next of kin of the deceased as
soon as possible. He may do it through standard communications
procedures; i.e., dispatching another officer to notification of a law
enforcement agency to deliver a message, or through normal hospital
procedures, as circumstances dictate.
a. The next of kin should be contacted in person by police officers

whenever possible. It would be advisable for the officer to be
accompanied by a Police Chaplain or member of the clergy of the
denomination of the person to be notified if that is known.
b. If personal contact cannot be made, notification may be made

over the telephone. The officer should refrain from making any
statements pertaining to the death of the deceased over the
telephone. The officer should state that the subject (deceased)
has been involved in an accident and is at the hospital. He should
further state that their presence is requested at the hospital and
that the investigating officer will meet them there.
c. If the next of kin lives some distance from Hampton,

communication should be made to the police agency in the area
of the next of kin’s residence. The notifying agency should be
requested to make the notification in person and give the name
and telephone number of the Hampton investigating officer. The
responding agency should also be asked to notify the investigator
when the next of kin has been notified.
5. When an officer is dispatched to the scene of a fatal traffic crash, he

shall operate his vehicle in a safe and prudent manner and shall comply
with all existing policies, procedures, rules and regulations pertaining to
the safe operation of a police vehicle (see Policy and Procedure #1502 –
Operation of Police Vehicles).
6. The investigating officer shall request that a blood alcohol test be

conducted on the deceased as part of the postmortem examination. The
obvious exception would be a very young juvenile.
7. The investigating officer will complete the Felony Accident Investigation

Checklist and it will become part of the investigation case file.
B. OTHER PERSONS AND/OR ORGANIZATIONS TO BE NOTIFIED
1. In order to disseminate accurate and timely information without

jeopardizing the investigation or any potential prosecution, the Watch
Commander will also notify the Division’s Public Information Officer (PIO)
for coordination with any media requests.
2. Notifications above the Captain’s level will be made at the direction of the
Captain/Staff Duty Officer.
The Communications Supervisor will insure the notification of the

following individuals upon request (this list is not in any specific order or
priority):
a. The Medical Examiner – The Medical Examiner has the

discretion of proceeding to the scene or going to the hospital.
b. City employees supervisor – In the event a City Employee is

fatally injured or causes the death of another during his or her
normal working period, that employee’s immediate supervisor will
be notified forthwith.
c. The City Attorney’s Office – The City Attorney’s office will be

notified immediately of all fatal accidents involving City vehicles,
on-duty City employees, or under circumstances of possible City
liability. It will be to their discretion as to whether they will proceed
to the accident scene.
d. City’s Risk Management Office – The City Risk Management

office will be notified as soon as possible of all fatal crashes
involving a City vehicle, on-duty City employees, or whenever
there is possible City liability. If the crash occurs after normal
office hours, the notification may be made on their next working
day.
e. Investigative Services – When the assistance of Investigative

Services is deemed necessary by the crash investigator, The
Fatal Crash Supervisor will notify the Investigative Services
Supervisor and request the assistance of an investigator.
f. Commonwealth Attorney’s Office – The Commonwealth

Attorney’s office will be notified, in all cases where the possibility
of prosecution exists. The Fatality Crash Supervisor will provide
up-to-date briefings to the Commonwealth’s Attorney, or his/her
deputy, as requested. No felony charges will be made without the
authorization of the Commonwealth’s Attorney.
g. Company Owned Vehicles – When an employee of a business

organization is involved in a fatal crash, the owner of the vehicle
will be notified of the location of the vehicle, its drivability and the
contents or merchandise found therein.
h. Forensic Unit – The Forensic Unit Supervisor will be notified, and

a technician will be assigned to assist the Fatality Investigator in
the collection of evidence, photographing and video taping of the
crash scene.
i. Other requested notifications – Depending on the nature and

extent of the crash, Fatality Investigators may require additional
support, i.e., Public Works, City Electricians, Power Company,
Waterworks, Wreckers, etc.
3. Whenever an investigation requires the assistance of another law

enforcement agency, except for the purpose of next-of-kin notifications, it
shall be the responsibility of the crash supervisor to coordinate the
request for assistance.
4. Whenever the fatal crash scene requires the closure of any street, it shall
be the responsibility of the crash supervisor to determine the earliest
point at which the street can be opened without jeopardizing the
investigation.
C. REPORTS AND/OR FORMS REQUIRED
Without exception, the primary Fatality Investigator will complete a “Felony

Accident Investigative Checklist”. This checklist will become part of the
investigation’s case file. The crash supervisor will review and initial each item
on the checklist. Furthermore, it shall be the investigating officer’s responsibility
to complete the following reports and/or forms:
1. Police Accident Report (FR-300–P)
2. State Police Fatal Accident Message. (Current A.S.P. 41 format to be

obtained from the Communications Section.)
3. Witness Statements
4. Statements of drivers
5. DWI Report (when required)
6. Waiver of Rights Form
7. Cover letter to Commonwealth Attorney’s Office
8. Supervisor’s Incident Report – The officer will insure that the supervisor
has needed information for his report. If charges are involved, the
Investigative Services personnel will provide arrest information to their
supervisor.
9. Search Warrant for suspect’s blood alcohol content test.

D. PRESS RELATIONS
It shall be the responsibility of the Investigating Officer or the Fatality Crash

Supervisor to make information available to the Division Public Information
Officer for release to the news media. (Review Policy and Procedure #509 –
Public Information)
1. Before notification of next of kin:
a. Time, date, location of the accident
b. Synopsis of the crash
c. Name and address of person charged if the warrants have been

obtained
d. Name, ages, addresses of persons involved in the accident, all

but those who were in the vehicle of the deceased
e. Injuries
2. After the next of kin has been notified:
a. Name, age, address of all participants
b. Time, locations and date of crash
c. Description of how the crash occurred
d. Injuries to passengers and deceased
e. Charges which have been placed.
3. Information NOT to be released:
a. Names of juvenile drivers involved as suspects or accused
b. Opinions or other statements as to the character, reputation, guilt

or innocence of the accused
c. Alleged admissions, confessions, or the contents of statements

made by the accused.
d. References to the results of performance of investigative

procedures, tests (i.e., polygraph, BAT, fingerprints, etc.).
e. Speculation as to the possibility of a court plea or conviction
f. Personal opinions concerning evidence.

P&P #1011- Appendix
FELONY/FATAL ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION CHECKLIST
Officer Name_____________________ Accident Location _______________________
The following checklist is to be used as an investigative aid. It is intended to be used by an officer in order to minimize
inadvertent procedural inadvertent procedural omissions. This checklist is to be maintained with the completed case file.
ACTION COMPLETED TIME DATE

AT THE SCENE: XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
Ambulance/Fire – Obtain names of Paramedics & Fire OIC
Wreckers
Dominion Power, Verizon or Cox Cable – notifications made
Crime Scene Unit
Medical Examiner – Put Dr’s. Name Here
Watch Commander and Supervisor
City Employee Supervisor (if applicable)
City Attorney (if city involved)
Next-of-Kin notified
Owner of vehicle notified
Police Accident Report (FR-300-p)
I.B.R. Completed Incident #
Photographs/Video
Measurements
Evidence Collected/Labeled (with CSU assistance)
Driver(s) Identified/Statements
Witnesses Identified/Statements
Tow Sheet Completed
DWI Screening
Miranda Rights Advised to Accused
AT THE HOSPITAL: XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
Obtain list of injuries
Time of Death
Attending Physician
Blood Alcohol Test requested for deceased
Blood Alcohol Test requested for accused
Request Autopsy of Deceased (with assistance of CSU)
FOLLOW-UP: XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
Formal Statements – Accused w/rights form
Formal Statements – Witnesses
VSP Fatal Accident Message (File 41) SHALL BE
COMPLETED BEFORE OFFICER COMPLETES TOUR OF DUTY
Notify City Dept. of Risk Management (next work day)

Photographs developed by Crime Scene Unit
D.W.I. Report
Information for Supervisors Incident Report
Commonwealth Attorney contacted
Warrants Authorized/obtained/served (copy for case file)
Cover letter written for case file
Evidence processed by Crime Scene Unit
Complete Diagrams
Case File completed with all photographs, evidence,
statements and paperwork, etc. included and maintained in
Fatal Accident File in Records Section.
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
08/30/11
TRAFFIC UNIT OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P # NEW POLICY
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish the functions, duties and responsibilities of
the Traffic Unit.
II. POLICY:
The Traffic Unit will have the responsibility for the basic function of traffic enforcement.
These activities include selective enforcement operations, investigations of motor
vehicle crashes, investigation of fatal traffic crashes, enforcement of commercial motor
vehicle laws and investigation of complex hit and run traffic crashes with investigative
follow-up.
III. DEFINITION:
The Traffic Unit will consist of the following:
• Traffic Unit Supervisor

• Motorcycle Unit
• Motor Carrier Unit
• Fatal Crash Team
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. Responsibilities:
1. The Traffic Unit will have the responsibility of investigating all fatality
motor vehicle accidents (see P&P 1011) or the imminent probability of
fatality due to a motor vehicle crash.
2. Patrol areas within the City of Hampton to enforce traffic and criminal law
violations. Utilize traffic radar/lidar for speed enforcement activities.
3. Note suspicious persons and unusual conditions and make preliminary

investigations.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1012 – TRAFFIC UNIT Page 2 of 3
4. Ascertain information from citizens to aid in the investigation of crimes.
5. Report hazards that endanger public safety such as malfunctioning traffic

signals, downed/missing signs, etc.
6. Arrest violators for misdemeanors and felonies. Accompany prisoners to

headquarters or jail and complete a report of events leading to and
surrounding the arrest. Confer with Commonwealth Attorney or City
Attorney to coordinate courtroom testimony.
7. Appear in court as the arresting officer, reporting person, witness or

person with knowledge.
8. Participate in community relations/public display of activities of the

Division equipment and to answer questions regarding the unit’s
purpose. Provide escort services for funerals and parades.
9. Investigate traffic accidents and render first aid to injured persons. Direct
and reroute traffic around accidents or other disruptions. Conduct follow-
up investigations on Hit and Run accidents.
10. Provide the public with general information on laws, ordinances and
services available from the city and state. Provide directions to lost
persons and motorists.
11. Enforce Commercial Motor Carrier laws within the City of Hampton.
12. Perform other related duties as required to ensure successful completion

of the division’s mission.
B. Qualifications
1. Application must be endorsed by their current Unit Commander, and a

current performance appraisal on record indicating a "surpassed" (4) or
above.
2. Applicant must have the ability read and understand complex laws,
policies and procedures, and comply with the Division’s rules and
regulations.
3. Applicant must have the ability to follow written and oral directions; able
to work outdoors within all weather conditions; must score eighty (80) or
higher on Division firearm qualifications with Division issued firearm.
4. Applicants must be highly self-motivated, self-supervising, and

productive, with the ability to adopt a flexible work schedule. Must have
an overall physical assessment of a three (3) or higher.
5. Applicant must not have been involved in any preventable police vehicle
accidents in the last twelve-month period.
P&P # 1012 – TRAFFIC UNIT Page 3 of 3
6. Applicant shall not have had any suspensions during the twelve (12)
months preceding the application.
C. Training:
1. Preferably the applicant has previously completed an 80 hour Basic

Accident Investigation class, or must successfully complete such training
in the next available class to maintain the assignment. Applicant must
demonstrate an extreme proficiency within the field of accident
investigation.
2. Advanced Accident Investigation training may be provided after

assignment to the Traffic Unit. If so, successful completion of this
training will be required to maintain the assignment.
3. Other specialized training such as Motorcycle Officer and Motor Carrier

Team Officer will be addressed in separate policies.
P&P # 1012 – TRAFFIC UNIT Page 4 of
3
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
05/05/14
MOTOR CARRIER WEIGHT AND
INSPECTION OPERATIONS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish the duties, responsibilities, procedures and
requirements of Motor Carrier Operations to include inspection of Commercial Motor
Vehicles and weight operations.
II. POLICY:
It is the Policy of the Hampton Police Division to enhance roadway/highway safety

within the City through the enforcement of City, State, and Federal Codes pertaining to
the proper maintenance and allowable weight of vehicles operated on public roadways.
Enforcement action will be taken by properly trained personnel utilizing established
procedures and all applicable safety equipment.
III. DEFINITION:
A. Commercial Motor Vehicle - A motor vehicle or combination of motor vehicles

used in commerce to transport goods or property which has a gross
combination or vehicle weight rating of over 26,000 pounds, or is designed to
carry 16 or more passengers.
B. Inspection – A review of the equipment and paperwork associated with a

commercial motor vehicle conducted in accordance with Federal Motor Carrier
Regulations.
C. Commercial Motor Vehicle Inspector – An officer trained to the minimum

standards set forth by Federal Motor Carrier Regulations and Virginia State
Police and authorized to conduct Part A & B CMV inspections who has
maintained his/her yearly minimum certification requirements.
D. Weight certified officer - Officers who have completed a course of instruction on

commercial motor vehicle weight that has been approved by the Virginia
Division of Motor Vehicles.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1013 – MOTOR CARRIER WEIGHT & INSPECTION OPERATIONS Page 2 of 3
E. Out-of-service order - A declaration by an authorized enforcement officer that a

driver and/or a commercial motor vehicle is “out-of-service” pursuant to
applicable federal/state laws or the North American Uniform Out-of-Service
Criteria. During that time frame the driver is prohibited from operating a CMV or
in the case of a CMV, the vehicle cannot be operated until the appropriate
remedial action is taken to correct the deficiency which resulted in the “out-of-
service” order.
IV: PROCEDURE:
A. Training
Prior to engaging in any vehicle weight or inspection operations, the officer will
receive training in the proper procedures and methods for performing these
tasks. Officers will successfully complete this training prior to taking any
administrative or enforcement action related to this activity.
1. Officers performing vehicle weighing procedures must have successfully

completed the course of instruction approved by the Virginia Division of
Motor Vehicles on the proper procedures for weighing vehicles.
2. Officers performing Motor Carrier Inspections must have successfully

completed Parts A & B of the North American Standard (NAS) training
course. In addition, officers must complete their required apprentice
inspections as specified by the Virginia State Police.
3. Certified inspectors will attend in-service training as required and

maintain the minimum number of inspections, qualifications and other
standards set forth by the U.S. Department of Transportation and the
Virginia State Police and submit the required documentation of these
inspections to the State Police each year.
B. Equipment
All equipment assigned to the Motor Carrier Unit will be maintained in the Motor
Carrier vehicle unless otherwise authorized by the Traffic Unit supervisor.
Scales, wheel chocks, traffic cones, and all other equipment will be examined
prior to commencing any operation, and any safety issues or damage will be
brought to a supervisor’s attention immediately. Monthly equipment inspections
will be conducted as per Policy.
C. Inspection/Weight Operations
1. All officers participating in inspection/weight operations will be dressed in

duty uniform to include protective vest and issued weapons as detailed
in Policy & Procedure 533. This includes participation in regional or other
assignments that may take place outside the City of Hampton.
2. Prior to commencing an inspection/weight activity the officer(s) involved

P&P #1013 – MOTOR CARRIER WEIGHT & INSPECTION OPERATIONS Page 3 of 3
will mark out of service on the radio giving their location and license plate
of the violator. In the event the vehicle has a trailer, both the trailer(s)
and prime mover license plate will be relayed to Communications.
3. Officers performing any portion of these activities on a traveled portion of

the roadway will utilize their issued reflective vest and reflective safety
cones as necessary to maintain a safety zone around the officers and
vehicles involved.
4. Inspection/Weight operations will be suspended or discontinued should

weather conditions become unfavorable. This includes, but is not limited
to, rain, snow/ice, darkness, or any other condition which, in the
judgment of the officer and/or the Traffic Unit supervisor, is such that the
officers or citizens involved are placed at risk of physical harm.
5. A Commercial Motor Vehicle Inspector will be notified of all serious/fatal

motor vehicle crashes involving commercial motor vehicles.
D. Enforcement Action/Follow-Up
1. All weight violations will be addressed with the issuance of an

Overweight Citation, in compliance with the Code of Virginia.
2. Inspection Violations will be resolved per the Federal Motor Carrier

Regulations.
3. Any vehicle placed out of service will have a notice affixed to the exterior
indicating the “out of service” status. All costs associated with the repair
and/or transportation of such a vehicle will be the responsibility of the
vehicle owner.
4. Vehicle operators will be provided with a copy of the inspection report

generated by the approved Virginia State Police reporting system data
base by the inspecting officer at the time of issuance.
P&P #1013 – MOTOR CARRIER WEIGHT & INSPECTION OPERATIONS Page 4 of
3
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
11/18/09
SEATBELT ENFORCEMENT OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P & P #1014 dated 10/20/04.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for seatbelt enforcement.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to ensure that at every traffic
enforcement contact, the use of safety restraints is addressed, to include positive
reinforcement if the use of safety restraints is observed. Officers will be familiar with
the following codes that address safety restraints:
A. Child Restraint Law: Primary Enforcement
1. 46.2-1095: Any person who drives on the highways of Virginia any

motor vehicle manufactured after January 1, 1968, shall ensure that any
child, up to age eight, whom he transports therein is provided with and
properly secured in a child restraint device of a type which meets the
standards adopted by the United States Department of Transportation.
Further, rear-facing child restraint devices shall be placed in the back
seat of a vehicle. In the event the vehicle does not have a back seat, the
child restraint device may be placed in the front passenger seat only if
the vehicle is either not equipped with a passenger side airbag or the
passenger side airbag has been deactivated.
2. 46.2-1100: The use of a seat belt of the type which is standard

equipment shall not violate this article if (i) the affected child is at least
four years old but less than eight years old and (ii) any physician
licensed to practice medicine in the Commonwealth or any other state
determines that use of a child restraint system by a particular child would
be impractical by reason of the child's weight, physical fitness, or other
medical reason, provided that any person transporting a child so
exempted shall carry on his person or in the vehicle a signed written
statement of the physician identifying the child so exempted.
3. Exemptions: from 46.2-1095 and 46.2-1099: Public transportation, bus,

school bus, farm vehicle, medical reasons if physician statement is
displayed, impractical interior designs, taxicabs, executive sedans,
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1014 - SEATBELT ENFORCEMENT Page 2 of 2
limousines or the rear cargo area of vehicles other than pickup trucks.
B. Safety Belt Law: Secondary Enforcement
1. 46.2-1094: The driver and each passenger 16 years of age and older
occupying the front seat must wear a safety belt. Exceptions are mail
carriers, newspaper delivery persons, taxi drivers, certain law
enforcement officers, some commercial and municipal vehicles involved
in the collection or delivery of goods or services and some persons with
physical disabilities.
2. 46.2-1092: The driver is responsible if safety belts have been removed

or rendered inoperable.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. When safety restraints are not being used correctly, officers should provide the
appropriate educational information to encourage their proper use.
B. If the non-use or intentional misuse of safety restraints is noted, the appropriate

enforcement action should be taken.
C. The following methods will be utilized when addressing violations concerning

safety restraints:
1. Verbal warning
2. Summons
5
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
12/05/08
SCHOOL CROSSING GUARDS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
ALL MANUALS P&P 1015 dated 11/01/04.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for providing school crossing and
traffic control services.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to provide school-crossing services at

locations requiring adult supervision and traffic control. School Crossing Guards will
normally be utilized whenever and wherever possible. However, other Police Division
personnel may also provide traffic and pedestrian control.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. AUTHORITY, RESPONSIBILITY, SELECTION AND UNIFORM
1. Authority
School Crossing Guards are not commissioned as a law enforcement

officer and do not perform duties requiring sworn police authority. Their
authority is derived from State Code.
2. Responsibility
The Community Relations Unit will be responsible for supervision of

School Crossing Guard personnel and the School Crossing Guard
function.
a. The School Crossing Guard’s responsibilities are to:
1) Assist school children in crossing streets leading to and

from school.
2) Control children using the crossing to assure that they

conform to traffic regulations.
3) Control vehicular traffic at designated crossings to allow

children to cross safely.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1015 SCHOOL CROSSING GUARDS Page 2 of 3
4) Report children who fail to cooperate to immediate

supervisor and/or School Authority.
5) Performs other related duties as required.
3. Selection
The selection process for School Crossing Guards will be performed in

accordance with the selection process for PSO (Patrol Service Officer)
outlined in P&P 1201, Patrol Service Officers, Section III A (1).
4. Uniforms
School Crossing Guard uniforms will be specified by the Chief of Police

and will clearly distinguish them from sworn officers. They will present a
neat, clean and well-groomed appearance as stated in P&P 1102
Personal Appearance. The uniform for School Crossing Guards shall
be issued in accordance with the list in the appendix of P&P 532
Clothing.
B. ASSIGNMENTS
1. Crossing Site Assignment
a. Requests for Service
1) Requests for School Crossing Guards may be generated

from concerned citizens, school officials, or patrol officers.
2) These reports will be processed by the Community

Relations Unit.
b. Assignment Determination
1) The determination of locations requiring School Crossing

Guards is accomplished through a joint effort on the part of
the Community Relations Unit and the City of Hampton
Traffic Engineering Division of the Public Works
department.
2) The Traffic Engineering Division will perform the technical

analysis of potential School Crossing locations. This
process may include consideration of such variables as
traffic volume/speed, availability of adequate gaps within
the stream of traffic, number of turning movements, width
of intersections or roadways, physical terrain, existence of
absence of traffic control devices and the number and
ages of children utilizing the crossing.
c. Annual Site Survey

P&P #1015 SCHOOL CROSSING GUARDS Page 3 of 3
1) The Community Relations Unit Commander, or his

designee, shall ensure that just prior to the
commencement of the school year, all crossing sites and
potential sites are surveyed to determine the level of need
for School Crossing Guard services.
2) The Chief of Police will be apprised of survey findings and

assignments.
C. TRAINING
Training for School Crossing Guards will be administered as outlined in P&P

1201, Patrol Service Officers.
P&P #1140 TRAFFIC LAW ENFORCEMENT Page 4 of 5
EFFECTIVE DATE
TRAFFIC VIOLATIONS – 05/01/02
SPECIAL CASES/PROCESSING OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE: The purpose of this policy is to identify and establish guidelines

required for processing traffic violations committed by special classes
of persons.
II. POLICY: It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to follow certain
procedures when charging non-residents, juveniles, legislators,
foreign diplomats and military personnel with traffic violations.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The typical method of charging persons with traffic violations involves the officer
issuing a summons thereby notifying the motorist in writing to appear at a
specified time and place to answer to the violation. Once the motorist gives his
written promise to appear at such time and place, the officer releases him from
custody.
B. Exceptions to this routine procedure require the arresting officer to take the
motorist before a magistrate in the following cases:
1. Where the officer believes the person is likely to disregard a summons.
2. The motorist refuses to give a written promise to appear.
3. The motorist is a non-resident (including those who are residents of

states that are members of Reciprocal Agreements) when conviction of
the offense may result in suspension of the motorist’s right to drive.
C. A further exception that will be given consideration is driving while intoxicated.

While this charge is a violation of the criminal code, it is so closely related to
other traffic charges that it necessitates inclusion in a practical approach to
processing traffic violations. DUI cases require the officer to make an arrest
and release is accomplished by a magistrate.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1016 – TRAFFIC VIOLATIONS Page 2 of 5
D. SPECIAL PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS:
1. Non-Residents
If the motorist is a non-resident, the question of reciprocity must be
considered.
a. Reciprocity represents an agreement among states effecting

the processing of some traffic violations. This agreement
extends to residents of member states, while outside their home
state jurisdiction, the rights and privileges of their home state.
b. Residents of states which are party jurisdictions in a reciprocal

agreement with Virginia are to be processed in a similar manner
as Virginia residents. Consequently, most traffic violations will
be charged through the summonsing procedure except:
1. The violation is such that conviction requires the
revocation of the motorist’s license
2. The motorist specifically requests to post collateral or
bond in a manner provided by law
3. In the absence of the motorist’s written promise
4. The motorist is likely to disregard a summons
c. Resident Reciprocal Compact will be maintained in the

Communications Sections.
2. Juveniles
a. As established in the jurisdiction of the Juvenile and Domestic

Relations District Court, juveniles are charged with traffic
violations under the State Code.
b. The same process of issuing summons for adults is used in

dealing with juvenile violators. The process requires special
handling when it becomes necessary to take the juvenile into
custody.
c. Once the arrest is made, the juvenile is processed through the

Intake Office of Juvenile Court Services.
3. Legislators
a. During the session of the General Assembly, and for five (5)
days before and after the session, members, clerks and their
assistants shall be privileged from being taken into custody
under any process except for treason, felony or breach of the

peace. This privilege shall also extend to the Lieutenant
Governor. Legislative privilege is granted under State Code
and Virginia Constitutional provision.
b. Under conditions of legislative privilege, the officer shall issue a

summons in those cases where an arrest may be effected.
There are, otherwise, no restrictions on the use of state
summonses in cases of persons with legislative privilege as no
arrest occurs.
c. In the event that the violator refuses to give written promise to

appear, the officer shall note the refusal and the fact of
legislative privilege on the summons in lieu of a signature and
present the violator with the appropriate copy of the summons.
The remainder of the summons will be processed in the usual
manner.
4. Foreign Diplomats/Consular Officers
a. Diplomatic immunity is the exclusion of official personnel of a

foreign mission from federal or local jurisdiction. Diplomatic
immunity represents an agreement among nations and
international law.
b. There are several levels of immunity which may include

criminal, civil, or full immunity.
c. Person with immunity may not be:
1. Detained or arrested
2. Prosecuted
3. Subjected to body searches
4. Required to give evidence as witnesses
d. However, law enforcement officers may temporarily restrain

individuals in order to verify identification and ascertain their
level of immunity.
e. Diplomatic license plates do not determine immunities or

identify the driver of a vehicle. The levels of immunity attached
to an individual and the validity of any diplomatic license should
be separately verified.
f. While a person claiming diplomatic immunity may present any

number of identification papers, the only one that is indicative of

the level of privilege and immunity is a card issued by the U.S.
State Department. The holder's level of immunity will be
indicated on the card. If a person claiming immunity does not
possess this card and the incident involves a criminal offense,
officers may detain the person, either at the scene or at a police
facility long enough to verify official status.
g. Upon exhibiting proof of diplomatic immunity, persons shall be

released upon being stopped for a misdemeanor traffic
violation. If questions arise about this procedure, or if an arrest
for a felony is necessary, call and advise the U.S. State
Department Office of Security (202-647-4415, days, or 202-
647-1512, nights and weekends).
5. DUI (Legislator and Diplomats)
a. Those individuals with either legislative privilege or diplomatic

immunity cannot be arrested and prosecuted for driving while
intoxicated.
b. Under criminal immunity, the individual should not be subjected

to any sobriety or other mandatory test.
c. Except in extreme cases, the driver should not be restricted.

The officer’s primary concern is the safety of the public as well
as the driver.
d. Corrective action may include making arrangements to provide

transportation, allowing access to a telephone, etc.
e. In the event a person covered by legislative privilege or

diplomatic immunity is involved in an incident, the officer’s
supervisor shall be immediately notified and will respond to the
scene when required.
6. Military Personnel
a. Under the provisions of the Federal Soldiers and Sailors Relief

Act, military personnel licensed as operators in their home
states are permitted to drive a motor vehicle upon the highways
of Virginia. Furthermore, in the event their operator’s license
b. expires while they are stationed in Virginia, they may continue

to drive on the otherwise valid operator’s license.
c. State law also provides for the licensing exemption of military

spouses and dependents when:
1. The spouse/dependent is not less than sixteen (16)

years of age
2. The spouse/dependent possesses a valid home state

operator’s license.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
TRAFFIC SAFETY AND 10/20/04
ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES OVERSIGHT

Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for compiling, analyzing and
disseminating information relating to traffic safety and engineering concerns.
II. POLICY:
Close coordination and cooperation between the Police Division and other authorities
is essential to the maintenance and improvement of a safe and efficient traffic system
within the community.
Although traffic engineering is not directly a law enforcement function, we have an

opportunity and responsibility to contribute to traffic engineering. The analysis of traffic
law enforcement and traffic accident data as well as information obtained in providing
basic traffic services to the public provides an excellent base for identifying traffic
engineering problems.
Elimination of traffic engineering problems is very much in the best interest of law
enforcement and of the community. Ideally, with improvements in traffic engineering
there will follow a reduction in traffic accidents and violations.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Traffic engineering functions are performed by the City of Hampton Traffic &
Transportation Administration of the Public Works Department. Traffic &
Transportation Administration personnel are trained in and possess the
expertise in traffic survey methods and techniques, traffic control measures,
traffic planning and data analysis. The Traffic & Transportation Administration
utilizes various sources of information ranging from automated software to
numerous publications such as the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
for Streets and Highways as aids to traffic engineering activities.
B. The Hampton Police Division will provide support to the Traffic & Transportation
Administration in the following areas:
1. Collect and compile traffic data relevant to identifying specific

engineering problems and solutions.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1017 – TRAFFIC SAFETY & ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES Page 2 of 4
2. Conduct special traffic surveys and studies, as appropriate, to

investigate potential problems.
3. Analyze accident and enforcement data to discern trends and

relationships symptomatic of engineering problems.
4. Prepare special reports and take recommendations concerning the

efficient use of traffic control devices, new and revised laws or
ordinances, or other engineering solutions/improvements.
5. Participate actively in community traffic system management planning.
C. The Police Division will record, investigate and follow-up citizens’ notifications of
actual or potential traffic problems. The Police Division will subsequently notify
the Traffic & Transportation Administration of these matters when appropriate.
1. Problems of an urgent nature will be investigated immediately by Police

Division personnel.
2. All other notifications will be processed by Communications Unit

personnel during regular hours of operation.
3. When possible the following information will be developed:
a. The caller’s information will be verified concerning the actual or

potential condition being reported.
b. The caller’s suggestions for possible improvement will be

evaluated with respect to utility and feasibility.
c. Remedial action will be initiated when applicable and possible.
d. The caller’s information will be referred to other appropriate

authorities when necessary.
D. Police officers who have observed or otherwise been notified of any traffic
engineering problems will report these conditions by submitting a Special
Report through their chain of command to the appropriate Sector Commander.
The Sector Commander in conjunction with the Traffic & Transportation
Administration will seek a solution to the existing problem.
E. Traffic/Parking Control Reporting Responsibilities:
1. “As required”, the Operations Branch Sector Commanders will be

responsible for contacting the Traffic & Transportation Administration for
survey data collected in the following areas:
a. Locations and times where point traffic control is needed to

ensure the safe and efficient movement of vehicles and
pedestrians.
(1) Times and locations identified as requiring point traffic

control will be analyzed to determine whether manual
direction of traffic is necessary.
(2) The decision to assign personnel to carry out traffic

direction and control will be made only if the analysis
indicates that unmanned signal devices cannot adequately
provide for the safe and efficient movement of traffic.
b. Locations and times where parking control is needed to ensure

the safe and efficient movement of vehicles. This analysis will be
based upon established principles of parking control and the
Police Division’s experience in determining the most appropriate
strategy/method of parking control.
c. Locations requiring the use of adult school crossing guards. This

will be performed in accordance with the guidelines established in
Policy and Procedure #1015.
d. Additional special surveys will be conducted, as needed, when

traffic accident or enforcement data suggests unsafe conditions
exist at certain locations.
2. Operations Sector Commanders shall submit a report, as required, to the

Chief of Police summarizing these survey results.
F. To the maximum extent possible, the Police Division will assign non-sworn
personnel to perform manual point traffic control and other traffic direction and
control activities not expected to require enforcement authority.
G. The City of Hampton maintains traffic accident files through the Pistol 2000
Records Management System. This information may be utilized for identifying
locations, time and causes of traffic accidents. These files are accessed by the
Hampton Police Division Crime Analysis Unit for the collection, collation,
analysis and distribution of traffic accident information.
H. The Central Records Unit will be responsible for inputting accident and
enforcement data into the accident database file. This activity shall consist of:
1. Daily receipt and entry of data from police accident reports into the Pistol
2000 Records Management System.
2. The clerks shall enter descriptive information concerning the accident

which shall include but not be limited to: date, time, location, driver(s)
name(s), charges, injuries, fatality (or not), weather condition, road
conditions, speed(s) of vehicle(s) and drinking.
I. School Resource Officers work with school authorities to assist in organizing,

instructing and supervising the Student Safety Patrols. Student Safety Patrols
are intended to complement the School Crossing Guard Program and are not
authorized to direct or control vehicular traffic in any way.
J. Adult School Crossing Guards will be screened, selected, trained and assigned
in accordance with guidelines established in Policy and Procedure.
K. Traffic safety and educational materials will be made available to the public in
the Community Relations Unit.
P&P #1017 – TRAFFIC SAFETY & ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES Page 5 of
4
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
10/20/04
TRAFFIC RECORDS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines governing the Hampton Police
Division’s Traffic Records System.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division’s Traffic Records System shall be located within the
Central Records Unit. These records will be maintained in such a manner as to ensure
the prompt transmittal of required copies to affected divisional units and to appropriate
state/local agencies as required.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The Traffic Records System shall include the following records:
1. Accident Reports
2. Public Vehicle/Taxi Permits
3. Money/Cash Register Receipts
B. Processing, maintenance, distribution, and retention of records:
1. Accident Reports
a. Completed accident reports receive a tracking number which is

assigned by the Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD) System. The
original report is sent to the Department of Motor Vehicles and a
copy is maintained in file by tracking number for a period of five
(5) years.
b. Information from accident reports is placed in the Pistol Records

Management System. This provides a system for recording and
analysis.
2. Parking Tickets
The Central Records Unit shall have access to parking ticket records
maintained by the City Treasurers Office.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1018 – TRAFFIC RECORDS SYSTEM Page 2 of 2
3. Public Vehicle/Taxi Permit Applications
a. Applications for Public Vehicle/Taxi permits will be investigated,

processed and maintained in the Central Records Unit in
accordance with Policy & Procedure #1001, Public Vehicle
Permits.
b. Completed applications will be filed in the Central Records Unit

for a period of five (5) years.
c. Taxi Inspections – The Community Relations Unit personnel

conduct taxi inspections as required by city ordinance. Upon
completion of these inspections the forms are filed in the
Community Relations Unit for a period of five years.
4. Money/Cash Register Receipts
Money/Cash register receipts will be maintained in the Central Records

Unit for a period of three years plus the current year.
C. Release of Records
1. Accident records are available for public information in the Central

Records Unit during normal business hours. Individuals may purchase
copies of accident reports for a fee.
2. Public Vehicle Permit Applications are maintained in file for reference

and information.
3. Money/cash register receipts are made available to the city auditor as

necessary.
P&P #1018 – TRAFFIC RECORDS SYSTEM Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
10/20/04
TRAFFIC RELATED ACTIVITIES OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
To establish the responsibilities of the various units within the Division in regards to
Traffic related functions.
II. POLICY:
A. The Hampton Police Division’s traffic functions are decentralized and distributed
throughout the Police Division. Each individual unit will be responsible for their
particular assignment and will be responsible (directly or indirectly) to the
Operations Branch Commander.
B. Individual traffic functions are further described in other related Policies and
Procedures.
C. The Operations Branch Commander will have the responsibility of coordinating

and administering the traffic functions for the Division, thus facilitating the
delivery of services to the community.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The traffic function activities shall consist of the following elements:
1. Analysis of accident and other traffic related data (See P&P #517, Duties
and Responsibilities of the Crime Analysis Unit).
2. Technical Accident Investigations (See P&P #1010, Traffic Accident –

Investigating and Reporting).
3. Hit and Run Accident Investigations (See P&P #1003, Hit & Run
Investigations).
4. Operation of speed measuring devices (radar) (See P&P #1005, Police

Traffic Radar Operations).
5. Operations of Breath Test Equipment (See P&P #1129, DUI Case

Processing/Preparation).
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1019 – TRAFFIC RELATED ACTIVITIES Page 2 of 2
6. Parking Congestion/Control (See P&P #1017 – Traffic Safety &

Engineering Activities).
7. Supervision of Adult School Crossing Guards (See P&P #1015, School

Crossing Guard/Traffic Controller).
8. Traffic Safety Education (See P&P #1017).
9. Liaison with Traffic Safety Groups (See P&P #1017).
10. Parking Enforcement (See P&P #1138, Parking Ticket Procedure).
11. Towed Vehicles (See P&P #624, Towed Vehicles).
12. Traffic Checkpoints and Sobriety Road Checks (See Operations Branch
Directive #07-01).
B. The various traffic functions shall be completed by those units as delegated by

individual Policy and Procedure.
1. The Traffic Analysis function will be the responsibility of the Crime

Analysis Unit. All traffic related memoranda and bulletins will be
channeled through the Operations Branch Commander.
2. Accident Investigation, radar, parking enforcement, parking control

surveys and operations of breath test equipment shall be the
responsibility of Uniform Patrol Shift personnel. These activities will be
administered through the Operations Branch Commander.
3. Supervision of Adult School Crossing Guards, abandoned vehicles,

traffic safety education, and liaison with traffic safety groups will be the
responsibility of the Community Relations Unit and will be coordinated
through the Administrative Branch Commander.
C. Nothing in this policy shall be interpreted to restrict the traffic enforcement

activities of any unit not assigned a particular function. The responsibility for
enforcement of traffic laws and regulations is shared by all uniformed
personnel.
P&P #1019 – TRAFFIC RELATED ACTIVITIES Page 3 of
2
-
P&P 1102 — PERSONAL APPEARANCE APPENDIX I
PROPER SLEEVE LENGTH

at break of wrist
PROPER CUFF LENGTH PROPE) BLOUSE LENGTh

to fingertips
/4 -
I /
P&P 1102 - PERSONAL APPEARANCE APPENDIX I
Accoute,mnt Placeir t
I I
‘112 lack trom .dq. al

collar and parall.l
to th. top of tk. collar
kick abov• braid

and c.nI.r.d
4 Inck.a — c.nt.r.d
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
REFLECTORIZED 11/04/11
CLOTHING OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish procedures governing the wearing of

reflectorized safety vests, Division issued orange rain coats (School Crossing Guards)
and the uniform police hat for high visibility while on streets or roadways within the City
of Hampton.
II. POLICY:
A. When uniformed law enforcement personnel are used to direct traffic, to investigate
crashes, or to handle lane closures, obstructed roadways, and disasters, high-visibility
safety apparel shall be worn by the law enforcement personnel. (Virginia Work Area
Protection Standards requirement, Sec. 6D.03)
B. It shall be the policy of this Division to:
1. Provide reflectorized high-visibility safety vests to all Division personnel

who are required to perform any duty which would bring them in contact
with vehicular traffic.
2. Require the wearing of such reflectorized high-visibility safety vests when

officers are directing vehicular and/or pedestrian traffic, investigating
crimes, or recovering evidence on the city streets or in any area open to
the public for vehicular traffic.
3. In addition to the safety vest, School Crossing Guards are also issued
raincoats with a bright orange side to be worn when directing traffic in
the rain. The safety vest shall be worn on the outside of the raincoat.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Members of this Division who are issued reflectorized clothing will maintain
such equipment in a good state of repair and will keep such equipment
available for use at all times.
B. Reflectorized safety vests or the Division issued orange high-visibility rain coat
(School Guards) and the uniform hat will be worn by all police personnel who
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1106 – REFLECTORIZED CLOTHING Page 2 of 2
are directing vehicular and/or pedestrian traffic, investigating crimes, or

recovering evidence in the public streets or in any area open to the public for
vehicular traffic.
C. Reflectorized clothing shall be worn under any other circumstance where high
visibility of the officer is necessary for safety reasons.
P&P # 1106 – REFLECTORIZED CLOTHING Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
06/04/15
POLICE MOTORCYCLES OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P # 1107 dated 05/23/13 and Chief’s Directive 1107.1 dated 06/03/13.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the selection and training of
police motorcycle operators and the operation of the police motorcycle.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division motorcycles will be utilized as a highly visible tool to
promote the safe and efficient enforcement of traffic regulations and serve as a
community relations tool. The Division will maintain the highest level of integrity in its
selection, training and operation of motorcycle personnel to ensure the success of the
program and the safety of the officers involved.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. GENERAL MOTORCYCLE OBJECTIVES
1. Traffic law enforcement (including selective enforcement)

2. Traffic Safety Education Programs
3. High visibility in heavily congested traffic areas
4. A community relations tool
B. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Motorcycles will be operated at all times in compliance with all state

laws.
2. Officers shall patrol as solo motorcycle units unless otherwise directed

by their unit commander/supervisor.
3. Motorcycle officers shall conform to all Policies and Procedures and

Rules and Regulations of the Division and shall maintain an exemplary
uniform appearance.
4. The motorcycle officer’s primary duty will be to enforce traffic laws.

However, they may respond to general calls for service when
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1107 – POLICE MOTORCYCLES Page 2 of 4
directed by the Traffic Unit supervisor for high priority calls, or at the
discretion of the officer.
5. Officers will be responsible for the care, cleaning and upkeep of their
motorcycle through the regular maintenance schedule from fleet
management and maintaining their motorcycle in compliance with
Division policy.
6. Security of the motorcycle and related equipment (radar, etc.) while not
in use is of primary importance. Motorcycles must be kept in an
approved secure location when not in use.
7. Daily preventive maintenance and safety checks shall be performed on

the motorcycles. Monthly vehicle inspections will be done by the Traffic
Unit supervisor or his designee.
8. Police Motorcycles will be utilized in an off-duty capacity in compliance

with the Take Home Car policy (P&P #1504).
C. LIMITATIONS
1. Motorcycles will not be used as pursuit vehicles. If a vehicle flees a

traffic stop, the motorcycle officer will disengage any pursuit, safely
deactivate their emergency equipment and advise the Supervisor in
charge of the incident and give their current location. A BOL will be
broadcast with the vehicle description and license number. A follow-up
will be done on the license plate number if obtained.
2. During times of inclement weather when the use of motorcycles could be

hazardous (heavy rain, high winds, snow, ice, sub-freezing temperatures
or extreme heat) motorcycle officers will carry out their duties in sedans
or other vehicles as appropriate. This decision will be made by the Traffic
Unit supervisor.
3. Only officers authorized by the Division who have passed the Police
Motorcycle course shall operate (except for authorized training) a
Division motorcycle.
D. ELIGIBILITY
This position requires the officer to interact with the public with a dynamic public
speaking ability preferred (General Instructor certification desirable). Officers
should be highly motivated and self-supervising, due to the variety of public
appearances and constant public contact. In addition to the criteria established
in P&P 641 eligibility criteria includes, but is not limited to:
1. Officers who are not already police motorcycle operator certified must
complete a motorcycle pre-test.
2. Must have motorcycle riding experience and have held a valid Class “M”,
Virginia driver’s license for the past three (3) years.
3. A minimum of three (3) years experience as a Hampton Police Officer.
4. Applicant must be eligible for the Take Home Car Program (see P&P
1504), and have the ability to store the motorcycle in a secured facility.
Failure to maintain their eligibility for the take home program may result
in removal from the motorcycle/Traffic Unit assignment.
5. Must have no preventable police vehicle accidents in the last twelve-

month period.
6. Officers must currently (within one year prior to application) and each
year thereafter, complete the Division’s Physical Assessment with a
score of an overall three (3) or above.
7. Candidates selected must successfully complete and pass a certified

departmental (80 hour) Police Motorcycle Course prior to operating a
police motorcycle in an operational capacity.
8. As all members of the Traffic Unit are also members of the Fatal Crash
Investigation & Reconstruction Team, all officers who are not fatality
certified (level 1 & 2) prior to assignment will be sent to the next available
class. Failure to obtain fatality certification will result in the removal from
the motorcycle/Traffic Unit assignment.
9. Duties of the Police motorcycle operator demand flexible shift scheduling

outside the normal 40-hour work week. The unit supervisor will set
flexible work schedules that benefit the success of the unit. Officers
must be willing to adjust his/her work schedule to accommodate events
that are scheduled with little notice.
10. Willingness to utilize a motorcycle to fulfill the Division’s objectives.
11. NO TOBACCO USAGE
E. SELECTION PROCESS
A position opening announcement will be e-mailed Division wide when there is

an opening for a motorcycle officer. The position posting and the selection
process for this position will be in accordance with P&P 641 Position
Assignment Management.
F. UNIFORMS AND EQUIPMENT
1. All equipment worn by motorcycle officers will be approved and be in

compliance with Division Policy.
2. Officers will wear a Division issued safety helmet at all times while on the
motorcycle.
3. Officers are required to wear protective vests according to P&P #1110.
4. Protective motorcycle gloves and boots will be worn at all times during
the operation of the motorcycle.
5. Personal eye wear, to include corrective eye glasses and/or sunglasses,

may be worn in lieu of the issued protective optics. Personal eye wear
must comply with ANSI and OSHA standards.
6. Emergency equipment will consist of blue flashing lights and a siren.

Police radios with hands-free headsets will be utilized.
7. A small fire extinguisher, first aid kit and battery operated warning lights
will be carried on motorcycles.
8. No unauthorized equipment or personal modifications shall be permitted

on the motorcycles.
G. TRAINING
All officers assigned to ride Division motorcycles will posses a motorcycle

driver’s license issued by the Virginia Division of Motor vehicles, and shall have
successfully passed an 80-hour Police Motorcycle training course. Officers who
are not police motorcycle certified prior to assignment to a motorcycle position
will be sent to the next available class. Failure to pass the Police Motorcycle
training course will result in the removal from the motorcycle assignment. This
training will be monitored by the Traffic Unit supervisor. There are no re-
training requirements for this position.
P&P # 1107 – POLICE MOTORCYCLES Page 5 of
4
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
HANDLING OF INJURED, SICK 08/16/18
OR HOSPITALIZED DETAINEES OVERSIGHT

Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P # 1108 dated 09/25/12 and Chief’s Directive 1108.1 dated 06/01/15.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish the proper method for handling any injured,
sick or hospitalized detainees who come to the attention of the Hampton Police
Division.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to safeguard the physical health of all
injured or sick detainees and to protect our officers against unwarranted criminal
and/or civil charges.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Felony/Misdemeanor Arrest – Medical Attention Needed Immediately. When a

person is arrested and the arresting officer determines that the person needs
medical attention for any injury resulting from arrest, or when the arrested
person claims that medical attention is required the arresting officer shall:
1. Notify a supervisor
2. Follow required/proper prisoner securing procedures, including a detailed

search. Ensure that adequate control of the individual is maintained to
prevent escape, further injury to the detainee and for officer protection.
3. Transport the detainee to the appropriate hospital for treatment.
4. Prevent the escape of the detainee.
5. Not allow the removal of the detainee securing devices while at the
hospital unless requested to do so by the attending physician.
6. If the officer is requested by the physician to leave the treatment room

for extraordinary medical reasons:
a. Request that all escape routes be sealed, or detainee be moved

to a secure room.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1108 – HANDLING OF INJURED/SICK OR HOSPITALIZED PRISONERS Page 2 of 4
b. Stand immediately outside treatment room and maintain visual

contact, if possible.
7. Contact parent or legal guardian if detainee is a juvenile and treatment is

required.
8. Contact an Intake Officer if detainee is a juvenile, and parent or legal

guardian is NOT available.
9. Complete a Special Report, listing the nature of the detainee’s

complaints and any treatment received. Specify if the detainee refused
treatment. Detainees will be given the opportunity to refuse treatment to
medical personnel. Unconscious persons will be transported to the
appropriate medical facility.
10. Complete the appropriate hospital forms if the detainee is treated and
released or refuses treatment. The detainee will then be transported to
the Hampton Sheriff’s Correctional Facility Lock up. The Sheriff’s
Deputies will be informed of the detainee’s medical status and the
appropriate medical forms or refusal of treatment will be turned over to
them with the detainee. A copy will be maintained by the officer as part
of the case file.
B. Injured While In Police Custody
If an arrested person in police custody is determined to have been injured while

in police custody and requires medical attention, the arresting officer and all
other officers involved or alleged to be involved (or in a case where there is
reported accidental injury to the arrested person) will write a Special Report
containing all pertinent details to the Unit or Watch Commander. If the injury is
the result of a use of force the shift supervisor will then document the incident
on a Use of Force Report in the BlueTeam program to be forwarded to the
Professional Standards Branch through the appropriate chain of command and
Branch Commander. A packet containing the Special Report and City Accident
Loss Packet will be forwarded to Professional Standards. Professional
Standards will open an inquiry into the matter.
C. Hospitalized Detainee
Whenever a detainee in the custody of the Hampton Police Division requires

hospitalization, the Watch Commander will ensure an officer is assigned to
guard them if they cannot be summonsed or bonded. The Watch Commander
or his designee will notify the Operations Commander and Chief of Police of the
situation.
1. If a detainee is to be hospitalized the arresting officer shall immediately

notify the Watch Commander and will remain with the prisoner until
relieved.
2. When the Watch Commander is notified that a detainee has been

hospitalized and determines that guard protection is necessary, he shall:
a. Determine the amount and type of security that needs to be

implemented.
b. Assign an officer to guard the detainee.
c. Establish a rotating work schedule that provides optimum officer

alertness and maximum detainee security.
d. Ascertain the approximate length of time that the detainee will be

hospitalized.
e. Provide the relieving Watch Commander with all pertinent

information necessary for continued guard protection of the
hospitalized detainee.
f. Make notification through the chain-of-command that the

detainee will need to remain under guard and the expected length
of time the detainee will be hospitalized.
3. When an officer is assigned to guard a hospitalized detainee, they shall:
a. Remain with the detainee at all times.
b. Be alert to prevent escape.
c. Prevent unauthorized articles from being passed to the detainee.

(This may require visitors to be checked for unauthorized
articles.)
d. Permit only the following persons on official business to visit or

interview the detainee:
1) Superior officers
2) Investigating officer(s)
3) Representing attorney
4) Commonwealth’s Attorney or Assistant Commonwealth’s

Attorney.
5) Chief medical examiner or his representative
6) Clergyman
7) Parole or probation officer
8) Hospital personnel
9) Immediate family or legal guardian
10) Social worker
11) Federal or State law enforcement officers
e. Allow no more than one (1) person to visit with or interview the
detainee at one time, unless it is a necessary function of official
business.
f. Consult their supervisor for instructions when they are unsure of

their position/requirements.
g. Request and obtain from a supervisor, to use physical restraints,

leg irons and additional handcuffs whenever it is deemed
necessary.
h. Upon the arrest of a detainee that is hospitalized, the on duty

Watch Commander (or designee) will immediately contact the
Sheriff’s Office to make them aware of the suspect’s information
and hospital where he/she is being treated. The Sheriff’s Office
will contact the Hampton Roads Regional Jail to allow for
accommodations if needed.
P&P #1108 – HANDLING OF INJURED/SICK OR HOSPITALIZED PRISONERS Page 5 of
4
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
10/27/16
PROTECTIVE VESTS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide guidance in the use of protective vests issued
to all sworn Division personnel.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to provide protective vests to all sworn
Division personnel and ensure their proper use.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. In accepting the custody of the vest, as with any other issued piece of
equipment, the officer tacitly agrees to maintain the vest in a good state of
repair and make full effective use of it in the performance of law enforcement
responsibilities.
B. Protective vests shall be worn in the following situations:
1. By all officers in uniform assigned to a patrol district or otherwise

performing a field operations function.
2. By all officers entering the premises of a search warrant regardless of

whether or not they are in uniform.
3. By personnel in all other situations where common sense and

circumstances dictate the wearing of a vest.
4. By all officers involved in high risk situations such as serving arrest

warrants and hostage/barricaded person situations.
C. Protective vests are issued for the safety of the individual officer. The
protection afforded by this piece of equipment is not present unless the vest is
worn by the officer. All sworn personnel are encouraged to make full utilization
of this equipment.
D. Sworn personnel are authorized to purchase the navy blue Elbeco V3 Body
Shield External Vest Carrier to be worn on-duty. If interested in ordering the
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1110 – PROTECTIVE VESTS Page 2 of 2
External Vest Carrier, to ensure proper fitting and that the officer gets the
correct item(s) officers should go to the vendor to be fitted and place their
order. Proper fit is essential. These items are:
• Elbeco, BodyShield External Vest Carrier, Item# BL601, Navy
• Elbeco, Suspension System, Item# NY019, Black

If desired P&E will accept the delivery of the vests if the officer advises P&E
of their order number in advance. Officers can contact P&E to ascertain the
location of vendors.
1. It is not authorized to be worn with Class A uniform.
2. Issued metal badge and nameplate must be worn on the external vest
cover.
3. When placing your armor in the external vest cover please follow
manufacturer’s directions that come with the vest.
4. Optional Elbeco VSS1 Suspension System may be purchased as

well.
a. Suspension system is designed to redistribute the weight of

your duty belt.
b. Suspension system may only be worn underneath the external

vest carrier. Follow manufacturer’s directions when utilizing
them.
E. Ballistic shields are assigned to selected sworn personnel and should be utilized
for added ballistic protection.
P&P # 1110 – PROTECTIVE VESTS Page 3 of 2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
EMERGENCY SUBSTANTIAL 06/08/2021
RISK ORDER (ESRO) OVERSIGHT
Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide guidance to members of the Hampton Police
Division the procedures to be used to obtain an Emergency Substantial Risk Order
(ESRO), the process for securing firearms from the person subject to an ESRO and all
dispositions of such firearms when the order expires or is dismissed
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division will only seek and obtain an ESRO as a legal means to
temporarily remove an individual’s access to firearms if they possess a substantial risk
of personal injury to themselves or others.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Emergency Substantial Risk Order (ESRO): A petition initiated by an officer or

Commonwealth’s Attorney for an order issued by a magistrate or judge,
pursuant to Code of Virginia §19.2-152.13, that allows law enforcement to
temporarily (14 days) prevent an individual from owning, possessing, or
purchasing a firearm based on the individual posing a significant likelihood of
personal injury to themselves or others.
B. Substantial Risk Order (SRO): An order issued by the Circuit Court, pursuant to
Code of Virginia §19.2-152.14, that continues to restrict an individual from
owning, possessing, or purchasing a firearm, for up to 180 days unless
extended by the court, based on the individual posing a threat of personal injury
to themselves or others.
C. Substantial Risk: Relevant evidence to establish probable cause that a person

poses a substantial risk to himself or others can include an individual’s recent
act of violence, force, or threat of bodily injury to themselves or others.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1111 – EMERGENCY SUBSTANTIAL RISK ORDER Page 2 of 5
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. An ESRO should be sought by an officer or an attorney for the Commonwealth

when it has been determined through an independent investigation that
probable cause exists that a person presents substantial risk of personal injury
to themselves or others in the immediate future by possessing or acquiring a
firearm. The officer shall notify a supervisor prior to obtaining an ESRO.
Potential reasons to seek an ESRO include, but are not limited to:
1. Domestic Violence
2. Emergency Custody Order
3. Barricaded Subject(s)
4. Threats of Violence
5. Stalking
B. Independent Investigation: An incident report (99**) will be generated for “Court

Order Firearm Surrender” which will thoroughly annotate the circumstances
upon which the petition was initiated. Once an ESRO has been issued, upon
service of the order, officers shall ask the person who is the subject of an ESRO
whether they own a firearm, if they have a firearm in their possession or has
access to a firearm. Per VA. Code 19.2-152.13, subjects of an ESRO must fully
disclose the location of all firearms owned by them, in their possession, or
accessible to them, and should be advised that failure to fully disclose this
information is considered a false statement under VA Code 19.2-152.16 and a
Class 1 misdemeanor under VA Code 18.2-308.16
C. A petition for ESRO will be located on the City Intranet under “FORMS”
supported by an affidavit under oath, shall be completed and used to petition a
magistrate or judge for issuance.
D. A Circuit Court hearing must be held within (14) days of the issuance of the
ESRO to determine whether an SRO should be issued.
E. If the subject of the ESRO resides outside of Hampton but committed an

offense which would cause officers to seek an ESRO, they shall petition a
Hampton magistrate or judge the issuance of the ESRO. Upon service of the
ESRO, the locality where the subject resides will be notified for the collection of
the firearm(s).
F. SERVICE OF AN EMERGENCY SUBSTANTIAL RISK ORDER:
1. Upon the forthwith service of an emergency substantial risk order, the

person who is subject to the order shall be given the opportunity to
voluntarily relinquish any firearm in their possession. If they refuse,
or the officer has reason to believe that all firearms were not
relinquished by the subject, the officer must obtain a search
warrant for the weapon(s) for Violation of a Court Order.
2. The subject shall be given a copy of the ESO and supporting affidavit,
together with a notice informing them they have a right to a hearing in

Circuit Court.
3. The subject will be advised that it is unlawful for them to purchase,

possess, or transport a firearm while the order is in effect. Additionally, if
the subject has a concealed handgun permit, it must be surrendered as
directed by the ESRO.
4. An officer shall take custody of all firearms relinquished. The subject of

the ESRO shall be provided a written receipt with their name and a
record of the manufacturer, model, condition, and serial number of each
firearm surrendered to the officer. Utilize the Property & Evidence (yellow
copy) as notation of receipt. All relinquished firearms will be tagged into
Property & Evidence. An RFLE is not required and the seizure of
ammunition is not required unless the firearm(s) are evidence of a crime.
5. If the subject of an ESRO is not present to relinquish their firearm(s)

then a search warrant shall be applied for.
6. If there is no search warrant, the served ESRO and written inventory will
be turned into the Information Center. The information Center will be
responsible for ensuring the served copy is given to Circuit Court & the
Court Liaison Officer. If a search warrant was utilized, the initiating officer
will ensure a copy of the served ESRO and search warrant inventory is
turned into the Information Center, Circuit Court and the Court Liaison
Officer. The ESRO will expire at 11:59 pm on the 14th day following
issuance of the order, unless an SRO is subsequently issued. It will be
the intent of the City of Hampton Circuit Court to hold the initial hearing
of the ESRO issuance on the (10th) day of the (14) day order unless, it
falls on a weekend or a holiday.
7. When the police division receives notification of an ESRO sought for a

subject within the City of Hampton from an outside jurisdiction, a
supervisor will be notified. The service procedure outlined shall be
followed. The Hampton Police Division will serve the requested ESRO
and coordinate the collection of firearm(s). The initiating agency will be
responsible for processing and completing the ESRO filing within in their
respective Circuit Court. Should a search warrant be necessary for the
collection of firearm(s); Hampton Police Division will ensure the warrant
is certified in Hampton Circuit Court and fax the inventory to the
requested jurisdiction
G. TRANSFER or RETURN of FIREARMS:
1. The court may order that any firearm(s) seized by law enforcement be
transferred to another individual or returned to the subject of an ESRO or
SRO, pursuant to Virginia Code 19.2-152.14. If the court enters such an
order, the firearm(s) shall be transferred/returned in accordance with the
parameters on the order.
2. The subject of an ESRO/SRO may request the return of their firearm(s)

upon expiration or dissolution of the ESRO/SRO order issued.
3. The subject of an ESRO/SRO requesting the return of their firearm(s)

must provide the department with a written request for the return of the
firearm(s), a copy of the original receipt provided by the department and
a copy of the signed Circuit Court Order allowing the return of their
seized firearm(s).
4. Upon receipt of the subject’s written request and proof that they are
entitled to the return of their firearm(s), the department shall return the
firearm(s) within the parameters listed on the order..
5. A VCIN/NCIC check of the risk order registry shall be conducted to

confirm the status of the ESRO/SRO.
6. A firearm taken into custody pursuant to an ESRO/SRO may be

disposed of in the accordance with the provision of 15.2-1721 if the
individual from whom the firearm was taken provides written
authorization for such disposal to the department or the firearm remains
in the possession of the department more than 120 days after such
individual is no longer subject to an ESRO/SRO and they have not
submitted a request in writing for the return of the firearm.
H. ESRO INVOLVING A MEMBER (SWORN/CIVILIAN) OF THE HAMPTON

POLICE DIVISION:
1. If there is an incident where a member of the Hampton Police Division is

subject to an ESRO the following will occur:
a. A supervisor will respond to the scene and notify the Sector

Commander prior to the independent investigation commencing.
The independent investigation shall be conducted by an
Operations supervisor as a means to seek an ESRO
b. If an ESRO will be sought, the petition will be done in front of the

City of Newport News magistrate.
c. If an ESRO is issued, then the Sector Commander will notify the

Office of Professional Standards and the Chief of Police.
2. Sworn members of the Hampton Police Division who are subject to the
issuance of an ESRO in another jurisdiction shall immediately notify their
supervisor. If available, the supervisor on duty shall respond to the
scene. Notification to the Chief of Police and the Office of the
Professional Standards will occur.
I. ESRO INVOLVING A SWORN MEMBER FROM ANOTHER LOCALITY:
1. Hampton Police Division supervisor will notify a supervisor from the

officer’s jurisdiction prior to service of the order and request they
accompany the Hampton Police Division during service of the order and
order the surrender of all firearms by their officer.
2. If the jurisdiction declines to accompany members of the police division

or order the officer to surrender all firearms in their possession, then the
person subject to the order shall be asked to voluntarily surrender all
firearms in their possession and if they decline a search warrant will be
obtained and executed.
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
REPORTING OF SAFETY AND 01/17/07
HEALTH HAZARDS OR OTHER CITY OVERSIGHT
MATTERS Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to ensure safety and health hazards are reported to the
proper departments throughout the City.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to report any and all conditions
that present potential or real hazards to the general public. Although the prime
function of the Division is enforcement, we should not lose sight of the fact that there
are many functions related to police work, one of which is reporting unsafe conditions.
III. PROCEDURE:
The following procedures are to serve as a guide in reporting safety and health
hazards:
Areas of Importance:
A. Street Lights – Officers will observe street lights not burning and make a
notation of the location and pole number. By the completion of their tour of duty
these notations will be turned over to the 311 Center who will report the
information to Virginia Power for repairs.
B. Street and Road Hazards – In the event a condition exists during normal
working hours the officer will report locations and the condition to Information
Center who will in turn notify the 311 Center who will call Public Works.
After 12 midnight, unless it is an emergency, no one will be called from Public

Works. If an emergency exists a Supervisor will go to the scene, assess the
situation, and if he deems the situation to be an emergency he will notify the
Watch Commander. The Watch Commander can authorize the Information
Center to contact a member of Public Works at home.
The Watch Commander will ensure that the situation or condition is rendered
safe from all vehicular or pedestrian traffic until such time as repair crews arrive
and safety barriers are installed.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1112 – REPORTING OF SAFETY AND HEALTH HAZARDS…MATTERS Page 2 of 3
C. Broken Water Mains, Sewer Lines & Gas Lines – Whenever an officer
observes water seeping through the hard surface of any street or roadway, and
in his opinion it will present a serious hazard, he shall notify Communications.
Once the information is obtained concerning the location the officer will notify
the Information Center who will call the 311 Center requesting that they notify
Newport News Waterworks.
If in the opinion of the Patrol Supervisor, the situation calls for an officer or
officers to re-direct traffic, he shall see that this is accomplished. Officers shall
safeguard the situation until workmen arrive and barricades are in place.
In case of broken gas lines, Communications will notify Virginia Natural Gas
Company. The Fire Division will also be notified.
D. Down Wires – Officers should ascertain first of all if the wires belong to Virginia
Power or to the telephone or cable company. If unable to determine, notify
Information Center to notify Virginia Power. If the situation calls for re-directing
traffic, the Patrol Supervisor will see that this is accomplished. Officer(s) will
stand by until the scene is rendered safe and traffic patterns have been
restored.
E. Abandoned Refrigerators – Upon receipt of a complaint or upon the

observation of an abandoned or unattended refrigerator, or any other container
which has a air-tight door which cannot be released from the inside, the officer
will:
1. Notify the owner that the door handles must be removed
2. If request is not complied with, a summons under City Code 24-38 will be
issued.
F. Traffic Signal Lights & Street Signs – Whenever a traffic signal light is found
to be malfunctioning, the 311 Center shall be notified and the City electrician
will be called. Under certain conditions it may become necessary for an
officer(s) to direct traffic until the situation is corrected. When a traffic light is
found to be stuck on one color the officer will not under any circumstances
strike the side of the control box to release the system.
In cases where street markers are missing or damaged Public Works will be
notified through the 311 Center.
G. Dogs at Large, Dead Animals & Animal Bites – Refer all complaints to the
311 Center who will notify Animal Control. Between 2300 and 0800 hours,
officers will be dispatched to verify injured animal complaints to determine if
Animal Control is needed.
During normal operating hours, HPD officers and Animal Control will
simultaneously respond to vicious dog complaints. From 1700 hrs. to 0800 hrs.
HPD officers will be dispatched to verify a vicious dog complaint and determine
if Animal Control needs to be called-out.
P&P #1112 – REPORTING OF SAFETY AND HEALTH HAZARDS…MATTERS Page 3 of 3
H. Abandoned Vehicles – Community Relations shall be notified of all vehicles

left abandoned on City streets.
In cases where vehicles are abandoned on private property, the property owner
may have the vehicle removed by notifying a tow company. The tow company
should notify Information Center of the vehicle towed.
Also to be reported are situations which lend themselves to crime, contribute to

a hazardous situation, or create unsanitary conditions.
The Information Center will ensure that the proper agencies are notified of the
above conditions after being brought to their attention.
P&P #1112 – REPORTING OF SAFETY AND HEALTH HAZARDS…MATTERS Page 4 of
3
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
5/28/97
INDUSTRIAL ACCIDENT OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
This policy establishes the procedures for investigating fatal industrial accidents
occurring within the City of Hampton.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to respond to, protect, and investigate all
reports of a fatal or potentially fatal industrial accident. The Division will cooperate with
the Department of Labor and Industry for the purpose of conducting an investigation
into the circumstances of the accident. It is the responsibility of the Division to rule out
the possibility of homicide as the cause of death.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Officers are dispatched to the scene of all fatal or potentially fatal industrial
accidents.
B. The scene is treated as a crime scene and is protected in accordance with P&P
701, Homicide Scene Routine.
C. The Crimes Against Persons (CAP) Sergeant is notified by Public Safety

Communications of the fatal accident, and responds to the scene.
D. The CAP Sergeant is responsible for notifying the Fatality Investigation Team of
the Department of Labor and Industry if the accident occurs during normal
business hours. If the accident occurs after normal working hours on
weekdays, weekends, and holidays, the Virginia State Police are notified. The
CAP Sergeant provides the State Police with the following information:
1. Date, time, and location of the accident; and

2. The telephone number of the reporting person.
E. Public Safety Communications maintains the phone numbers for the State
Police and the Fatality Investigation Teams.
F. An incident report is taken to document the situation, unless the investigation

reveals that a crime has occurred. If the matter is deemed criminal in nature, then
a crime report is generated.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
12/22/2021
TRAFFIC STOPS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines to be utilized in traffic stops and to
ensure that officers take proper enforcement action in a safe manner while attempting
to alter favorably the violator’s future driving habits.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to conduct traffic stops in such a
manner as to provide safety for the officer and public while promoting a professional
approach to this enforcement process.
III. PROCEDURE:
Stopping a vehicle should never be considered a routine task. The possibility of

conflict and assault or accidental injury is ever-present. The majority of traffic stops
result in no peril or jeopardy for the officer. Unfortunately, there are seldom indications
that a violator will become hostile or attempt to injure the officer. Officers must regard
each and every traffic stop as a potentially dangerous confrontation. Nevertheless, a
degree of prevention and reduction of conflict can be brought about by a planned and
positive approach to traffic stops. As in any stressful incident, the officer must seek to
control the situation. This is accomplished through a deliberate and tactful approach.
A. SAFETY IN TRAFFIC STOPS:

The following safety precautions are basic to any traffic stop and should be
utilized to reduce the hazards of stopping vehicles.
1. The officer will transmit the license number and location to the
dispatcher. Ideally, this transmission should be made just prior to the
activation of emergency equipment, thus allowing sufficient time to
complete the transmission before contact with the violator is made. This
practice is critical and should be utilized.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1114 – TRAFFIC STOPS Page 2 of 6
2. The officer should not stop the motorist on high-speed highways unless
both vehicles can be removed from the highway to a safe parking area.
3. In the event a safe parking area is unavailable and the officer must make
the stop on the highway, these hazardous locations should be avoided:
a. Intersections
b. Hill crests or grades
c. Curves in the road
d. Areas under road construction
e. Any other location in the road where approaching traffic may be
unaware of the stopped vehicles
4. Activate all emergency lighting equipment on the police vehicle and

remain alert to any changes in the motorist’s driving, such as sudden
slowing, turning, or stopping.
5. When the violator’s vehicle has stopped, the officer should position his
vehicle in such a manner as to establish a safety zone in which they may
safely approach and make contact with the violator. The safety zone is
set up by parking the police vehicle 5 to 10 feet to the rear of the
stopped vehicle and 2 to 3 feet to its left. If the safety zone cannot be
established due to road conditions or how the violator has stopped on
the side of the road, the officer should use the public address (PA)
system in the police unit to direct the violator to a safe area.
6. The officer should use his/her discretion in deciding where to make the
traffic stop and how to position the police vehicle for optimum safety and
visibility. This judgment should be based upon geographical
characteristics, traffic conditions, weather conditions, time of day, etc.
7. During hours of darkness, the officer should use the spotlight and/or
takedown lights to illuminate the interior of the violator’s vehicle and its
occupants.
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
11. All passengers should be instructed to remain inside the stopped vehicle
unless directed by the officer to do otherwise.
12. The officer should request a backup if, in his/her opinion, the traffic stop
will turn into a dangerous situation. No officer shall attempt a vehicle
stop until a backup arrives when information has been received that the
occupants are dangerous.
13. If a violator refuses to sign a summons as a guarantee to appear in

court, a supervisor will be notified, and respond to the scene. The officer
will serve the violator with the un-signed summons and write “Refused to
Sign” in the violator signature designated area. Unless concurrent
custodial charges exist; the violator shall not be arrested solely for the
refusal to sign the summons.
B. CONTACT WITH THE VIOLATOR:
1. Once the officer has stopped and is about to communicate with the
violator, officer–violator relations are initiated.
2. It is only natural that some degree of apprehension may be felt between

the officer and violator. However, this can be minimized through
proper and planned contact. This process can usually be positive if the
officer follows these basic guidelines:
a. Decide what you are going to do and say before communicating

b. Introduce yourself and what agency you’re with
c. Explain the reason for the stop. Be polite, but firm.
d. Statements regarding the violation should be direct and positive.
This is accomplished by:
• Your knowledge of the law and elements of the violation
• Your bearing and appearance
• Your language (The motorist should be addressed by ma’am
or sir)
• Certainty of observation of the offense
• Your preparedness. Have necessary equipment and forms to
accomplish the tasks.
e. Ask the motorist where they keep their driver’s license and
registration.
f. Ask them to retrieve and produce their driver’s license and
registration.
g. Direct the motorist to remain in their vehicle or standing / sitting in
a safe area with back-up officers if removed from their vehicle.
h. Return to the patrol vehicle and write the summons as rapidly as
possible. Continue to visually monitor the violator and other
vehicle occupants during this process.
i. Re-approach the violator and issue the summons. Provide a
detailed explanation of legal requirements and the court process.
j. Should the violator refuse to sign the summons:
1) The officer will request a supervisor to respond to the
scene.
2) Upon their arrival, the officer will serve the violator the un-
signed summons and write “Refused to Sign” in the
3. Removing suspect(s) from the vehicle:
a. Remove and secure driver first

b. Followed by front seat passengers
c. Remove rear passengers last
d. Ensure vehicle is clear (interior & trunk) utilizing two (2) officers
E. DRIVER DEFICIENCY:
1. Routine enforcement and accident investigation activities frequently lead

to the discovery of drivers who may have a physical or mental condition
preventing them from exercising adequate control over a motor vehicle.
Whether or not charges are placed, these deficiencies should be brought

to the attention of the Department of Motor Vehicles.
2. In those instances where the officer feels it is necessary, he/she should

complete a Medical Review Request form.
3. This report is submitted to the Records Section where it is forwarded to

the Department of Motor Vehicles, Medical Unit.
4. Supervisors will review and initial the form assuring that it is completed
properly.
5. This effort will result in D.M.V. contacting the subject for reevaluation.
F. NOTICE OF SUSPENSION/REVOCATION/DISQUALIFICATION OF DRIVERS

LICENSE:
1. D.M.V. form DSA-10 will be completed by officers and other appropriate

action taken when the following conditions exist:
a. A VCIN inquiry indicates the violator is on revocation, and

b. The addressee has NOT received a suspension or revocation
notice.
If there is any question concerning the violator’s receipt of suspension

notification, the form DSA-10 should be completed and issued.
2. Once the form is completed, the dispatcher will issue to the officer a six-
digit DMV control number that will be placed in the upper right-hand
corner of the issuing agency copy (pink). The officer will take the two
completed remaining copies (white & pink) along with the confiscated
operator’s license, if any, and turn them over to Communications (Info-
center) at the end of the shift. Communications will check the control
number with the forms turned in.
3. It will be the responsibility of the Day Shift Communications Info-Center

Team Leader to ensure DMV has a copy of the form and the operator’s
license is transported to the local DMV Office before 1000 hours of every
weekday.
P&P #1114 – TRAFFIC STOPS Page 7 of
6
Redaction Log

Records of law-enforcement agencies, to

the extent that such records contain
specific tactical plans, the disclosure of
2 TACTICAL PLANS which would jeopardize the safety or 1
security of law-enforcement personnel or
the general public has been redacted
pursuant to Va. Code §2.2-3706(B)(5).

Redaction Log

Pages
Records of law-enforcement agencies, to the

extent that such records contain specific
tactical plans, the disclosure of which would 2(1)
TACTICAL PLANS jeopardize the safety or security of 4(1)
law-enforcement personnel or the general
public has been redacted pursuant to Va.
Code §2.2-3706(B)(5).
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
05/01/09
POLICE CHAPLAIN PROGRAM OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the Hampton Police Chaplain
Program.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to make the services of volunteer
police chaplains available to the members of the Hampton Police Division, their
families, and under certain circumstances, members of the public. The services
consist of crisis intervention, counseling, emotional support and comfort and non-
sectarian spiritual support in times of need. Police Chaplains are not sworn and have
no police authority.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The Community Relations Unit will oversee the Police Chaplain Program.
The Community Relations Unit will therefore be responsible for providing the
Communications Unit with an updated roster which will contain each
Chaplain’s name and his or her contact information.
B. Designated Police Chaplains shall have two basic roles.
1. First, they will be available for administering counseling to police

officers and their families when the need exists and when the officers
and/or their families desire the counseling services.
2. Second, the Chaplain’s services may be utilized in assisting the Police

in dealing with families with whom the Police have had contact due to
domestic problems of some type.
C Police Counseling – The role of Chaplain will be based on volunteer

acceptance and the Chaplains’ ability to deal with people on a non-
denominational basis.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1120 – POLICE CHAPLAIN PROGRAM Page 2 of 3
1. A Police Chaplain may be called upon to assist police officers and their
families on a volunteer basis with personal problems. Such as marital
issues, family crisis, death of a loved one, etc.
In order to better serve Division members, new Police Chaplains will

receive an orientation into the Hampton Police Division.
2. Examples of services which should be provided by a Police Chaplain

are:
a. Personal counseling to officers and their families.
b. Visiting hospitalized officers.
c. Maintaining informal relationships with as many members of the

Division as possible in order to become familiar with individuals
as well as specific problems encountered by police officers on a
routine basis.
D. Citizen Counseling – Personnel of the Police Division are encouraged to call

upon the Police Chaplain for assisting with situations where their services
may be of some benefit. Examples of these situations include:
1. Counseling the family of victims of a suicide or homicide, both at the

scene and afterwards, if necessary.
2. Counseling families who have domestic problems such as incorrigible

juveniles who are continually running away and creating problems
within the family.
3. Being available for tactical situations, especially those in which

negotiations are being conducted such as in the case of a hostage
situation.
E. Qualifications for Police Chaplain
1. Candidates for the Hampton Police Chaplain Program must be duly

ordained, licensed, commissioned or appointed by their ecclesiastical
body.
2. The applicant must also be an active participant in their religious body,

parish, synagogue or temple.
3. Candidates must be in good standing and presently affiliated with a

duly recognized religious body. A duly recognized religious body is
P&P # 1120 – POLICE CHAPLAIN PROGRAM Page 3 of 3
defined for the purpose of this policy and procedure as one meeting
the requirements as outlined in IRS Publication 1828, titled “Internal
Revenue Service, Tax Exempt and Government Entities, Exempt
Organizations”.
4. Candidates must submit to a criminal history and background check,

including reference checking interviews conducted by the Police
Department.
5. Candidates must never have been convicted of any crime involving

moral turpitude, a sexual related offense, or any type of felony or class
1 or 2 misdemeanor.
6. Candidates must be law-abiding citizens and refrain from any illegal

drug use, as well as drinking of alcoholic beverages while on duty.
7. Candidates must demonstrate compassion, understanding, and

respect for fellow humans and be tactful and considerate in their
approach to people regardless of race, creed, religion or sexual
orientation.
8. Candidates must have attended or be willing to attend the Hampton

Police Division’s Citizens Police Academy within 12 months of being
accepted as a Police Chaplain.
9. Candidates must be interviewed and recommended by a selection

board which will be made up of a mixture of Community Relations
personnel and Hampton Police Chaplains.
10. Candidates must be at least 21 years old.
F. Clothing and Appearance
As a representative of the City of Hampton and Hampton Police Division,

Police Chaplains should strive to be well dressed and professional in their
appearance at all times. Police Chaplains will adhere to the personal
appearance standards set forth in Policy and Procedure 1102 Personal
Appearance.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
11/29/11
FUNERAL ESCORTS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish procedures for providing funeral escort
services to the citizens of Hampton.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to ensure that funeral processions
in the City of Hampton are escorted properly, given dignity, respect, and safety to
those involved.
III. PROCEDURE:
The following procedures shall be used by personnel of the Hampton Police Division
when providing funeral escort services to the citizens of Hampton.
A. Funeral escorts shall be requested by a funeral home by contacting the

Emergency Communications Center on the non-emergency line at least one (1)
hour prior to the departure of the procession.
B. Call takers receiving the request will capture the following information: 1) The
FIRST AND LAST NAME of the person making the request. 2) The
COMPLETE NAME and BUSINESS ADDRESS of the Funeral Home. 3) The
caller’s telephone number. 4) Where the funeral procession will begin and end.
5) Time the procession is scheduled to begin. 6) Number of vehicles expected
in the procession.
C. A Police Cadet or Public Service Officer (PSO) will be the first unit considered
to be assigned to this function. If a Police Cadet or Public Service Officer is not
available, a Patrol Unit will be assigned to conduct the escort. If units are
unavailable to conduct a funeral escort, the Emergency Communications
Center will advise the individual making the request as soon as possible.
D. The initial unit(s) will arrive at the designated location prior to the departure time
for the procession and will determine if additional traffic control assistance will
be required (based on the number of cars involved in the funeral procession
and the route to be taken). If additional units are necessary, the responding
unit(s) will notify a Field Supervisor.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1121 – FUNERAL ESCORTS Page 2 of 2
E. Escorting of a procession through an intersection will be carried out as follows:
1. When approaching an intersection, the escort officer shall stop, ensure

that emergency lights are on, and proceed to the center of the
intersection (siren will be used as necessary). When all traffic has
stopped, he/she will proceed through the intersection with the procession
following.
2. If another officer is present at the intersection for the purpose of traffic

control, the escort officer shall follow the traffic control officer’s direction.
3. The escort officer shall lead the procession. If other officers are
assigned, they shall take appropriate positions to ensure the safety and
control of the procession.
F. All personnel shall become familiar with laws applicable to funeral processions
under police escort and traffic signals:
1. Virginia State Code §46.2-829 (Approach of Law Enforcement Vehicles)
2. Virginia State Code §46.2-828 (Right-of-Way for Funeral Processions

Under Police Escort; Other Processions).
3. Virginia State Code §46.2-828.1 (Impeding or disrupting certain funeral

processions; penalty).
G. The lead escort officer when approaching the entrance to the cemetery shall
proceed ahead of the procession and get out of the vehicle and stop traffic
proceeding in the opposite direction and shall remain in this position until all
vehicles in the procession have entered the cemetery.
H. While outside of their vehicles assisting with traffic at the entrance of the
cemetery, the officer(s) shall remove their hats and cover their shield.
I. In the event the member of the Public Safety Division is the deceased, officers
will render the military salute as the hearse and family vehicles pass their
position.
J. At the conclusion of an escort, the responding unit MUST give the appropriate
disposition. (Example: “Escort Complete”, “Left Prior to Arrival”, “Unable to
Complete”) This information and any other pertinent information will be noted
by the dispatcher and captured in the “notes” section of the complaint.
K. Hampton City Ordinance requires a fee of $100 be charged for each funeral
escort. On a monthly basis, the Emergency Communications Center will
provide a printout of all funeral escorts conducted by the Police Division to the
Community Relations Unit. The Community Relations Unit will review these
records for accuracy and provide the information to the City’s Finance
Department who will be responsible for billing the funeral homes.
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
5/28/97
DEATH NOTIFICATIONS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for notifications to next-of-kin

involving deceased, seriously injured or ill persons.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to provide notification when

circumstances dictate to next-of-kin of deceased, seriously injured or ill persons.
Because of the emotional impact involved in such notifications, it is imperative that the
message is delivered accurately, professionally, and empathetically.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Within the city – at request of other agencies:
1. Notification requests initiated by other agencies should include a teletype

message or some other form of confirmation.
2. The officer making the notification at the request of another agency is to

have the teletype in hand prior to delivering the message.
3. Public Safety Communications is to notify a patrol supervisor of the

death notification. The supervisor will determine which officer(s) will
respond.
4. Preferably, two officers are to respond to make the notification. If

desired, the Police Chaplain may be requested to assist with the
notification.
5. Notification is to be made to an adult member (age 18 or older) of the

family or close friend of the family.
B. Within the city – Division initiated:
1. Preferably, two officers are to respond to make the notification. If

desired, the Police Chaplain may be requested to assist with the
notification.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1122 – DEATH NOTIFICATIONS Page 2 of 2
2. If notification cannot be made in person, then notifications may be made

by phone in compliance with P&P 1011, Fatal Traffic Investigations,
Section III, B, 3 (b) c).
3. Notification is to be made to an adult member of the family or close

friend of the family.
C. Outside the city limits:
1. Notification to the law enforcement agency having jurisdiction over the

residence of the next-of-kin is made by teletype.
2. The agency is asked to contact the next-of-kin in person. If they are

reluctant to comply, then the Division Watch Commander is advised.
3. The agency is asked to provide feedback to the Division upon

notification, to include the name of the person contacted.
4. The agency is requested to provide the name of the investigating officer

and phone number of the Division to the next-of-kin for any additional
information requests.
P&P #1122 – DEATH NOTIFICATIONS Page 3 of 2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
7/18/97
ROLL-CALL OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish procedures for uniform roll-call.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to conduct a comprehensive roll-call at

the beginning of each tour-of-duty.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. All uniform shift personnel, including supervisors, will attend roll-call.

Representatives from Investigative Services will attend uniform roll-call on a
periodic basis. Other operational units should attend or be represented at
uniform roll-calls.
B. Roll-call consists of the following:
1. Briefing officers with information regarding daily patrol activity, with

particular attention to:
a. Unusual situations
b. Changes to the status of wanted persons
c. Stolen vehicles
d. Major investigations
e. Missing persons/runaways
f. Keep checks
2. Notifying officers of changes in schedules and assignments.
3. Notifying officers of new directives or changes in directives.
4. Evaluating officers’ readiness to perform patrol.
5. Providing officers with roll-call training.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
SEARCH OF 03/01/2021
A MOTOR VEHICLE ORIGINATOR
OPERATIONS
I. PURPOSE:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to insure that each officer is made
aware of existing laws pertaining to the searching of motor vehicles.
II. POLICY:
The purpose of this policy is to inform each officer of the laws on searching vehicles
so that they may become more knowledgeable in this area. This policy is also
intended to set forth how far an officer may or may not go and still protect the rights
of an individual.
III. DISCUSSION:
A search occurs whenever an officer intrudes into a zone where a person can
reasonably expect privacy. If an officer walks by a car that is in a public place and
looks into the car through the window, he has not conducted a search; a person
cannot reasonably expect privacy in what he exposes to public view. On the other
hand, if an officer opens the trunk, a search has occurred because the officer intruded
into a zone where privacy can reasonably be expected. The fact that the officer did
not touch or move any item in the truck is irrelevant. Once the officer has intruded
into a zone where privacy can reasonably be expected, he has conducted a search.
Unless a valid consent has been obtained, a search must be justified either by a
search warrant or some recognized exception to the search warrant requirement.
The same factual justification necessary to validate an investigative detention of a

pedestrian will justify the stop of a vehicle to detain an occupant. A stop of a
pedestrian or vehicle may not be conducted randomly or whimsically; it must be
based on reasonable and articulable suspicion of criminal activity. Unless there exists
a reasonable cause or suspicion that a vehicle and its occupants should be stopped
and detained such as might be justified by a driver’s violation of traffic regulations or
another law, officers shall not randomly stop and detain a driver. (Delaware v. Prouse
(1979)).
IV. PROCEDURE:
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1125 – SEARCH OF A MOTOR VEHICLE Page 2 of 4
The procedures outlined below shall serve as a guideline to all police officers within
the
Hampton Police Division when it becomes necessary to search a vehicle.
A. NON-CONSENT SEARCHES
When it becomes necessary to search a vehicle that is mobile and may be

removed from the jurisdiction, the following procedures will be followed:
1. In all cases the necessary probable cause must be present. There must
be sufficient probable cause to justify the issuing of a search warrant by
a magistrate or judge. The officer must be prepared to justify his actions
and probable cause before a trial judge at the time of trial. Any probable
cause that would not be sufficient to obtain a search warrant from a
magistrate would not be sufficient to search the vehicle without the
warrant.
2. Police may search the passenger compartment (to include glove box,
bags etc.) of a vehicle incident to a recent occupant’s arrest only if it is
reasonable to believe that the arrestee might access the vehicle at the
time of the search or that the vehicle contains evidence of the offense
of arrest (Arizona v. Gant 4/21/2009). Searches should not be
confused with conducting an inventory for tow purposes. See policy 624
for inventory and towing procedures.
B. CONSENT SEARCHES
A vehicle can be searched without a warrant if the person in apparent control

of the vehicle consents to the search either verbally or in writing. In order to
be valid, the consent must be obtained from someone who has the apparent
authority to consent and it must be given voluntarily. It is not necessary to
advise the subject of his right to refuse. The person consenting to the search
can limit his consent to certain areas of the vehicle and can withdraw his
consent at any time. If consent is withheld or withdrawn, no warrantless
search may be conducted or continued unless it can be justified based on one
or another of the exceptions to the search warrant requirements.
Refusal to consent or withdrawal of consent cannot be used as a factual

justification for conclusions of reasonable suspicion and/or probable cause. A
person’s refusal to relinquish a Constitutional right cannot be used as a basis
for police action against him.
C. FRISK OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A warrantless frisk for weapons of the passenger compartment of a vehicle is

permissible if the officer has reasonable suspicion that a dangerous weapon
is quickly accessible within the vehicle. The frisk is limited to places in the
interior passenger compartment in which a quickly accessible weapon could
be placed or hidden. A closed container found in the passenger compartment
can be opened and checked for weapons as long as the contents of the
container are immediately accessible to the suspect and the container is large
enough to support the size of a weapon (i.e., the container could be opened
quickly without breakage).
The trunk cannot be searched during a frisk of a vehicle for weapons because
the contents of the trunk are not immediately accessible to the subject. The
right to frisk the vehicle remains even though the suspect is removed from the
car. Michigan v. Long (1983) is the leading case on frisking a vehicle.
Case scenarios:
An Officer conducts a traffic stop in a known high drug area. The driver is
compliant and there are no signs of suspicious activity. There is no creditable
reason to frisk the driver area.
An Officer conducts a traffic stop in a known high drug area shortly after a
shots fired call. The driver is hesitant in his responses when asked if there
were any weapons in the car. The driver continually attempts to reach down
toward the floorboard and appears extremely nervous and continually looks
around the surrounding area. For Officer Safety, a limited frisk of the lunging
area can be conducted.
D. K-9 SEARCHES OF MOTOR VEHICLES
1. Any time an officer suspects that illegal narcotics are being transported
in a motor vehicle and wishes to utilize a narcotics dog for a search of
the vehicle, they must seek the advice and direction from the K9 officer
prior to conducting a search. The K9 officer, after hearing the reason
for requesting the search, shall approve or disapprove the request.
Neither the approval nor the K-9 search itself shall prolong the time
constraints established for conducting such a traffic stop unless
independent reasonable suspicion exists for such extension.
2. K-9 Officers making traffic stops, or backing on a traffic stop, shall be

prepared to articulate reasonable suspicion for removing their K-9 to
conduct a search of the vehicle stopped if such search will extend the
time of the stop beyond the original purpose.
3. The K-9 Officer will ensure that the occupants of the violator vehicle will
be briefed about the use of the police K-9.
4. The primary officer will continue with the process of the traffic stop and
or ticket writing while the K-9 search is being conducted.
5. If a positive alert is obtained, the primary officer will be notified of the

alert. Once aware, the decision to search the vehicle must be made.
The primary officer will take into account the following items when
deciding to search the vehicle:
• history of the occupants
• safety and location of the stop
6. The officer will conduct the search of the vehicle in a timely and safe
manner. If the search of the vehicle returns no illegal items, the
occupants will be allowed to return to their vehicle and the traffic stop
will be concluded and documented on a division Field Interview Card.
7. Sole occupants of vehicles can be searched based upon a positive K9

response in combination with; the totality of the officer’s observations,
knowledge, and experience. If a vehicle is occupied by more than one
occupant, those occupants will not be searched as a result of the K-9
alert on the vehicle, unless there are additional articulable factors
establishing probable cause to search each individual occupant
Whitehead v. Commonwealth (2009).
8. K-9 Officers will ensure that a K-9 Use Report is completed on each
search.
9. After any search involving the use of a police K-9 where damage (i.e.,
scratches to the exterior of the vehicle) is alleged or known to have
occurred, photographs of the damaged vehicle will be obtained and
turned into the Forensics Unit. The officer’s supervisor will be notified
and an accident loss package will be completed and forwarded through
their chain of command.
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
05/25/2021
SEARCH INCIDENTAL TO ARREST OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for the search of person(s) who are placed under arrest and
taken into physical custody.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division that search made incidental to an arrest
by members of this Division must be in accordance with the guidelines set forth herein.
This search will not be exploratory or general and shall be limited to protective
purposes for the safety of the arresting officer.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. U. S. Constitution, Fourth Amendment
1. The Fourth Amendment to the U.S. Constitution states in part, "The right
of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers and effects
against unreasonable searches and seizures shall not be violated.”
2. The general rule is that a reasonable search may follow a valid arrest.
The officer has the authority to make a search which may extend to
articles carried by the suspect and the suspect's immediate
surroundings.
B. Legality Of The Search Incident To Arrest
1. For a search incidental to arrest to be legal, the arrest must be valid. If

for any reason an arrest is unlawful, any search conducted by the
arresting officer may be ruled illegal and any evidence seized could be
excluded.
2. When a search is made incidental to an arrest, the search must be

based upon the arrest, not the arrest based on the outcome of a search.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1126 – SEARCH INCIDENTAL TO ARREST Page 2 of 3
3. Contemporaneous searches, incidental to arrests, are justified by the

need to seize weapons and other things which might be used to assault
an officer or effect an escape, as well as by the need to prevent the
destruction of evidence. Preston vs. U.S., 376 U.S. 364.
4. A search incident to a lawful arrest must be contemporaneous in time

and place.
5. A warrant is not required for search incident to an arrest because the

search prevents the arrestee from reaching weapons or destroying
evidence.
6. A search incident to a lawful arrest is permissible when it is limited in

scope.
7. Immediately upon arrest, an officer may lawfully search the person of the
arrestee and the area within the arrestee's immediate control-construing
that phrase to mean the area from which he might gain possession of a
weapon or destroy evidence. Chimel vs. California, 395 U.S.752.
8. When an officer has made a lawful custodial arrest of the occupant of an

automobile, they may search the vehicle only if the arrestee is within
reaching distance of the passenger compartment at the time of the
search or it is reasonable to believe the vehicle contains evidence of the
offense of the arrest (Arizona v. Gant 129 S.Ct. 1720).
C. STRIP SEARCHES AND BODY CAVITY SEARCHES
Strip searches and body cavity searches are massive intrusions of personal
privacy and can be tolerated only in the most extraordinary of circumstances.
The more intrusive the search, the more likely the balance of interests
(courts) will lean in favor of personal privacy.
1. Strip Search - shall mean having an arrested person remove or arrange

some or all of his clothing so as to permit visual inspection of the
genitals, buttocks, anus, female breasts, or undergarments of such
person.
a. No person in custodial arrest for a traffic infraction, Class 3 or

Class 4 misdemeanor, or a violation of a city, county, or town
ordinance, which is punishable by no more than thirty days in
jail shall be strip searched unless there is reasonable cause to
believe on the part of a law enforcement officer authorizing the
search that the individual is concealing a weapon, AND ALL
OTHER SEARCH TECHNIQUES HAVE BEEN EXHAUSTED.
A supervisor will be notified prior to conducting a strip search.
b. Before conducting a strip search or body cavity search of an

individual, officers conducting the search will ask the individual to
be searched their preference with respect to the gender of the

officer conducting the search (i.e. a trans woman may prefer to be
searched by female members of the department). This request
will be honored absent exigent circumstances, which shall be
documented in writing.
If an individual’s gender request can be reasonably and

expeditiously accommodated without risk to officer safety, the
request should be granted. Under exigent circumstances,
including but not limited to the existence of reasonable suspicion
of imminent threat of bodily harm or escape, any officer may
conduct a search of any detainee, regardless of the gender
identity/expression of the detainee.
c. Strip searches shall be performed by two officers as described in

Section b above.
d. The search shall be performed in an area where it cannot be

observed by persons not physically conducting the search.
e. As soon as possible, the officer conducting the strip search and

the attending officer will complete a special report via the chain of
command to the Operations Branch Commander. The report will
include, but not be limited to, the following information:
1. Time, date and location of the strip search.

2. The justification for the strip search.
3. The name, age, and sex of the arrested person who was
searched.
4. Findings from the search.
5. Any problems.
2. Body Cavity Search - is any search involving not only visual

inspection of skin surfaces but also the internal physical
examination of body cavities and, in some instances, organs such
as the stomach cavity. Body cavity searches are the most
intrusive type of search.
Any Body Cavity search, other than the mouth, will be

conducted only under the authority of a search warrant. In
either case probable cause must exist based on specific
articulable facts that the arrested person is concealing a weapon,
contraband or evidence in a body cavity. (Refer to P&P 707,
EXECUTION OF SEARCH WARRANTS).
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
AUXILIARY POLICE UNIT 10/11/2018
OVERSIGHT
Prof. Standards
I. PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for the operation and control of the Auxiliary Police Unit.
II. POLICY:
Auxiliary Police Officers are volunteer Police Officers, who derive their authority under
provisions of Hampton City Code Section 29-41 and the Code of Virginia, 15.2-1731.
Auxiliary officers are not subject to Civil Service requirements. All rules, regulations,
policies and procedures of the Hampton Police Division as well as the City of Hampton
Personnel Policies Manual apply except as to pay. Auxiliary officers are sworn Police
Officers in accordance with Virginia Department of Criminal Justice standards and the
Code of Virginia. Auxiliary Police Officers shall not operate outside of the City of
Hampton unless specifically authorized by written agreement with another locality, and
approved by the Chief of Police.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Auxiliary officers and organization: Auxiliary officers are appointed in writing by,
and serve at the need of, the Chief of Police. Auxiliary officers will normally
perform their duties in a patrol uniform, unless otherwise directed by the Chief
of Police. Auxiliary officers function under the command of the Support Services
Branch.
B. Membership: Membership in the Auxiliary Police Unit is open to all individuals

who meet all the prerequisites stated herein. The selection criteria for Auxiliary
Police Officer are the same as for sworn police officers. Members on active
duty with the military or civilian employees of the U.S. Government must
present orders or verify their ability to fulfill an Auxiliary commitment of at least
36 months from their date of graduation from the academy and certify they can
complete the Auxiliary recruit academy without interruption.
C. An Auxiliary Officer Program Coordinator will be appointed by the Support

Services Commander with the approval of the Chief of Police. The Auxiliary
Officer Program Coordinator is responsible for notifying Auxiliary personnel of
specific events requiring their attendance; and maintaining an updated Auxiliary
officer personnel folder. The program coordinator will also be responsible for
tracking the hours volunteered by the Auxiliary officers, tracking significant
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1127 – AUXILIARY POLICE Page 2 of 7
events involving the program, working alongside the Division’s Recruiting and
Training units and submitting the Auxiliary unit’s monthly report. The Program
Coordinator shall report to the Support Services Commander.
D. SELECTION PROCESS
1. The Personnel and Recruiting Unit is responsible for coordinating the

applicant processing of Auxiliary Police Officers (APO) and will ensure
that applicants meet the same selection criteria as that for full-time
officers.
2. Officers retiring or resigning from the Division in a full time status will
have an option to continue sworn service as an APO. This will be
identified upon the exit interview form. If the employee desires to remain
in service as an APO, the appropriate chain of command shall make
recommendation through Support Services for final approval by the
Chief of Police.
3. Officers who have formally retired/resigned that desire to join the

Auxiliary Police Officer Program would have to apply through the City’s
online application process.
E. TRAINING
1. The training program for an Auxiliary Officer will be the completion of a

DCJS Basic Law Enforcement Academy and Division Field Training
Program before they are certified as an Auxiliary police officer. Each
Auxiliary Officer will complete annual key training as the Division
requires maintaining their certification.
a. Basic Law Enforcement Academy (BLE): All Auxiliary Unit

applicants must complete the approved BLE before being sworn
in and authorized to carry a Division issued weapon or make an
arrest. They may, however, carry their Division issued
weapons to and from the range while attending the Academy.
b. Police Training Officer Program: The Auxiliary recruit is required

to complete the same field training program as full-time recruits.
The Police Training Officer (PTO) will evaluate and record the
recruit’s performance. The recruit must successfully complete the
Police Training Officer Program and be approved by the Chief of
Police.
c. Auxiliary police officers are required to attend and receive the

same in-service training required for full-time officers.
F. PROBATIONARY STATUS AND ASSIGNMENT
1. Auxiliary officers will remain probationary for the duration of the

Academy, Police Training Officer (PTO) program and the first 288 hours
they volunteer after completing the PTO program. The Auxiliary officer
will work along with a full-time officer or independently at the discretion of
the shift commander. At the conclusion of the probationary period the
Academy/Training Unit will review the officer’s personnel folder and
make the recommendation for either retention or termination to the Chief
of Police.
2. Auxiliary officers will be assigned to Operations – Patrol. Officers

seeking to transfer to another assignment will be reassigned based upon
availability and the needs of the Division. Openings shall be posted by
the Office of Personnel and Recruiting and run in accordance with Policy
and Procedure 641 for internal positions. The requesting officer shall
complete a transfer request and submit to the appropriate chain of
command. Final approval for transfer rests with the Chief of Police.
G. SPECIALIZED UNITS
1. After 288 hours of service and a minimum of one calendar year

following successful completion of the PTO program, Auxiliary officers
may apply for support roles in specialized units within the Division.
Support roles will be filled depending on the needs of the Division.
2. Auxiliary Police Officers who possess DCJS Law Enforcement

certification will not have to complete the above listed hours. However,
each will be assessed for work experience in consideration of a specialty
assignment.
H. PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
1. The appropriate supervisor of the unit to which the Auxiliary officer is

assigned will prepare a written performance evaluation each year. The
performance evaluation will become due on the same schedule as full
time officers.
I. WEAPONS QUALIFICATIONS
Auxiliary officers must meet Division standards for training in the use of all
weapons assigned. Auxiliary officers WILL NOT carry any issued firearm until
they have received Division approved instruction along with
reviewing/understanding Division policies on Use of Force and Use of Division
Issued Equipment. Upon qualification and successful completion of the PTO
program, sworn Auxiliary officers will be provisionally authorized to carry
Division issued firearms both on and off-duty. The Chief of Police, at his/her
discretion, may revoke this provisional authority at any time.
J. SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
Auxiliary officers must volunteer a minimum of 12 hours per month or an

average of 36 hours per quarter unless excused in writing by the Support
Services Branch Commander. All officers must assist with mandatory
assigned special events as prescribed unless the Auxiliary officer’s regular

profession or job requirements necessitate their presence. These hours will
count towards their service requirement. In the event of a natural disaster,
Auxiliary officers will report for duty as directed by the Chief of Police unless
the Auxiliary Officer’s regular job requirements necessitate their presence (i.e.,
military, fire/EMS, public utilities, etc.)
K. DUTY PROCEDURES
1. All Auxiliary officers shall carry their Division issued firearm on their
person at all times while on duty, unless in a firearms restricted area or
exempted by the Chief of Police or his/her designee.
2. Auxiliary officers are provided with the same liability coverage

provided to full-time Police Officers when on duty and are considered
to be on duty while traveling DIRECTLY to and from duty, provided they
are performing their assigned police duties.
3. Auxiliary officers will wear their uniforms to and from duty in

accordance with Division Rules and Regulations Section 8.
4. All Auxiliary officers are required to account for their time, including
extra-duty assignments through Kronos or another approved tracking
system.
5. Auxiliary officers assisting with special events (parades, ceremonies,

etc.) will report to the event OIC for duty assignment. Officers will work
as assigned. Failure to do so may be cause for disciplinary action.
6. Auxiliary officers working in a specialized unit will coordinate their

volunteer schedule with their specialized unit supervisor and the Auxiliary
Officer Program coordinator. When possible, Auxiliary officers will
notify the specialized unit supervisor in advance when they plan to
work. Officers will work as assigned. Failure to do so may be cause
for disciplinary action.
7. Auxiliary officers must volunteer at least 12 hours every month, but may
not volunteer more than one 12-hour tour of duty during any 24-hour
period unless under emergency conditions with the approval of the Chief
of Police. Auxiliary Officers are not required to complete the 12-hour
requirement in one day, but may over a period of time during the month
at a minimum of 4 hours each duty day. Any court time accrued due to
law enforcement actions will be assessed to the APO’s monthly service
obligation.
8. Auxiliary officers are eligible to work extra duty assignments upon

completing the 12-hour service requirement to the Division in the
previous month. They will be paid the normal extra duty rate for these
assignments. All fees will be paid by third parties, though the City will
facilitate such payments. The exception is that Auxiliary officers will
NOT work extra-duty assignments funded by the City of Hampton. In the

case that an outside vendor offers the hourly pay at an overtime rate, the
Auxiliary Officer will be paid at the overtime rate of a 5 year Patrol
Officer’s average salary.
9. As with Full-time Police Officers, APO’s will be considered on-duty for all
work and extra duty assignments.
L. OFF-DUTY
1. Auxiliary Officers may carry their badge and identification card. It will
only be utilized as a courtesy when dealing with other law enforcement
officers, or in emergency situations. Under no circumstances will
the credentials be used for routine identification.
2. At the Chief’s discretion, the Division may authorize Auxiliary Police

Officers to carry their Division issued firearm off duty. The Auxiliary
officer’s identification card gives them authority to carry a concealed
weapon off-duty in the Commonwealth of Virginia under § 18.2-308 B.2.
and nationally under § 18 USC 926B.
3. Auxiliary Officers are not authorized to exercise police powers and

authority when off duty unless called into service by any police officer
working in an emergency situation.
M. UNIFORM AND APPEARANCE
1. Uniforms and equipment requirements for sworn Auxiliary Officers are

the same as for full time officers. Retired/Resigned Officers will be
allowed to denote their service and or rank by way of an approved breast
bar pin as approved by the Chief of Police.
2. Uniforms will only be worn while going directly to or from duty and
while on duty. The Chief of Police or his/her designee may grant
exception to this depending on the assignment.
N. DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES: All Auxiliary Officers are subject to the City’s

personnel policies as well as the rules and regulations an dpolicies and
procedure of the Police Division. Disciplinary reviews will be conducted in
accordance with the Divisions policies, procedures, rules and
regulations and City Policy. Under City Policy, no volunteers or part time
employees receive grievance rights, which include WAE’s and Auxiliary Police
Officers. Discipline, including suspension or termination from the auxiliary
program, may result from actions that include, but not limited to:
1. Failure to comply with Hampton Police Division policies, procedures,

rules and regulations.
2. Failure to report for assigned or volunteer duties.

3. Failure to meet the service requirement of 12 hours per month or 36

hours per quarter. This will be evaluated over a long-term basis.
4. Conduct by an Auxiliary officer contrary to established policy may

result in immediate relief from duty.
5. Failure to complete required recertification training and/ or failure to

sustain firearms and defensive tactics certifications and qualifications.
O. BENEFITS AND INSURANCE COVERAGE
1. Line of Duty Act: Virginia State Code § 9.1-402 provides that up

$100,000 may be awarded to the deceased officer who dies in the
line of duty.
2. Civil Liability: The City of Hampton provides public liability

protection for Auxiliary officers equal to that provided to full-time
officers.
3. Life Insurance: A life insurance policy is provided for Auxiliary

officers.
4. Medical Expenses: Auxiliary Officers are covered by the City’s

volunteer medical policy, but not worker’s compensation.
5. Federal Employees’ Compensation Act: This act is administered by

the Department of Labor and provides benefits for any non-federal
law enforcement officer who is injured, sustains a disease, or is
killed while engaged in the apprehension of any person involved in
the commission of a federal crime.
P. INJURY ON DUTY
1. Auxiliary officers injured on duty will report the injury immediately to

their first line supervisor so that the appropriate reports are
completed.
2. If treatment is necessary, the Auxiliary officer will be transported to

the nearest hospital.
Q. RETIREMENT
1. An Auxiliary officer is eligible to retire from the Auxiliary Officer Unit upon
completion of twenty years of continuous, satisfactory voluntary service.
2. Twenty years or more of continuous service does not constitute

monetary compensation or benefits not mentioned in this policy.
3. Retired Auxiliary officers will be presented with a retired police badge

and retired police officer identification card both displaying their rank/
grade at time of retirement.
4. Retiring Auxiliary officers may purchase their duty weapon for $1.00,
under Virginia Code § 59.1-148.3, as approved by the Chief of
Police.
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
11/30/2021
POLICE PURSUITS OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P # 1128 dated 12/21/2020, and Chief’s Directive: 1128.1 dated 4/23/2021
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the pursuit of vehicles by police
officers.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to apprehend suspects when feasible
under existing conditions, with due regard for the safety of persons and property. The
pursuit of a fleeing vehicle is one of the most dangerous functions performed by
officers and is responsible nationally for numerous deaths and injuries each year. In
light of the inherent dangers associated with vehicle pursuits, pursuits shall only be
initiated and continued in accordance with the provisions set forth herein.
III. DEFINITIONS:
PURSUIT – A vehicle pursuit is an active deliberate attempt by a police officer to stop

a moving motor vehicle when the driver of such vehicle is actively attempting to elude
apprehension by maintaining or increasing his speed or by ignoring the officer’s
attempt to stop him.
STATIONARY ROADBLOCK – A technique applied at a fixed location using police

vehicles, barricades, and other apparatuses to deter or stop a motorist from evading
apprehension.
TIRE DEFLATION TECHNIQUE - A technique that allows for the slow and controlled
deflation of tire pressure, by way of an applied device, in order to render a vehicle
incapable of further operation. Types of application include the Stinger Spike System
or a Stop Stick device.
ARMED AND DANGEROUS - Any person who has committed or attempted to commit
any offense involving the unlawful discharge, display, possession, or use of a firearm
or explosive device in such a manner as to provide an officer reason to believe that the
person presents an immediate threat to the public.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1128 – POLICE PURSUITS Page 2 of 12
VIOLENT FELONY - Any felony involving physical force or violence, against another
person including, but not limited to; murder, manslaughter, mob-related offenses, rape,
kidnapping or abduction, robbery, malicious assault, escape by force, and placing or
detonating a destructive/explosive device or bomb.
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. A pursuit may be initiated based upon a reasonable belief of the following:
1. The occupant(s) of the vehicle are 1) armed and dangerous and or 2)

have committed or attempted to commit a violent felony; and/ or;
2. The vehicle was observed, prior to initiation of the pursuit, being

operated in such a flagrantly reckless manner that there is a blatant
disregard for human life. Or, is suspected of being under the influence of
drugs and/or alcohol and that the continued operation of the vehicle will
present an imminent threat to the public safety.
3. Officers are not to engage in vehicle pursuits for misdemeanor and or

traffic offenses unless they rise to the definition of ARMED AND
DANGEROUS or VIOLENT FELONY as indicated in section III above.
4. Civilian employees, Patrol Service Officers, and Police Cadets are

specifically prohibited from engaging in pursuit operations as are officers
who are transporting any other person other than law enforcement
officers.
a. The pursuing officer shall consider the following factors in

determining whether to initiate pursuit:
1) The condition of the road upon which the pursuit is being

conducted, including the condition of the surface itself as
well as the type of road (.e.g. divided highway, work zone).
2) The amount of vehicular and pedestrian traffic in the area.
3) Weather conditions.
4) The performance capabilities of the pursuit vehicle.
5) The seriousness of the underlying offense.
6) Known information on the suspect.
7) The character of the area (e.g. neighborhood, commercial

area.
8) Lighting and visibility.

b. When a pursuit is initiated on either the Wythe or Chesapeake

primary channel, the pursuit shall remain on that channel no
matter what part of the city it goes into. Likewise the initial
supervisor in charge of the pursuit will remain as the supervisor in
charge wherever the pursuit goes.
c. Unless a greater hazard would likely result, if the identity of the

driver is known to officers, the pursuit will be terminated.
Warrants will be obtained and served on the driver at a later time.
B. Pursuit Officer Responsibilities
1. In the event an officer is involved in the pursuit of a vehicle that fails to

stop for the officer’s emergency lights and siren, the officer shall
immediately notify the dispatcher and provide as much of the following
information as reasonably possible:
a. District and/or CAD number
b. Location, speed, traffic conditions
c. Direction of travel
d. Description and tag number of the vehicle being pursued
e. Reason for pursuit
f. Description and number of occupants, when possible
g. Pursuing officers will ensure that they are wearing their seatbelt
and that their BWC is recording during the entirety of the pursuit
2. Once the pursuit is undertaken, officers shall discontinue the pursuit if it

becomes unreasonable under the circumstances to continue the chase.
The decision should be made by the pursuing officer without supervisory
approval.
a. Officers will notify their supervisor if it appears that the pursuit will
enter another jurisdiction.
b. No more than two vehicles will engage in a pursuit unless directly

authorized by the field supervisor.
3. When a pursuit is terminated, the pursuing officer will disengage the

pursuit, and deactivate their emergency equipment as soon as practical.
They will immediately advise the Supervisor in charge of the pursuit they
have disengaged, made a turn away from the direction that the pursuit
was traveling, reduced speed and give their current location.
a. All pursuits shall be conducted in strict conformity with applicable
traffic laws (VA Code 46.2-920) and Division Policy 1502

Operation of Police Vehicles. Officers may not drive with reckless
disregard for the safety of other road users regardless of pursuit
engagement or justification.
b. The authority to operate an emergency vehicle in a hot pursuit

situation does not protect the officer from criminal prosecution,
nor does it shelter the officer from civil liability for acts constituting
gross negligence.
C. Communications Responsibilities:
1. When police dispatchers are notified of an officer’s involvement in a

pursuit, the following steps will be undertaken:
a. Simulcast or have the opposite dispatcher broadcast pursuit

location and direction of travel.
b. Record and capture the information as provided above (Section –

IV, A, #2, Pursuit Officer Responsibilities).
c. Communications should ensure, via the radio, that the

appropriate field supervisor is aware of the pursuit.
d. Notify the Communications Supervisor of the pursuit.
e. Maintain a mute radio channel to allow for supervision and

tracking of the pursuit. Maintain the radio channel that the pursuit
was initiated on as the primary pursuit channel. All other traffic
will go to an appropriate secondary channel.
f. Do a DMV/NCIC/VCIN check on the suspect vehicle and an

NCIC/VCIN check on the owner or driver if identified. This should
be completed, as soon as possible, and broadcast to the
pursuing officer(s), preferably prior to the stop of the suspect
vehicle.
g. Cause the appropriate notification to be made to proper

jurisdictions if the pursuing officer approaches city boundaries.
h. When a pursuit is terminated, give an alert tone and simulcast

that the pursuit has been terminated.
D. Field Supervisor’s Responsibilities:
1. Upon notification that a vehicular pursuit incident is in progress, the Field

Supervisor shall acknowledge, via radio that he/she is the pursuit
supervisor and assume responsibility for the monitoring and control of
the pursuit as it progresses. The pursuit supervisor shall not be involved
in the pursuit.
a. The Field Supervisor shall continuously review the incoming data

to determine whether the pursuit should be continued or
terminated.
b. In controlling the pursuit incident, the Field Supervisor shall be

responsible for coordination of the pursuit as follows:
1) Directing pursuit vehicles into or out of the pursuit.
2) Re-designation of primary, support or other back-up

vehicle responsibilities.
3) Approval or disapproval, and coordination of pursuit

tactics.
4) Approval or disapproval to leave jurisdiction to continue

pursuit.
5) Identifying and directing units to perimeter locations.
c. The Field Supervisor will ensure that only two police vehicles are
involved in the pursuit.
d. The Field Supervisor may approve the assignment of additional

back-up vehicles to assist the primary and back-up pursuit
vehicles based on an analysis of:
1) The nature of the offense for which pursuit was initiated.
2) The number of suspects and any known propensity for

violence.
3) The number of officers in the pursuit vehicles.
4) Any damage to the primary or back-up vehicles or injuries

to any of the officers of those vehicles.
5) The number of officers necessary to make an arrest at the

conclusion of the pursuit.
6) Any other clear and documented facts that would warrant

the increased hazards caused by numerous pursuit
vehicles.
e. When a pursuit is terminated the supervisor will immediately
contact the pursuing officer and give a location away from the
pursuit to meet with the officer(s).
E. Assisting Units:
1. Upon joining the pursuit, the back-up officer shall advise that he is
engaged in the pursuit as the back-up. He shall advise the initial officer
and communications that he is taking control of the radio, giving updates
on locations and driver actions, thus relieving the primary officer of that
responsibility.
a. The back-up officer shall maintain a safe distance behind the

initial pursuit vehicle so as not to endanger either officer, or the
public.
b. All other assisting units should attempt to station themselves at

strategic points in anticipation of assisting when the suspect is
stopped or becoming the chase unit if the original pursuing officer
loses the suspect vehicle or becomes disabled.
c. Additional vehicles are prohibited from engaging in the pursuit,

unless directly authorized by the field supervisor.
d. Paralleling a pursuit (driving police vehicles parallel to the pursuit

in an attempt to keep up with or cut off the fleeing vehicle) is not
permitted. Assisting units may precede using routine response to
designated positions to assist in apprehending the fleeing driver,
unless otherwise directed by a supervisor.
e. No police unit actively involved in a pursuit will pass another

police unit, unless it is reasonably safe, the officer has
communicated their intentions, and there is a legitimate purpose.
F. Trucks, Vans, and Unmarked Units:
a. In the event that a pursuit is initiated by a truck, van or unmarked

unit, that unit shall abandon the pursuit when a standard marked
unit is in a position to assume the pursuit.
b. In the event a K-9 unit initiates a pursuit, that unit should

immediately abandon the pursuit when a standard marked unit is
in position to assume the pursuit or when speeds become
excessive for the design of the K-9 unit.
G. Use of Forcible Measures:
1. Forcible measures (physically attempting to stop a fleeing driver who has

demonstrated that they do not intend to be stopped) carry a substantial
risk of fatality. Stationary roadblocks and tire deflation techniques are
the only forcible measures authorized to be used.
2. Forcible measures will not be employed unless the circumstances

warrant the use of force in accordance with P&P 533 Use of Force and
Related Equipment.
3. Such measures will not be initiated and will be immediately stopped if

they are likely to endanger the public or law enforcement personnel.
4. Officers will only use a forcible measure after having been properly
trained on the use of such techniques.
5. Supervisory approval by a Lieutenant or higher ranking officer, must be

obtained prior to employing forcible measures. Sergeants, who are
working in lieu of a present Lieutenant (on either side of the city), can
provide the approval for forcible measures. Supervisors will weigh the
totality of the circumstances in determining if a stationary roadblock or a
tire deflation technique should be utilized.
a. Use of stationary roadblocks and tire deflation techniques are

considered a use of force, and all use of force reporting
procedures will be followed. An administrative review of the
incident will be conducted by Professional Standards, regardless
of whether injury results.
b. Immediately following a stationary roadblock or use of a tire

deflation technique, the on-duty Unit Commander and Risk
Management representative (if necessary-loss packet/injury) will
be notified.
H. Traffic Regulations during Pursuit:
1. Each unit authorized to engage in vehicular pursuit shall be required to

activate headlights and all emergency vehicle equipment prior to
beginning a pursuit.
2. Officers engaged in pursuit shall at all times drive in a manner exercising

reasonable care for the safety of themselves and all other persons and
property within the pursuit area.
3. Officers are permitted to suspend conformance with normal traffic

regulations during pursuit as long as reasonable care is used when
driving in a manner not otherwise permitted, and the maneuver is
reasonably necessary to gain control of the suspect.
4. During a vehicular pursuit, officers shall comply with Division Policy #

1502 – Operation of Police Vehicles, Section IV, A – Emergency I.
Operations of Police Vehicles.
a. The following procedures are a combination of Virginia State Law

§46.2-920, and policy constraints, which shall serve as guidelines
for the emergency operation of police vehicles by officers of the

Hampton Police Division. State code exempts emergency
vehicles from certain regulations:
1) The operator of any police vehicle operated by a police

officer in the chase or apprehension of violators of the law
or persons charged with or suspected of any such
violation, or in response to an emergency call, may without
subjecting himself to criminal prosecution:
a) Disregard speed limits while having due regard for

safety of persons and property;
b) Proceed past any steady or flashing red signal,

traffic light, stop sign or device indicating moving
traffic shall stop, after:
(1) Slowing and preparing to stop the police

vehicle,
(2) Yielding right-of-way as necessary to
moving vehicles and pedestrians,
(3) Determining that the intersection may be
entered safely,
(4) Otherwise giving due regard to the safety of
persons and property.
c) Park or stop notwithstanding other provisions of

Virginia State Code or Hampton City Code.
d) Disregard regulations governing a direction of

movement of vehicles turning in specified directions
as long as the operator does not endanger life or
property.
e) Pass or overtake, with due regard for the safety of

persons and property, another vehicle at any
intersection.
f) Pass or overtake with due regard to the safety of

persons and property, while en route to an
emergency, stopped or slow-moving vehicles, by
going to the left of the stopped or slow-moving
vehicle either in a no-passing zone or by crossing
the highway centerline.
g) Pass or overtake, with due regard for the safety of

persons and property, while en route to an
emergency, other slow moving vehicles, by going
off of the paved or main traveled portion of the
roadway on the right. Notwithstanding other

provisions of this policy, vehicles exempted from
this instance will not be required to sound a siren or
device to give automatically intermittent signals.
2) These exemptions granted to such emergency vehicles,

shall apply only when the operator of such vehicle displays
a flashing, blinking or alternating emergency light or lights
and sounds a siren as may be reasonably necessary.
Such exemptions shall not, however, protect the operator
of any such vehicle from criminal prosecution for conduct
constituting reckless disregard of the safety of persons
and property.
3) Due to the increase in traffic volume, and the potential for

accidents at intersections, police vehicles operating under
emergency conditions when approaching green lights and
major intersections will:
a) Decrease speed by removing foot from the gas

pedal and be prepared to come to a stop.
b) Enter intersection only when this can be done

safely.
c) Increase speed only when it is safe to do so.
I. Termination of Pursuit:
1. A decision to terminate pursuit may be the most rational means of

preserving the lives and property of both the public, and the officers and
suspects engaged in the pursuit. A pursuit may be terminated by the
pursuing officer or by any supervisor.
2. Pursuit shall be terminated in any of the following circumstances:
a. The decision to continue a pursuit must be based on the officer’s

conclusion that the necessity of immediate apprehension
outweighs the danger to the public that will be created by the
pursuit.
b. Weather or traffic conditions substantially increase the danger of

pursuit beyond the worth of apprehending the suspect.
c. The pursuing officer loses sight of the fleeing vehicle, or the

distance between the pursuing vehicles and fleeing vehicle is so
great that further pursuit is futile.
d. The pursuing officer loses radio contact with the dispatcher.

J. Inter- and Intra-Jurisdictional Pursuits
When a pursuit leaves the city, the pursuing officer will inform the dispatcher
immediately. When officers of the foreign jurisdiction join the pursuit, the
Hampton unit(s) will discontinue the pursuit and proceed at a normal rate of
speed, without emergency equipment, in the direction of the pursuit, or to the
scene of the apprehension as directed by the dispatcher. If a pursuit enters the
City from a foreign jurisdiction, only two Hampton units will assist with the
pursuit. Once the pursuit leaves the City, the field supervisor will determine
whether the Hampton units will continue the pursuit. In the absence of such
direction, the pursuing officer will be responsible for determining whether to
continue the pursuit. Communications will contact the foreign jurisdiction to
determine the nature of the pursuit (if this information is not already known) and
report this information to the Field Supervisor as soon as possible.
K. Reporting Responsibilities
Any time an employee engages in a vehicle pursuit, a BlueTeam “Vehicle

Pursuit” incident report will be completed. The following procedures apply:
1. Unless extenuating circumstances exist, The Watch Commander (or

designee) will provide a summary of all incidents that meet the reporting
criteria established in this policy.
a. Daily recap email to the Chief of Police and Division staff.
b. The reporting unit’s chain of command will notify the Chief of

Police as soon as possible regarding critical issues that arise as a
result of a vehicle pursuit.
2. All employees involved in a vehicle pursuit will submit written reports to

their chain of command documenting the following:
a. Date, time, location and reason for the pursuit.
b. Identity of all officers involved, to include police vehicle numbers

and descriptions (i.e., marked, unmarked, K-9).
c. Identity of the suspect, to include vehicle description and

registration information.
d. Course of travel to include speed, environmental factors, and

civilian traffic conditions.
e. Course of travel to include speed, environmental factors, and

civilian traffic conditions.
f. Any action taken against the suspect vehicle and the reason
for such action.
g. BWC video footage, to include corresponding identifying

information.
h. Final disposition of the pursuit to include charges sought and

obtained, evidence identified and collected, and related tracking,
case, and property invoice numbers.
3. Each vehicle pursuit will be investigated by the on duty Field Supervisor

when the pursuit occurred. Supervisors investigating the incident will
complete a BlueTeam “Vehicle Pursuit” incident report. The following
procedures apply:
a. All related information required by BlueTeam will be entered
b. Officer’s written reports will be scanned and attached to the

corresponding BlueTeam incident entry
c. Additional documentation related to the incident, such as hard

copies of witness statements will be scanned and attached to the
corresponding BlueTeam entry.
4. Accident Loss reports and medical documentation should be forwarded

separately as required by P&P 601 “Injury Procedures.”
L. Photograph and Video Footage
1. Photographs of the suspect vehicle will be taken capturing all four sides,
including the license plate.
2. BWC video information should be noted in the supervisor’s summary of

the BlueTeam incident report.
3. All digital evidence such as in car camera video, surveillance video,

digital photograph files, etc. should be forwarded physically through the
chain of command for review. These files should not be attached to the
BlueTeam incident file.
4. Completed BlueTeam incident reports will be forwarded through the

chain of command via the BlueTeam email notification and review
process.
a. Unit supervisors will review all involved officer’s written reports for
format, grammar and content prior to attachment in BlueTeam.
b. BlueTeam incident reports will not be printed until approved

through the chain of command.
5. BlueTeam incident entries will be forwarded to the Office of Professional

Standards (IAPro) upon approval by the originating unit’s chain of
command.
6. All BlueTeam incident reports, related documentation, and evidence

records are required to be on file with the Office of Professional
Standards within 30 days of the event.
7. The Office of Professional Standards will review each police pursuit

incident regarding the application of law, rules and regulations, and
policy and procedure.
8. Upon review and approval by the Office of Professional Standards,

completed vehicle pursuit reports will be maintained pursuant to records
retention requirements.
M. Report Analysis
The Commander of the Professional Standards Unit will be responsible for an

annual review and analysis of vehicle pursuit reports. The review will seek to
identify patterns or trends that indicate training needs, policy modifications and
reporting procedure changes. A report of the findings will be forwarded to the
Chief of Police.
N. Training
Officers shall receive initial driver instruction training in the Academy. This
training includes defensive driving, pursuit driving and road block design &
application training. This policy will be reviewed with recruits in the Academy
and with all sworn officers at least twice annually.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
07/17/17
DUI CASE PROCESSING/
PREPARATION OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P 1129 dated 10/14/10.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish proper procedures for processing

cases involving driving under the influence (Virginia State Code §18.2-266
and 46.2-391.2).
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to actively enforce State and
City Codes regarding the operation of motor vehicles while under the
influence of alcohol and/or drugs. The most recent revision of the
Hampton Police Division DUI Worksheet will be utilized as the standard
reporting format in all DUI cases. The DUI Worksheet shall be completed
to include all evidence to be used in court including any evidential
statements and video recordings of the incident.
III. PROCEDURE:
Evidence collection in DUI cases start with the observation of the suspect
vehicle. The following procedures pertain:
A. Observe actions of the vehicle as it is driven. For example, was the

vehicle:
1. Swerving from side to side?

2. Starting and stopping in an erratic fashion?
3. Accelerating / decelerating rapidly?
4. Driving slower than appropriate?
5. Making exaggerated turns?
B. Stop the vehicle in an area where the investigation can be

completed as safely as possible. Camera systems (both BWC and
in-car camera) shall be utilized whenever available in an effort to
capture the entire testing and arrest process.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1129 – DUI CASE PROCESSING / PREPARATION Page 2 of 11
1. Observe whether or not the subject appeared to understand

the emergency lights and siren.
2. Make mental notes of the distance for which the driver was
observed, and at what points erratic driving was observed.
C. Ask the driver for his license and registration and observe any
apparent coordination difficulties.
1. Ask the operator what their highest level of education was, if

they know the alphabet from the letter A through the letter Z,
and if they know the numbers 1 through 100. Also ask the
operator if they have any physical impairments, are taking
any medications, or are currently under doctor’s care. At this
time conduct the Pre-Exit Sobriety Tests listed on the DUI
Evidence Form to include:
a. The alphabet test

b. The count backwards test
c. The finger count test
After explaining what is expected of the operator for each

test, ask them if they understand your instructions. If further
investigation is warranted continue with the following steps.
2. Ask the driver to get out of the car and thereafter observe
the subject’s physical stability.
3. Make it a point to get close enough to the driver (safely) to

enable you to ascertain if the odor of an alcohol type
beverage is on his breath (not just on the clothing or in the
car).
4. Observe the physical condition and speech of the driver to

include:
a. Physical impairments
b. Bloodshot eyes
c. Facial flushing
d. Slobbering or drooling
e. Slurred and / or incoherent speech
f. Legitimate medication taken by the driver
5. When assessing the driver’s level of impairment, the officer

will determine (1) the driver’s ability to take the standard field
sobriety tests (2) the most appropriate test based on the
driver’s physical and emotional abilities. Officers will use the
approved field sobriety tests listed on the evidence form:
a. Walk and Turn (heel to toe)

b. One Leg Stand
c. Horizontal Gaze Nystagmus
Safety is the investigating officer’s responsibility. Conduct

the walk and turn and one leg stand tests on flat, level areas,
not between vehicles or areas that present a danger to the
officer / suspect.
6. Determine if the driver’s observed level of impairment,

(based upon both operation of the vehicle and field sobriety
tests) established grounds for charging as Driving Under the
Influence. If so, continue.
D. Advise the driver of the Field Breath Test Law (§18.2-267), which is
printed on the DUI Worksheet. Offer the suspect a preliminary
breath test (alcosensor). If the driver submits to the test, record the
results on the DUI Worksheet.
1. In court, the officer will not reveal the results of the

Preliminary Breath Test unless under question of the
defense attorney or if directed to do so by the court.
2. Administer the preliminary breath test if the driver chooses,

according to operating procedures for the alcosensor.
E. Advise the driver that he is under arrest for Driving Under the
Influence of Alcohol / Drugs and advise him/her of
obligations/rights.
1. Under §18.2-268.2 the arrest must be made within 3 hours

of the alleged offense. This section needs to be considered
during accident investigations, as well as normal traffic
stops.
2. Once the arrest has been effected, advise the driver of the
Implied Consent Law (Virginia Code §18.2-268.2) as printed
on the DUI evidence form.
3. “Under Virginia Law, any person who operates a motor

vehicle on the highways of the state is deemed to have given
his/her consent to have samples of breath, if arrested for
driving under the influence or for operating a motor vehicle
after illegally consuming alcohol or violating State Code
18.2-272. Any person after being arrested for DUI or
operating a motor vehicle after illegally consuming alcohol or

violating State Code 18.2-272, shall submit to a breath test.
Any unreasonable refusal to allow a sample to be taken
constitutes grounds for revocation of privileges to drive on
the highways of this state. A finding of unreasonable refusal
to consent may be admitted as evidence at a criminal trial.”
If a blood sample is needed for DUI related testing and the

subject does not consent to provide the blood sample, a
search warrant from the magistrate must be obtained.
4. Advise the Miranda Warning, if necessary, only after

advising the suspect of the Implied Consent Law.
F. If a blood test is to be administered, and the driver has consented,

or a search warrant has already been obtained, take the driver to
the nearest authorized medical facility for a blood test. The officer
should first obtain a blood test kit from his supervision. Blood test
kit supplies are secured and stored at both field offices. The
following procedures should be fully documented on the DUI
Worksheet:
NOTE: If the suspect is a juvenile his or her parent or legal

guardian will need to be contacted to meet the driver at the
medical facility to sign the consent for treatment forms. Then
proceed with the following procedure. (If the parent or
guardian refuses to respond, or to give the medical facility
consent, the officer SHALL obtain a search warrant).
1. Note time of arrival at the medical facility.
2. Upon arrival, check to make sure that the test kit date is valid
and that the integrity seal is properly secure. The Officer
shall wait until the nurse is present before breaching the seal
to gain access to the vials.
3. Only a physician, registered professional nurse, or graduate

laboratory technician may take blood. Record the name and
medical license number on the DUI Worksheet.
4. Determine if the left or right arm was cleansed with the

provided alcohol free PVP prep pad or soap and water. If
soap and water, check the brand of soap to be used to
cleanse the part of the body from which the blood sample is
to be taken. This soap must not contain any alcohol.
5. Inspect the syringe wrappers, needle packages, soap

wrapper and gauze package to insure they are sealed prior

to their use for the test.
6. Portions of the blood sample are to be placed in each of the

two blood vials and mixed with the anticoagulant as
instructed. The vials are then sealed with the supplied
evidence tape. Both of the Certificates of Blood Withdrawal
labels are filled out showing:
a. Defendant’s name
b. Name of person withdrawing the blood
c. Date and time blood sample was withdrawn
d. Arresting / accompanying officers name (printed)
e. Officer’s CAD number
f. Name of court
The top portion of the certificate is then affixed to the

separate vials. Officers must annotate the blood vial number
in the appropriate place on the DUI Worksheet. A DFS
request for laboratory examination must be completed and
be included with the packaging.
7. The vials are then to be re-secured in the packaging

provided by the Department of Forensic Science. Close the
kit container and seal with tamper evident shipping seal
provided.
8. Both blood vials are mailed to the Division of Consolidated

Laboratories Services, Bureau of Forensic Science by the
arresting officer.
9. The officer shall advise the defendant that either they or their
attorney will have to file a motion in court within 90 days to
have the sample independently analyzed (§18.2-268.7).
10. If the first blood sample is to be analyzed for drug content,

the officer must provide to the Division of Consolidated
Laboratory Services, attention (DUID) the following:
a. A completed request for laboratory examination.

b. Any information that would indicate the presence of
drugs and the results of any field sobriety test that
was administered.
c. A copy of the request of Independent Laboratory
analysis, if the accused has elected an independent
laboratory analysis of the second (blue) blood vial.
11. When the suspect is a juvenile and after the blood test is
completed, the officer will issue a summons for the DUI
offense(s). (As outlined in §16.1-260 of the Code of
Virginia). The officer will then release the juvenile to the
parent or guardian who will receive a subpoena from the
officer to appear in court with the juvenile.
G. If the breath test is available the officer will proceed as follows:
1. If the officer is not a certified Intoxilyzer operator he will

advise Communications of his need for one.
2. The officer will transport the suspect to Adult Intake where

the breath test will be administered.
3. All prisoners, who are being given a breath test in the

Intoxilyzer Room, will be handcuffed in the front with the use
of a waist restraining belt. This belt will be placed on the
prisoner, prior to leaving the lockup area and will remain on
the prisoner until they are returned to the booking area.
4. The suspect must be observed for a full twenty minutes by

the Intoxilyzer technician prior to administering the breath
test. This waiting period is to ensure that the subject’s
mouth is clean of “residual” alcohol.
5. The arresting officer is solely responsible for the custody of

the suspect and shall not assume that the suspect will be the
responsibility of the examiner.
NOTE: The following three paragraphs apply specifically to

juveniles:
6. If the results of the tests do not support the DUI

observations, the officer should consider the DUID
procedure, if applicable. Otherwise, a charge of driving after
illegally consuming alcohol may be appropriate (§18.2-266.1
where BAC is between .02 and .07).
7. The officer may attempt to have the juvenile’s parent or

guardian respond to Intake. If not, after the test is
completed, the officer will transport the juvenile home and
issue them a summons for the DUI offense(s), as outlined in
§16.1-260 of the Code of Virginia. The officer will release
the juvenile to a parent or guardian. The parent or guardian
will receive a subpoena from the officer to appear in court
with the juvenile.
8. In the event the parent or guardian cannot be located, or is

uncooperative, the officer will notify the Juvenile Intake
Officer and, if instructed to do so, will transport the juvenile
to the Juvenile Intake Office. The juvenile cannot be held in
the adult facility without proper referral from juvenile
authority.
H. For formal booking, transport the accused back to Adult Intake

facility to obtain warrant(s) from the Magistrate.
I. Should the defendant refuse to allow a breath sample to be taken,

transport him to Adult Intake and read the DC233 “Consequences
for Refusal” to the defendant and if the defendant continues to
refuse execute and present to the magistrate for his/her signature
and processing.
If a juvenile so charged with a violation of §18.2-266 or 29.1-738

refuses to provide a sample of breath for chemical analysis, the
provision of the foregoing sections shall be followed except that the
magistrate shall authorize execution of the warrant as a summons.
The summons shall be served on the parent or legal guardian and
the juvenile.
J. Presumptions from alcoholic content of blood:
1. If there is less than .05% of alcohol in the blood, the accused

is presumed not to be under the influence.
2. If percentage is more than 0.05%, but less than 0.08%, then

there is no presumption except with the existence of other
competent evidence.
3. If the percentage is 0.08% or more, the accused is

considered to have been driving under the influence per se.
K. Successful prosecution of cases involving drug impaired driving rely

heavily on the officer’s ability to testify concerning the operation of
the vehicle and the observed impairment of the driver, as there are
no per se levels of intoxication with drugs.
1. Reasonable cause must exist to indicate that the observed

impairment is due to the presence of drugs in the driver’s
body. Reasonable cause consists of a combination of the
following:
a. A blood alcohol content less than 0.08%, not

consistent with observed levels of impairment.
b. Driver admission to using drug(s).

c. Drugs or drug paraphernalia found in possession.
d. Chemical odors present.
e. Observation of drug induced impairment.
2. If the blood alcohol content is found to be 0.08% or higher,

analysis for the presence of drugs will not be conducted
since the driver is already considered to be Under the
Influence, per se.
3. The blood test for drug impairment is administered the same

as the standard DUI blood test. Differences in handling the
blood samples are noted under the blood test procedures.
L. Accidents involving a “suspected” drunk driver.
1. The investigating officer will attempt to determine if the

accident is alcohol / drug related, and if so, begin DUI
procedures.
2. Additional information is required if a DUI / Accident

investigation takes place:
a. The investigating officer must determine that the

defendant was the driver of the vehicle at the time of
the accident.
b. The investigating officer must determine whether or

not the defendant consumed any alcohol after the
accident occurred.
3. In addition to the steps specified previously, the police

accident report (FR-300) shall be completed and submitted.
Alcohol use will be noted on the FR-300 in the appropriate
blocks along with the completed area labeled “Offenses
Charged”. If the accused is injured, he must be
accompanied by the officer to a designated medical facility.
The officer will continue with the DUI procedure.
M. Administrative Suspension of a Driver’s License or privilege to

operate a motor vehicle.
1. Any person who has a valid Virginia Operator’s License, who

is unlicensed, whose license is otherwise suspended or
revoked, or whose license is from a jurisdiction other than
the Commonwealth of Virginia shall have his privilege to
operate a motor vehicle suspended immediately for seven
days, if:
a. A breath test was taken pursuant to §18.2-268.2 or

any similar ordinance of any county, city or town and
the results show a blood alcohol content of 0.08% or
more, or
b. The person refuses to submit to the breath test in

violation of 18.2-268.3, or any similar local ordinance.
2. If the previous conditions exist, the officer shall:
a. Personally serve a Notice of Administrative

Suspension of Driver’s License form (DC-201) and
take any driver’s license issued by the
Commonwealth which is in the possession of the
person.
NOTE: The arresting officer will NOT take

possession of an out of state driver’s license.
b. The officer shall then promptly deliver the driver’s

license, Notice of Suspension, (DC-201), and a sworn
report of arrest document on the Criminal Complaint
form (DC-311) to the Magistrate.
NOTE: Forms DC-201 and DC-311 are maintained

and furnished in the Magistrate’s office and the
Intoxilyzer Room. In regards to form DC-210, the
officer should complete the original and two copies
(Original to magistrate to accompany paperwork to
court; one copy for the officer’s DUI Evidence Form,
and one copy to be delivered to the Information
Center for transmittal of information via VCIN).
c. The officer shall then cause the administrative license

suspension information (VCIN message format 459)
and a copy of the Notice of Suspension to be sent
forthwith to DMV. This will be accomplished by
completing the lockup procedures and then delivering
a copy of the Notice of Suspension to the Information
Center. Information Center personnel shall, as soon
as possible, enter the information in proper VCIN
format and forward the DC-201 form to the Records
Section where it will be sent to DMV on the next
business day.
d. When a juvenile is arrested under the same

conditions, the procedures will be similar to those
for an adult with the following exception: The
officer will notify the parent and issue a Uniform
Traffic Summons to the juvenile and subpoena
the parent to appear in court. The underlying
charge will be forwarded to Juvenile and
Domestic Relations Court.
N. All DUI/DUID cases shall be completed on an IBR from

using the IBR codes 90D1 for Driving Under the influence of
Alcohol, and 90D2 for Driving under the Influence of Drugs.
The narrative portion shall be completed using the DUI
Format in the DUI Worksheet.
A copy of the DUI Worksheet will be attached to and turned

in to Records with the IBR form, casefile cover sheet, and
copies of all related information (e.g., police accident reports
(if applicable), sobriety checkpoint operation plans (if
applicable), criminal complaint form, all warrants obtained,
Virginia Uniform Summons, the Intoxilyzer checklist,
Certificate of Analysis, Acknowledgement/Declaration of
Refusal form, administrative license revocation suspension
form, vehicle tow sheet, and Administrative Vehicle
impoundment form. All case files will be provided to the
Commonwealth’s Attorney’s office. Officers will turn in the
completed forms as soon as possible to give prosecutor’s
sufficient time to prepare for trial.
In accordance with P&P 1137 “Audio/Visual Recordings” for

video files not stored in Evidence.com, including, but not
limited to, in-car cameras:
1. A “Data Disk” of every reported DUI will be attached

to the DUI Case File. If the Commonwealth Attorney
determines that a DVD Player compatible disk is
needed for court, they will notify the Special Projects
Supervisor of this request. At that time, Special
Projects will arrange for the downloading of the DVD
compatible disk.
2. For video files stored in Evidence.com, including Body

Worn Camera footage: The arresting officer will
ensure the link of the video or case file from
Evidence.Com is sent to the Commonwealth Attorney.
O. In processing juvenile offenses, officers need to remember

that any juvenile that has been certified as an adult during a

juvenile court procedure will be processed as an adult for
ALL subsequent offenses.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
01/17/07
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
This policy establishes guidelines for effective and efficient criminal investigations. An
investigation is the search for those facts (solvability factors) which will eventually lead
to a suspect. To conduct an investigation, the investigator collects and where
appropriate, submits evidence to be analyzed, which shows a crime has been
committed. The investigator uses facts and physical evidence obtained in an attempt
to identify the suspect(s). The investigator then arrests the suspect and presents the
case in court to obtain a conviction.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to investigate criminal conduct. An

investigation is the Division’s response to being made aware that a crime has
occurred.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. Initial responding officers generate an IBR Report. The initial report is an

essential document to a successful investigation. Therefore, the officer must
pay special attention to capturing all pertinent information.
B. These above objectives are very simple and at the same time very vital. All too
often the initial responding officer views their role only as that of being just a
report writer. The fact remains, the report is the essential vehicle by which
evidence is documented and the results of the initial on-scene and/or follow-up
investigation are recorded.
C. Generally, uniform officers conduct preliminary investigations. However,

Investigative personnel perform the preliminary investigation when it is
advantageous to initially respond and do so.
D. PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION:
1. The framework of a preliminary investigation is based on the following

acronym:
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1131 CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS Page 2 of 4
P- proceed to the crime scene promptly and safely;

R- render assistance to the injured;
E- effect an arrest of the criminal;
L- locate and identify witnesses;
I- interview witnesses and suspects;
M- maintain and protect the crime scene;
I- interrogate the suspect;
N- note condition, events, statements;
A- arrange for evidence collection;
R- report accurately and fully;
Y- yield investigative follow-up responsibilities.
E. CRITERIA FOR PERSONNEL CONDUCTING AN INVESTIGATION:
1. A follow-up investigation is the responsibility of uniform officers when:
a. An apprehension is made at the scene of an offense or within a

reasonable time and distance after the offense has occurred.
b. The uniform patrol officer accepts responsibility to complete an

investigation with the concurrence of an on-scene supervisor.
c. Certain designated offenses are considered the investigative

responsibility of Uniform Patrol, unless assistance is requested
by the Uniform Patrol Supervisor at the scene of the offense,
(i.e., overdoses, attempted suicides, shoplifting, bomb threats,
attempted burglaries, larcenies, etc.).
2. A follow-up investigation is the responsibility of Investigative Services

personnel when:
a. The nature and extent of an offense requires specialized

expertise not found in Uniform Patrol.
b. The magnitude of an offense and follow-up investigation

requirements predictably are such that a more effective on-
scene investigation should be initially undertaken by
Investigative Services personnel, (i.e., murder, rape, robbery,
sex crimes, child abuse or neglect, etc.).
F. The investigating officer who receives an open assigned case or reactivated

case reviews the case and identifies all solvability factors present. Based
upon the solvability factors present and a determination of necessary or
beneficial investigative steps, the officer:
1. Reviews and analyzes all previous reports compiled in the preliminary

phase.
2. Conducts additional interviews and interrogations, as needed.

3. Reviews Divisional records.
4. Reviews field interview contacts through the Crime Analysis function.
5. Seeks additional information (other officers, informants, etc.).
6. Reviews results of laboratory examinations.
7. Arranges for the dissemination of information as appropriate.
8. Plans, organizes and conducts necessary searches.
9. Identifies and apprehends suspects.
10. Collects physical evidence.
11. Determines the involvement of suspects in other crimes.
12. Checks suspect’s criminal history.
13. Prepares cases for court presentation to include the proper and
accurate completion of the case file.
14. Assists in the prosecution of the case, as needed.
G. CRITERIA, GENERALLY:
1. When a uniform officer or investigator conducts a follow-up

investigation, they are responsible for the entire case, from the
preliminary investigation stage to the fulfillment of the
Commonwealth’s Attorney and court’s requirements.
2. All investigative reports, regardless of their origin, are processed

through the Case Quality Control Unit following that unit’s criteria.
3. When conducting follow-up investigations:
a. Initial contact with the principals involved in the case (victims,

complainants, witnesses, etc.) is made within three (3) working
days after case assignment.
b. Second contacts with these principals is made within five (5)

working days after initial contact. This second contact in
addition to possibly providing valuable information serves to
demonstrate an interest and concern about the welfare of the
victim and other citizens associated with the case.
c. All contacts and attempts to contact are documented as part of

the case file by use of an addendum/supplemental report.
4. A standardized case file checklist is used by all officers conducting

investigations. It is the responsibility of the investigating officer’s
supervisor to ensure that the checklist is properly completed and
made a part of the case file.
5. Once a case that has been investigated by a uniform officer or

investigator has proceeded through the judicial process, the
investigating officer is responsible for making the proper annotation
on the case file cover sheet showing final court disposition. The case
will be removed from the file by Investigative Services to be forwarded
to Records.
6. It is the responsibility of the Investigative Service to ensure that all

procedural, administrative and legal changes involving the
investigation and/or preparation of cases for prosecution, which come
into their attention, are also made known to uniform services
personnel.
H. COLD CASE INVESTIGATIONS
1. Cold case refers to a criminal investigation (or “case”) that remains

unsolved and “on the books”. Typically, cold cases are violent or
other major felony crimes, such as murder or rape, which unlike
unsolved minor crimes, are generally not subject to a statute of
limitations.
2. A case is considered unsolved until a suspect has been identified,

and the case is closed in accordance with Division Policy and IBR
guidelines. A case that goes to trial and does not result in a
conviction can also be kept on the books pending new evidence.
Many times, those investigating the case have a suspect in mind but
have not been able to find evidence sufficient to charge the suspect
with the crime.
3. With advances in forensic technology, new opportunities may present

themselves for the case to be solved, therefore these unsolved cases
will remain “on the books”. As these advances occur, cases will be re-
examined to determine if new leads can be established.
4. All investigative steps taken on “cold cases” will be documented on

the appropriate supplemental report forms so they can be added to
the original case file. (i.e.; cases prior to PISTOL will be done on hard-
copy addendum forms, and PISTOL cases will be done in the PISTOL
Records Management System.)
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
08/30/11
POLICE CADETS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish the functions, duties, and responsibilities of
the Police Cadet program.
II. POLICY:
The Police Cadet program has been established as a line function and is specifically
designed to assist field operations. The Police Cadet’s function will be to relieve the
patrol officer from minor types of service calls that do not require the attention of a
sworn police officer. Cadets shall not perform duties requiring sworn police authority.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Police Cadets will be required to be in full uniform while on duty. The

uniform will be specified by the Chief of Police and will clearly distinguish
them from sworn officers.
B. Police Cadets will be assigned to police vehicles that are equipped with
emergency equipment (emergency lights and siren).
C. Police Cadets will provide only non-emergency services and will be required
to observe all traffic laws when responding to calls-for-service.
D. Police Cadets may activate emergency equipment, (emergency lights and

siren) when necessary for a funeral escort or when needed for traffic
direction.
E. The Police Cadet program will be the responsibility of the Commander of

Operations.
F. Police Cadets will receive their day to day supervision for the Operations Shift
Supervisors. They are required to follow the same Rules and Regulations and
be guided by the same Policies and Procedures as sworn officers.
G. Police Cadets shall receive training in their assigned duties through a Cadet
Field Training Program coordinated by the Training Unit.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1132 POLICE CADETS Page 2 of 2
H. Duties and Responsbilities: Police Cadets will be responsible for responding to

and investigating minor police tasks. The following tasks will be assigned to
Police Cadets.
1. Funeral escorts
2. Report writing:
a. Minor incident
b. Private property/parking lot, non-state reportable accidents.
3. Directing Traffic:
a. Accidents
b. Schools
c. Coliseum
d. Special Events
4. Transporting and setting up the speed generator as directed by a

supervisor
5. Motorist assistance
6. Lost child
7. Issue parking tickets
8. Impound found property
9. Vehicle transport for maintenance, radio installation, etc.
10. Message delivery (other than death notifications)
11. Transporting and setting up portable light towers
12. Flag detail

P&P #1132 POLICE CADETS Page 3 of 2
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
2/1/98
SCENE SUPERVISION OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to enumerate certain circumstances that require the
presence of a patrol supervisor at the scene for the purpose of assuming command.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Police Division for Patrol Supervisors to respond to the
scene of certain types of calls-for-service. Once at the scene, he/she will assume
command of all related field activities as appropriate. The supervisor’s purpose is to
ensure the efficiency of the operation.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Supervisors will respond to the following calls:
1. Felonies, such as:
a. Homicide (See also P&P 701)

b. Robberies
c. All Burglaries
d. Bomb Threats (See also P&P 520)
e. Sexual Offenses (see also P&P 706)
2. Unnatural/Suspicious Deaths
3. Industrial Accidents (See also P&P 1113)
4. Police Vehicle Accidents
5. Fatalities
6. Unruly Gatherings
7. Demonstrations or Protests
8. Labor Disputes
9. Rescue Operations
10. VIP Movements
11. Disturbances Involving Weapons
12. Assault and Batteries to Police Officers
13. Child Abuse/Neglect Cases (See also P&P 905)
14. Arson (See also P&P 511)
15. Hate Crimes
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1133 – SCENE SUPERVISION Page 2 of 2
16. Any situation which may involve a sensitive issue

17. Any complaints the patrol supervisor deems appropriate for his/her direct
command. (Refer to P&P 1134, Section III-D)
B. The supervisor will advise Communications that he/she has arrived on-scene.
P&P #1133 – SCENE SUPERVISION Page 3 of 2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
1/27/95
MULTIPLE UNIT RESPONSE OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish a classification procedure which outlines

possible situations which require response from at least two officers.
II. POLICY:
In order to reduce the chance of individual officers being injured in the line of duty
while at the same time increasing the possibility of suspect identification and
apprehension, it shall be the policy of the Police Division, that the Communications
Section will dispatch two officers to complaints that are obvious high risk assignments.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The following types of calls shall automatically require the dispatching of at least
two units:
1. Crimes in progress or where the suspect is fleeing

2. On scene arrests for felonies or violent misdemeanors
3. Large unruly gatherings
4. Unwanted Guests
5. Prowlers
6. Suicide attempts where weapons are involved
7. Complaints involving the mentally disturbed
8. Hazardous materials escorts or accidents
9. Alarm Activation’s
10. Suspicious persons or activity
11. Weapon related complaints
B. When a call-for-service comes into the Communications Section that requires

the dispatching of more than one field unit, the closest available unit to the one
being dispatched will also be assigned.
1. The primary unit can not cancel the back-up before the situation can be
properly assessed.
2. Either unit at the scene may request additional units as needed.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1134 – MULTIPLE UNIT RESPONSE Page 2 of 2
3. Headquarters will be notified as soon as possible of conditions at the

scene, i.e., unfounded, nothing found, everything under control, etc.
4. The Road Supervisor will respond to the scene without being directed.
The supervisor will acknowledge via radio that he/she is aware of the
situation and then proceed to the scene.
a. In the event there are no other units available, the road

Supervisor may designate him/herself as the second unit.
b. The road Supervisor shall make sure that all unnecessary units
are kept in service or returned to service as soon as possible.
C. The same procedure as outlined in Section B shall be followed if the call-for-

service originates with the field unit.
D. This procedure shall not preclude any officer from requesting any additional unit
or units at any time when it is deemed necessary.
P&P #1134 – MULTIPLE UNIT RESPONSE Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
11/16/2020
UNIFORM PATROL OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish the duties and responsibilities of the patrol
component.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to respond to all calls-for-service,
to provide comprehensive traffic enforcement and accident investigation functions, to
perform preliminary investigation functions of criminal acts, to follow-up investigations
of criminal acts where applicable, to be constantly on the alert for (issues that
constitute a threat to Homeland Security), crime prevention suppression opportunities
and to work closely with all other units within the organization in order to accomplish
the above goals, and to coordinate with the community to fulfill community policing
objectives.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The patrol component will be responsible for the primary response to calls-for-
service and for all traffic enforcement and accident investigation duties. It will
also be responsible for the preliminary investigation of criminal offenses, except
those offenses specified as requiring Investigative Services personnel. Patrol
officers conduct follow-up investigations on those offenses assigned to them by
Case Quality Control and will be responsible for assisting and coordinating with
the Community Relations Unit in the areas of Neighborhood Watch, Security
Surveys, conducting lectures, and reporting unsecure buildings and other
hazardous conditions. In addition, the patrol component will be responsible for
coordinating with Crime Analysis in designing methods of attacking crime and
traffic problems.
B. All officers should be constantly alert for conditions that may contribute to
(concern for Homeland Security) criminal or traffic offenses, such as unsecured
buildings, dark areas around potential crime targets, unsafe street conditions or
traffic flow problems, locations that attract offenders or activities that may
contribute to delinquent or criminal acts. All of the above conditions should
become an active part of the patrol officer’s beat profile. The officer should
pursue whatever investigative, preventive, or enforcement actions that are
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1135 – UNIFORM PATROL Page 2 of 2
appropriate. These conditions should also be forwarded to the appropriate

bureaus or units for additional
Investigative enforcement, and/or preventive efforts. The patrol officer should

seek out opportunities to assist or advise citizens in methods of improving the
security of their persons, homes, businesses, and neighborhood.
C. Patrol Supervisors from each Unit/Sector shall send via e-mail a Recap
detailing significant events at the conclusion of their shift. This recap will be
disseminated to the “Police Sworn” distribution list for the purposes of
advocating communication and sharing of information between all units.
Investigative Services and Crime Analysis shall disseminate information on
wanted persons, persons of interest, crimes series/trends stemming from
events occurring within the City of Hampton as well as to include regional
occurrences.
D. Patrol officers will work closely with the community to achieve community
policing goals. Patrol officers will attend meetings when necessary, and report
results as required.
P&P #1135 – UNIFORM PATROL Page 3 of 2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
05/30/01
FIELD CONTACT CARD AND
ARREST SHEET
OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the use of the Field Contact
Card and Arrest Sheet as part of the Incident Based Reporting System. The use of
these sheets can serve several purposes. Among these are a deterrent effect to
criminal activity, an active indication of police concern and interest in law and order, a
source of information and intelligence, and a means to capture individual data on
persons interviewed and arrested.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to utilize the Field Contact Cards and
Arrest Sheets as enforcement and investigative tools to be used in gathering
information and identifying suspects.
III. PROCEDURE:
Crime Analysis is responsible for collecting, analyzing, and disseminating data

pertaining to the perpetrators and incidents of crime. Collecting information is
accomplished through the use of Field Contact Cards and Arrest Sheets. These
sources produce an abundance of information, when used in the following situations:
A. Field Contact Card
1. In order to balance the need for conducting field interviews with the
potentially negative impact on police community relations, the field
interview should always be conducted in a professional manner. To this
end, these principles should be followed when conducting the field
interview.
a. The police officer will conduct a field interview when he has

reason to believe that a person is about to or has committed a
crime, or when a crime has occurred and the person may have
information of value to the investigation.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1136 – FIELD CONTACT CARD AND ARREST SHEET Page 2 of 5
b. The field interview should be based on the actions of the person,

their presence near the scene of a crime, or any other suspicious
factors that should support the officer's inquiry. This must be
accomplished without regard to the person’s race, creed, sex,
religion, political persuasion, social status, or profiling based on
any of these attributes.
c. Persons being interviewed should be detained for a limited time.

The reason for the field contact should be:
(1) To obtain the person's identification

(2) To verify the identification
(3) To request cooperation in the investigation of a crime
(4) To verify any account of their presence at the location
stopped and other information they provide
d. The person should be addressed politely and informed of the

reason they are being stopped.
e. When conducting field interviews officers will complete and

submit the original field contact card to the Records Unit at the
end of their tour of duty, in order to record the circumstances and
persons stopped.
2. Many times officers utilizing the field contact card have prevented or deterred a
serious crime from occurring and the effectiveness of this tool should not be
overlooked.
B. Arrest
1. Police officers will complete an arrest sheet for all arrests. All arrest sheets will
be left at Adult Intake.
2. With this information, Crime Analysis can provide information for an officer
seeking assistance in locating and identifying suspects who committed a
specific offense. Also an officer can obtain additional information by checking
for a similar offense. This can be very beneficial in an investigation such as
rape, where the officer could review other arrests for sexual assault or sodomy.
C. Suspect
1. When an officer is involved in the follow-up investigation of a criminal offense

and a suspect is identified, every effort should be made to obtain probable
cause and charge the perpetrator. However, if the officer's investigation fails to
eliminate the suspect and the case is to be inactivated or closed exceptionally,
the officer will provide Records with a “Modify” suspect supplement which must
include the suspect’s name, DOB, race, sex and relevant case number.
a. Citing the tracking / IBR number on the field contact card /

arrest sheet enables the Division to retrieve a case by the
suspect's name, as well as, victim's name and case number.
1) This allows the Division the opportunity to access other

cases when a person is named as a suspect or arrested in
another investigation.
b. With access to additional information, the officer's ability to

solve crimes is further enhanced and affords a better
opportunity to achieve multiple clearances.
D. Truant
1. Studies show that juveniles commit a large percentage of daytime

burglaries.
2. For this reason, officers will make a concentrated effort to locate and
identify any juveniles who do not have an excused absence from school.
Any such student should be transported to their school and a field
contact card completed, documenting the actions of the officer.
3. Officers may come in contact with juveniles who have an excused

absence for disciplinary reasons, and the pertinent information
concerning these individuals will also be provided on a field contact card.
4. There are going to be situations when a juvenile has a legitimate

explanation for being absent from school and the officer should
determine the appropriate action on an individual basis.
E. Alias
1. The word alias simply refers to what a person is "also known as" or
"aka." It can be very similar to their given name or completely different.
The number of aliases a person has is limited only to the number of
people who know that particular individual.
2. When an officer learns of an alias, the information will be recorded on

either a field contact card or an arrest sheet as appropriate
making sure to include the person's given name and any additional
information available.
3. This practice will allow the entire Division to have access to the
information, which could be an invaluable asset in attempting to
identify or locate a suspect or witness.
F. Parole
1. A person who is on parole has been released from the state penitentiary
based upon certain conditions. If any of those conditions are violated,

that person's parole could be revoked, and the person would be sent
back to the state penitentiary.
2. Various situations will occur which a parole officer should be made

aware of and can be accomplished through the use of the field contact
card.
3. An officer should fill out the card, listing the person's name that is on
parole and indicating in the narrative their reasons for concern. Once
Crime Analysis receives the information, the local office of Virginia's
Probation and Parole will be notified and informed of the officer's
observations.
G. Processing of Field Contact Cards and Arrest Sheets
1. In an effort to save time and simplify processing of the field contact card
or arrest sheet, each officer should indicate on the appropriate form
whether they checked warrants or NCIC and the results.
2. Once this is completed, the information is reviewed and entered into the
computer database. Original field contact cards and arrest sheets are
maintained in accordance with the Library of Virginia Retention
Schedule.
3. Officers contacting Crime Analysis for assistance can select a variety of

different fields or topics to be searched such as:
a. Name
b. Alias
c. Description
d. Location
e. Charge
f. Vehicle
g. Weapon
4. On a weekly basis, Crime Analysis will compile an alphabetized listing of

field contacts / arrests. Copies will be disseminated to Investigative
Services, Division Field Offices (to be posted in the Roll Call Room),
Probation and Parole, and Intake. The list can be very helpful to the
officer:
a. Who has been off-duty for a period of time

b. In pointing out problem areas
c. In identifying suspicious individuals
d. By alerting them to specific problems in adjoining districts
5. Automated files will be electronically archived.
At any time, whether an initial contact or during the course of completing a field contact
card or an arrest sheet, an officer has reason to believe that their safety or the safety
of others is in question, they should follow the guidelines set forth in Division policy and
procedure.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
12/06/2021
AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDINGS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines regarding the use of audio/video
recording systems by members of the Hampton Police Division and to establish a
policy regarding the storage, release, and retention of audio/video recording files
maintained in Division approved storage devices to ensure the following results:
A. Support police accountability and transparency
B. Increase citizen and officer safety
C. Provide additional method of objectively collecting evidence
D. Promote highway safety within the city by utilizing court accepted video
technology.
E. Produce more effective materials for the training of officers
NOTE: For the purposes of this policy the term “officers” shall refer to Sworn
Officers, Animal Control Officers and Police Cadets utilizing Body Worn Camera
Systems.
II. POLICY:
A. It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to use audio/video recorders to
ensure an accurate and unbiased documentation of the interaction between
officers and citizens in law enforcement related interactions. When activating
audio/video equipment, officers shall consider the needs of public safety as
well as the privacy and constitutional rights of individual citizens.
B. The Division recognizes that video images cannot always show the full story,
nor do video images capture an entire scene. The use of audio/video
equipment does not reduce the requirement to provide thorough written
documentation of an incident.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1137 – AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDINGS Page 2 of 14
C. Audio/Video Recording violations: The Unit Commander will have final

authority in the recommendation of corrective action for officers’ found to be in
violation of this policy. Unit Commanders shall utilize the City of Hampton’s
progressive disciplinary philosophy.
Provided extenuating circumstances do not exist, the minimum disciplinary

measures shall be followed for violations occurring in any twelve (12) month
period:
1. First offense: Notation on Supervisor’s Record of Employee
2. Second offense: Letter of Reprimand
3. Third offense: One Working Day Suspension Without Pay
4. Fourth offense: Two Working Days Suspension Without Pay up to

Dismissal
The above is based on an otherwise good performance record. If the officer

involved has other disciplinary problems, more severe disciplinary action may
be imposed. Minimum penalties for violations may be established on an
equitable basis however, maximum penalties for violations may vary.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Body Worn Camera (BWC): a video recording device worn on the body to
record and collect evidence and law enforcement interactions.
B. Evidence Transfer Manager (ETM): the docking, charging, and upload station
for the AXON Tactical Computer and Body Worn Camera system.
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. GENERAL:
1. All video recording will be completed with the safety of both the officers
and citizens as a primary consideration.
2. Audio and Video Recordings will be utilized during all law
enforcement specific contacts or events to include all investigative
and enforcement functions. Other examples include, but are not
limited to; pedestrian and vehicle stops, consensual encounters, calls
for service such as responses to burglaries, domestic disputes, and
robberies, SWAT operations, and all citizen transports.)
a. Law enforcement specific contacts must be recorded in their
entirety. Officers are not permitted to deactivate their BWC

recording during such contacts unless circumstances arise as
outlined in section b., Body Worn Cameras.
3. All audio/video recordings are only for official law enforcement
purposes and shall be considered property of the Hampton Police
Division. Accessing, copying, sharing, distributing, or uploading to
personal computers or other media storage devices is strictly
prohibited.
4. If an officer fails to activate the audio/video recorder, or fails to record
the entire contact, the officer shall document the reasons for doing so
in a Special Report which will be submitted to their immediate
supervisor.
5. Officers assigned audio/video recording equipment will utilize this
equipment while working extra-duty, in accordance to the outlined
procedures for use.
6. Civilians will NOT be allowed to review the recording at the scene.
7. Nothing in this policy shall prohibit an officer from activating their

audio/video recording equipment whenever they deem the use of the
camera appropriate.
8. Any audio or video recorder found not to be functioning properly will

immediately be reported to the officer’s supervisor. A Body Worn
Camera discrepancy form detailing the problem with the device will be
completed and forwarded to the Support Services Branch Special
Project Office.
BWC equipment will be taken immediately, if possible, or no later than
the beginning of the next working day to the Office of Special Projects,
accompanied by a copy of the Body Worn Camera discrepancy form
detailing the problem.
9. AM/FM Radios will be turned off immediately when any audio or video
equipment is activated. Officers are reminded that audio equipment
records virtually all sounds within range, including conversation.
10. Both audio and video recordings shall continue uninterrupted
until the completion of the entire incident. The body worn camera
system records a “pre-event” of thirty seconds prior to activation of the
camera or a triggered event. The system triggers recording upon the
activation of emergency equipment, Taser CEW activation, or upon
manual activation. The BWC of any officer within 30 feet of the
triggered event will also activate. When safe to do so, officers shall
ensure that their BWC’s are recording, and not rely on the triggered
activation.
Video of the DUI suspects driving prior to a traffic stop is desirable
when possible.
When processing a DUI, and the officer is not assigned to a body worn
camera, a video unit (if available) shall be called to respond to the
location of the traffic stop for the purpose of filming. The arresting
officer will administer the field sobriety tests to the suspect.
11. When an arrest is made, the arresting officer shall make note of the
date, time, location, defendant’s name and IBR/tracking number of the
incident for court purposes.
12. Video camera operators will review all returned DVD’s after the courts
have cleared them. If the officer believes the taped incident serves as
a valuable training tool, the officer will advise the Training Unit of the
IBR/Tracking Number assigned to the video. The Training Unit will be
responsible for submitting a request to the Special Projects Supervisor
to obtain a copy for training purposes.
13. Prohibited Uses of Audio/Video Recording Equipment:

a. Equipment will not be used to record personal activities.
b. Recording in any courtroom or at a magistrate’s office is
PROHIBITED.
c. In general, officers should not activate the body worn camera
device or should use caution when entering a public locker
room, changing room, restroom, doctor’s office, or other
place(s) where an individual – unrelated to the investigation –
would have a reasonable expectation of privacy.
1) Use of the body worn camera device in a hospital setting
shall be limited to investigative use only.
2) Officers will not record a patient’s medical interaction
and procedures with hospital/medical personnel unless it
directly relates to the investigation and hospital/medical
staff is made aware prior to the recording taking place.
3) Officers will remain cognizant of HIPAA laws and
guidelines.
d. Officers will not intentionally record confidential informants or
undercover officers unless the recording is conducted
specifically for the purpose of documenting a sting, drug

purchase/sale, or other undercover operation in furtherance of a
criminal investigation. Whenever possible and useful, an officer
may position the equipment in a manner to capture the audio
recording of an event but not record video of the informant or
undercover officer.
e. Officers will not make covert recordings of conversations with
other Division members or City Employees, except when
necessary in the course of a criminal investigation and/or for
division administrative investigations as approved by the Chief
of Police or designee.
f. Officers will not record tactical planning discussions.
B. BODY WORN CAMERAS:
1. The AXON Body 3 BWC system has been designed to be worn on the
upper chest on an officer’s person. The following are approved
method of mounting:
a. Wing Clip Camera Mount
b. Belt Clip Rapidlock
NOTE: The BWC will be attached on upper chest area of the officers
outer vest cover or uniform shirt. The Axon 3 shall be unobstructed by
such thing as uniform jackets, equipment, etc.
2. Body Worn Camera recording equipment should only be utilized by
officers who have received the Division’s training in its use.
3. Procedures to be followed when utilizing Body Worn Cameras:
a. The assigned body worn camera will be worn at all times by the
officer on duty.
b. At the beginning of each shift, the officer shall determine
whether their recording equipment is working satisfactorily.
c. Officers upon dispatch, whether over the air or silent, during
any self-initiated activity will activate their body worn camera
when feasible to do so. This includes all officers at the scene of
an incident (one camera may capture images/evidence that
other cameras miss).
d. Once the body worn camera is activated, officers will record the
entire encounter without interruption (continuous recording) or
until they have left the scene.
e. If an officer discontinues recording an encounter for any reason

and then finds it is necessary to take law enforcement action,
the officer shall reactivate the camera provided it is safe and
practical to do so.
f. In a critical incident, such as officer-involved shooting, in-

custody injury or death, or use-of-force against a citizen causing
serious bodily injury or death, body worn cameras will remain
turned on and in the possession of the involved officer until the
appropriate Professional Standards or Investigative supervising
personnel arrives on scene. In cases where the situation
dictates the on scene supervisor may immediately review the
recording to establish the level of danger that may still exist, aid
the initial operational response to locate suspects, and focus on
the initial stage of the investigation based on the need for
officer and citizen safety. The BWC video will be handled in a
manner consistent with other evidence. A supervisor not
involved in the actual critical incident will take physical custody
of any BWC’s that may have captured the incident and upload
them into Evidence.com by placing the camera device into
Evidence Transfer Manager (ETM).
g. When reasonable, practicable, and safe to do so, officers are

strongly encouraged to inform citizens they are being recorded
in an effort to de-escalate potential conflicts.
h. Officers have the discretion to turn off their BWC during
conversations with crime witnesses and members of the
community who wish to confidentially report or discuss criminal
activity in their neighborhood.
i. Officers have the discretion to turn off their BWC during
conversations with supervisors when discussing crime charging
issues or other general conversations. The officer must
activate their BWC after those conversations when re-engaging.
Officers shall make a verbal notation on the recording anytime
he or she plans to intentionally stop a recording prior to the
completion of an event or incident. The verbal notation must
include the reason why the officer is stopping the recording.
j. Officers may use their BWC to document evidence of a crime or
a crime scene. This does not replace the need for the Forensic
Unit’s response. The officer must indicate in the video recording
what the related case number is for the incident in
Evidence.com.
k. Officers recording an event will annotate the availability of BWC

recordings on applicable official police reports (IBR, Motor
Vehicle Crash, DWC, etc.) related to the incident.
l. All BWC recordings are required to be downloaded via Division
ETM upon conclusion of the officers’ tour of duty (including
extra duty assignments.)
C. SWAT USE AND ACTIVATION:
1. The Hampton Police Division SWAT team members will utilize both the
AXON Flex BWC and AXON Body 3 BWC system. The BWC will be
worn on the helmet or on a halo mount depending on the mission and
uniform load out for that particular mission. The following are
approved method of mounting for both the AXON Flex BWC and the
AXON Body 3 BWC system for SWAT:
a. Wing Clip Camera Mount
b. Belt Clip Rapidlock
c. Oakley Flak Jacket Sunglasses
d. Low Rider Headband
e. Ball Cap Mount
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
D. LIVESTREAM AXON AWARE+ CAPABILITIES:

1. An officer’s BWC may Livestream a recording via Evidence.com in
order to be viewed by supervisory and RTIC personnel in real-time.
Only authorized supervisory and RTIC personnel shall utilize the
Livestream feature. The BWC administrator shall assign Livestream

permissions to supervisory and RTIC personnel.
2. Supervisors and RTIC personnel may Livestream BWC footage in
order to assist a member, to deploy additional resources, or to check
for compliance. Instances where supervisory and RTIC personnel may
Livestream a BWC include, but are not limited to:
a. An ongoing critical incident (officer-involved shooting, firearms
discharge, officer needs assistance, SWAT operations, or
vehicle pursuit),
b. Active shooter situations where command requires multiple
viewpoints to coordinate a safe response,
c. A hostage/barricade situation,
d. At a member’s request.
NOTE: While the Livestream feature is a tool for supervisors to assist
officers, its use shall not preclude the responsibilities of supervisors to
respond to any incident and/or notify additional resources as required
by Policy 1133.
3. The details of all access to the Livestream feature are automatically
recorded in the Audit Log of any corresponding BWC recording(s).
4. Supervisors shall not Livestream the BWC of another member for

purposes not related to operational necessity.
E. GPS FUNCTIONALITY:
1. The AXON Body 3 BWC system includes GPS functionality, which is
only available upon BWC activation.
2. An officer’s location will be visible on a map and available for
authorized users when the BWC is activated.
3. Supervisors and RTIC personnel may review the GPS data in real-time
from an officer’s BWC.
F. CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS INTERVIEW ROOMS:
1. Unless otherwise approved by the Chief of Police or designee, all
interviews related to a criminal investigation, conducted in Investigative
Services interview rooms, are to be recorded. This includes but is not
limited to:
a. Victims
b. Suspects
c. Witnesses
2. Each of the four (4) interview rooms in investigations and the two (2)
soft rooms on the 5th level are equipped with cameras and
microphones. Additionally, the main lobby to Investigative Services is
also recorded.
3. When activated by the employees Division key fob, the interview will
be recorded to a standalone storage system, located on the 5th level in
a secure server room.
4. Each interview room camera is started and stopped by swiping the fob
reader twice in quick succession. When recording, the light on the key
fob reader will change from green to red. When the subject is no
longer in the room, ensure the system is turned off by using your
division issued fob by swiping the fob reader twice in quick succession.
5. When outside agencies (FBI, ATF, etc.) utilize one of the Division’s
interview rooms, an audio/video recording will be made only upon their
request.
6. No attorney-client conferences or discussions shall be recorded.
G. ACCESSING AND PROCESSING VIDEOS FOR COURT/INVESTIGATIVE
PURPOSES:
1. Body Worn Cameras:
a. Video storage will be managed and controlled by utilizing
“Evidence.com”.
1) The BWC & Controller will be placed in the ETM at the
end of the officer’s shift for charging and uploading to
Evidence.com unless there are approved, articulable
circumstances preventing it.
2) Officers will properly categorize BWC videos according
to event type to ensure proper retention periods can be
applied.
b. Officers have access to “Edit” BWC videos on Evidence.com
but the original version can never be manipulated. The edited
version is stored as a copy/new clip within the console.
Requests for deletion of portions of a recording from an
audio/video file (e.g. in the event of a privileged or personal
recording) must be submitted in writing to the Chief of Police.
c. The arresting officer will ensure that all criminal offenses

resulting in arrest and captured utilizing a body worn camera
are sent to the appropriate prosecuting attorney via
Evidence.com link.
2. Interview Room Recordings:
a. Only trained officers shall be allowed to access the recording
system and burn the interview to a DVD or CD.
b. Investigators and Investigative supervisors will have access to

the Security Desk Client to make copies of recorded interviews.
This software will be installed on investigative laptops as well
as supervisor desktops and will be password protected with
unique passwords by each user.
c. Each burned interview should contain the minimum information,
written clearly on the DVD/CD with a permanent marker:
1) Officer’s name
2) Victim/Witness/Suspect’s name
3) Case number or tracking number
4) Date of Interview
d. Once the interview is burned to a DVD/CD, a notation of its
existence should be made in the case file. Copies will be made
at that time for the case file and Commonwealth Attorney as
needed.
e. The burned DVD/CD will be tagged into Property and Evidence
under currently established Policies and Procedures.
3. Supervisors will have access to all videos and the authority to review
and copy videos as needed.
4. Recordings will remain on the server for approximately 30 days. If a
copy of a recording is needed, the officer or supervisor can access the
system and make additional copies. In the event the recording has
been overwritten, the officer, will sign out the DVD from P&E in the
same manner as current evidence procedures. After the final court
disposition is complete, the arresting officer will return the DVD to
Property and Evidence, notifying them that the court process is
completed.
H. LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS:
1. The Commonwealth Attorney reviews all drunk driving arrest forms.

1. For video files not stored in Evidence.com, including, but not
limited to, and investigation room video files:
a. A “Data Disk” of every recorded DUI will be attached to
the DUI Case File
2. For video files stored in Evidence.com, including Body Worn
Camera footage:
a. The arresting officer will ensure the link of the video or
case file from Evidence.com is sent to the
Commonwealth Attorney.
2. The City Attorney reviews all misdemeanor marijuana prosecutions.
However, the Commonwealth Attorney and the U.S. Attorney may
handle related cases, as well as other criminal and traffic related
offenses.
a. For video files not stored in Evidence.com, including, but not
limited to, and investigation room video files:
1) A “Data Disk” of every recorded interaction involving a
charge of possession of marijuana or possession of
marijuana with intent to distribute will be included with
the case file sent to the appropriate prosecuting
attorney.
b. For video files stored in Evidence.com, including Body Worn
Camera footage:
1) The arresting officer will ensure the link of the video or
case file from Evidence.com is sent to the appropriate
prosecuting attorney.
3. A pre-trial viewing of the recorded video evidence will be made
available to defense attorneys. The defense attorney(s) must make an
appointment through the appropriate prosecuting attorneys’ office who
will arrange for the defense attorneys to view their copy of the
recording.
4. The videotaped evidence discussed in this policy is in addition to
existing legal procedures and will not replace the need for any of those
procedures.
5. Recordings shall be used for evidentiary documentation or training
purposes only, except as permitted by prior written approval by the
Chief of Police or designee. Only those employees acting under their
official duties will be permitted access to recordings and/or images.

6. Any on-scene images and/or any other images taken by employees in
the course and scope of their duties are the sole property of the
Division.
I. DATA ACCESS AND REVIEW:
1. Officers will be permitted to review video footage of an incident in
which they were involved prior to making a statement about the
incident.
2. The Office of Professional Standards (OPS) shall have access for
internal investigations and internal audit responsibilities. The OPS
shall conduct random audit reviews of audio/video footage each
quarter to monitor compliance with program and departmental
procedures. This audit will review a random selection of one day’s
worth of footage for nine (9) separate body cameras.
3. Supervisors of officers utilizing video/audio recording equipment shall
receive training on the use of the camera equipment and procedures
for reviewing video/audio recordings in the evidence.com program.
These Supervisors will conduct random monthly audits of two
subordinates from their respective work groups and review recorded
law enforcement specific contacts or events to ensure compliance with
this program, equipment is operating properly, identify any areas in
which additional training or guidance may be required, and any
disciplinary action that may need to be addressed. Supervisors may
also conduct regular audits of subordinates who are placed on early
warning, a performance improvement plan, or a letter of expectation.
4. Supervisors conducting the “Unit Supervisor BWC Audit Report” shall
not select videos for the audit that have previously been entered into
BlueTeam as they do not meet the intent of a random audit. These
incidents include: Vehicle pursuits, Use of force incidents, Firearm
discharges and Citizen Complaints.
a. The Unit Supervisor BWC Audit Report form shall be utilized
and capture the following:
1) The officer’s name that has been randomly selected.
2) The officers’ district and cad number.
3) The officer’s race and gender.
4) The date of the video being reviewed.
5) The ID and Category of the video being reviewed.
6) The BWC video link to the video that was reviewed.
7) The length and description of the video that was
reviewed.
8) The selected video(s) must be reviewed in their entirety

and all videos pertaining to that incident recorded by the
selected officer must be reviewed.
5. If a violation of Federal, State or Local law is noted during the audit,

the supervisor may review BWC video, but they shall immediately
notify the Office of Professional Standards to restrict access to any
involved video(s) and report the violation to the Office of Professional
Standards via BlueTeam.
6. Violations of Hampton Police Division Rules and Regulations and

Policy and Procedures noted during the audit which could rise to
disciplinary action will be reported to the Office of Professional
Standards via BlueTeam.
7. Records of these audits shall be included on the Shift Monthly Report.
Copies of the Unit Supervisor BWC Audit Report will be forwarded to
and maintained by Professional Standards.
8. Protocols shall be followed for releasing recorded data externally to the
public and/or news media. FOIA guidelines will be followed; however,
the Chief of Police retains the authority to release recorded data at his
discretion.
J. AUDIO/VIDEO RETENTION:
All audio/video recordings will be maintained in accordance with the Library of
Virginia Records Retention Schedule.
K. CARE AND MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITIES:
1. The Support Services Branch will have administrative responsibilities
for the Body Worn Camera and Mobile In-Car Camera Programs and
will handle all issuing, tracking, maintenance, and video storage
responsibilities.
2. The Investigative Services Branch will have administrative
responsibilities for the Interview Room Program and will handle all
issuing, tracking, maintenance, and video storage responsibilities.
3. Officers are responsible for the proper care of audio/video equipment
assigned to them and will immediately report any loss of, or damage
to, any part of the body worn camera equipment to their immediate
supervisor.
L. TRAINING:
1. Officers utilizing audio/video equipment must receive all mandated
training. This training should include:

a. All practices and protocols covered by HPD Policy & Procedure.
b. An overview of State and Federal law governing consent,
evidence, privacy, and public disclosure.
c. Manufacturers’ procedures for operating the equipment safely
and effectively.
d. Scenario-based exercises that replicate situations that officers
might encounter in the field.
e. Procedures for downloading and categorizing recorded data.
f. Procedures for accessing and reviewing recorded data.
g. Procedures for preparing and presenting digital evidence for
court.
h. Procedures for documenting and reporting any malfunctioning
device or supporting system.
2. This training shall be made readily available to students in hard copy

and digital form. Refresher training on equipment usage and protocols
will be provided to all users as necessary.
Redaction Log


Redaction Log

Pages

TACTICAL PLANS jeopardize the safety or security of
Code §2.2-3706(B)(5).
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
07/06/04
PARKING ENFORCEMENT OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to take enforcement actions against parking violations
that cause hazard and inconvenience to citizens in the City of Hampton.
II. POLICY:
A. Patrol Officers, Police Cadets or other authorized representatives of the police

division will monitor parking situations throughout the city and take
appropriate actions to minimize complaints and other problems associated
with improper or illegal parking.
B. Parking tickets are controlled items and the Central Records Unit will be
responsible for the maintenance and administration of parking tickets.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. ENFORCEMENT:
1. Patrol Officers, Police Cadets and other authorized representatives of

the police division shall be responsible for parking law enforcement
including, but not limited to:
a. Limited time zones

b. Handicapped parking zones
c. Fire hydrants
d. Loading zones
e. Residential parking zones
f. Bus stops
g. Tow zones
h. NO parking zones
i. Expired city decals
2. Use of wheel-lock devices are prohibited, unless authorized by the

Chief of Police.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1138 – PARKING ENFORCEMENT Page 2 of 4
3. Patrol Officers, Police Cadets and other authorized representatives of

the police division shall attend court, when necessary, for the final
Adjudication of any parking ticket they have issued.
4. Parking enforcement responsibilities shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Strict parking enforcement during peak traffic hours on primary

thoroughfares.
b. Enforcement of Tow away zones.
c. Time control zones (i.e., 2-hour parking zones)
d. General surveillance
e. Vehicle or foot patrol
B. PARKING TICKETS:
1. The established procedures for administering parking tickets will be as

follows:
a. It shall be the responsibility of the Central Records Unit to

maintain any and all records pertaining to the issuance of
parking tickets.
b. Any police officer requesting parking tickets will receive such

tickets from the Central Records Unit.
c. It will be required of the requesting officer to sign a Parking

Ticket Log Sheet.
d. Parking tickets will be issued to Police Officers in books of

twenty-five (25). A Police Officer will not be issued more than
two (2) parking ticket books at any one time.
e. The Central Records Unit will maintain no less than five-

hundred (500) parking tickets (20 books) on hand at any given
time. The Central Records Unit will order, through
Procurement, an adequate number of parking tickets as
needed, when there are less than 500 tickets on hand. The
number required will be determined by the Central Records
Unit.
f. Parking tickets will be pre-numbered in consecutive order. It

will be the responsibility of the Central Records Unit
Commander or his designee to notify any Police Officer who

has not issued the parking tickets assigned to him in
consecutive order.
2. Issuing Parking Tickets:
a. Parking ticket books will be issued by the Central Records Unit

Commander or his designee.
b. If an officer gives his tickets to another officer, the Central

Records Unit must be notified by Special Report that these
tickets were given to another officer. The receiving officers
name and CAD number must be provided so that the Records
Unit’s records may be updated.
c. A log sheet will be filled out at the time the parking tickets are
issued.
d. This will be a permanent record of those parking tickets which

have been issued and tickets assigned to a Police Officer, but
not issued.
e. The following information will be recorded on a log sheet:
1. Ticket numbers – beginning and ending

2. Date the ticket book was issued
3. Officer’s name and CAD number
4. Officer’s signature
f. The office copy of the parking ticket will be turned in to the

Information Counter (or appropriate Field Office) at the
completion of his/her shift. The ticket will be placed in the
Records Unit basket for forwarding.
g. Once the parking ticket has been processed by the Central

Records Unit, it will be forwarded to the Hampton City
Treasurers Office for collection.
h. Police Officers will not issue traffic summonses for charges

which can be placed upon a parking ticket. This will include
charges of No City Tag.
3. Notifying Officers:
a. Each Police Officer who has a parking ticket summons issued

will be notified of the court date by the City Treasurers Office
via the appropriate service branch commanders office.
b. The notice will be placed in the Officer’s box.
c. If the court date is changed after the assigned court date has
passed, the Traffic Court clerk’s office will notify the officer.
d. The officer will be responsible for picking up the parking ticket

on the assigned court date.
e. Upon disposition by the Traffic Court, the ticket will be filed in

Central Records for a period of two years and then destroyed.
4. Voiding/Excusing of Parking Tickets:
a. Once a parking ticket has been issued, it cannot be made

void/excused.
b. If the parking ticket has not been issued, a request to

void/excuse a parking ticket will be submitted to the Central
Records Unit Commander by Special Report with the parking
ticket attached thereto. The reason for the request will be
clearly stated on the Special Report.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
09/18/07
ALCOHOL / DRUG IMPAIRED DRIVER
ENFORCEMENT PROGRAM OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P #1139, dated 02/23/07
I. PURPOSE:
To establish a program to reduce alcohol/drug related Driving Under the Influence

(DUI) and Boating Under the Influence (BUI) offenses.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division is committed to the goal of removing drunk and drug
impaired drivers from the highway and waterways, thereby reducing the incidence of
deaths, injuries, property damage and alcohol/drug related DUI/BUI offenses. For the
purposes of this policy, the term “driver” shall refer to drivers of vehicles on the
roadway and operators of vessels on the waterway.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The Hampton Police Division Alcohol / Drug Impaired Driver Enforcement

Program is a multi-dimensional activity embracing many levels of participation
including:
1. Officers
2. Supervisors
3. Police Administration
4. Other Agencies
5. The Public
B. Role of Police Officers
1. Officers are responsible for the detection, apprehension, initial

processing and arrest of alcohol or drug impaired drivers.
2. Officers must recognize alcohol/drug related enforcement as a high

priority item not to be equated with other traffic offenses.
4. Apprehension and initial processing shall be accomplished as outlined

on the Hampton Police Division Evidence Form (420-4).
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1139 - ALCOHOL / DRUG IMPAIRED…ENFORCEMENT PROGRAM Page 2 of 3
5. Participate in alcohol/drugged driving prevention programs such as

Operation Prom and lectures on the effects of driving while impaired.
B. Role of Supervisor
1. Supervisors should actively emphasize and encourage alcohol/drug

related enforcement. Supervisor’s expectations will mold the officer’s
perception of the importance of alcohol/drug related enforcement
activities.
2. Supervisors through patrol and accident investigation experience shall

identify high incidence times and locations to determine the most
appropriate enforcement response.
3. Supervisors should establish and evaluate individual enforcement goals

for subordinates, as well as, monitor enforcement activities thus
influencing officer productivity.
C. Role of the Police Administration
1. The Division recognizes the magnitude of the problem of the

alcohol/drug impaired driver and combats the problem by:
a. Supporting strict enforcement by Division Personnel of

alcohol/drug related traffic offenses.
b. Allocating resources and training.
c. Providing alcohol related accident statistics to operational

personnel for directed patrol or selective assignments.
d. Qualifying as many officers as possible as breathalyzer operators.
D. Inter Agency Coordination
1. In order for a comprehensive alcohol countermeasures program to be

successful it must involve the police, prosecutors, courts, driver’s
licensing authority and rehabilitation-treatment agencies.
2. The Division continuously works to enhance the police role in the

program by maintaining a close working relationship with the
Commonwealth’s Attorney’s Office.
3. As in all cases, officers of the Division are expected to prepare and

present their cases to the appropriate court in the most professional and
effective manner.
4. The Division actively supports the Peninsula Branch of the Virginia

Alcohol Safety Action Program (ASAP) through its participation in
projects and programs.
P&P #1139 - ALCOHOL / DRUG IMPAIRED…ENFORCEMENT PROGRAM Page 3 of 3
E. The Public
Positive public reaction to an alcohol countermeasures program is beneficial

and desirable. Public support can be directly related to community awareness,
therefore, the Division endeavors to inform the citizens of Hampton of the
alcohol/drug impaired driver problem and our efforts to deal with this problem.
This is accomplished by releasing information to the media concerning
alcohol/drug related traffic offenses in accordance with existing policy and
procedures, particularly during holidays when DUI/BUI rates typically rise.
P&P #1139 - ALCOHOL / DRUG IMPAIRED…ENFORCEMENT PROGRAM Page 4 of
3
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
03/24/2021
TRAFFIC LAW ENFORCEMENT OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for traffic law enforcement.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to enforce traffic laws in order to prevent
conditions which lead to traffic crashes. Patrol officers shall conduct prevention-
oriented traffic enforcement based on data supplied from the Crime Analysis Unit,
citizen request, beat profiles and patrol observations.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Patrol Officers shall:
1. Report to their assigned areas, as specified by their supervisors, during

peak hours of violations, maintaining high observation and high visibility.
2. Maintain a visible patrol, whether area, line or directed, especially during

heavy moving traffic conditions.
3. While stationary, utilize his vehicle as an overt or covert observation

post.
4. Utilize all legal techniques and equipment necessary to deal with

unlawful driving behavior.
a. Unmarked cars may be utilized for selective enforcement

assignments.
b. Use of unmarked cars shall be approved by the Operations

Branch Commander.
c. All unmarked cars used for traffic law enforcement shall be

equipped with seat belts, emergency lights and siren as provided
in State Code.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
d. Officers assigned to unmarked units are to exercise extreme care

because of the reduced visibility of these vehicles and the higher
risks associated with their operation.
B. Use of highway safety checkpoints:
1. All safety checkpoint sites must be previously approved by the

Operations Branch Commander or his designee. This requires the
submission of a written plan.
2. A supervisor will be in charge of the checkpoint. At least four other

officers will be assigned for a minimum of five persons working.
3. Signs alerting motorists of the checkpoint will be set in a manner

conspicuous to approaching drivers.
4. Traffic cones and/or barricades will be used to minimize danger to the

officers operating the checkpoint by creating a safety zone. Officers will
wear their reflectorized vests and hats while working the checkpoint.
5. Motorists contact should be within the guidelines set forth in Policy and
Procedure #1114, Section II, “Contact with The Violator”.
6. When the checkpoint is closed, it is the responsibility of the officer in

charge to:
a. Collect and return to storage signs, cones, and barricades.
b. Ensure that a written summary of the checkpoints activity is

prepared for the Watch Commander by the end of the shift’s tour
of duty.
C. General Enforcement Practices:
1. Uniform enforcement activities support the goal of traffic law

enforcement, which is to achieve voluntary compliance with traffic laws
and regulations.
2. This policy is not intended to supplant officer judgment, for it is

impossible to foresee every conceivable situation involving traffic
violations. In unusual circumstances, the officer must decide what
enforcement action is proper based upon a combination of training,
experience and common sense.
3. Under normal circumstances the following general types of violations

should result in the placing of appropriate charges when violations are
observed or established.
a. Driving under the influence of alcohol/drugs

Officers are expected to apprehend, arrest and process drunk

drivers who come to their attention through routine observation,
investigation of enforcement activities. (See Policy and
Procedure 1139, Alcohol Enforcement Program).
b. Speeding violations
Accidents resulting from excessive speeds may cause a great

deal of property damage, serious injury or even death. The
enforcement objective is to establish and charge speeding
violations, which are either too fast for road conditions or in
excess of posted speed limits.
c. Other hazardous violations
In addition to DUI and speeding violations the National Safety

Council has identified the following as principal accident causing
violations:
1) Failure to yield right of way

2) Following another vehicle too closely
3) Improper turning movements
4) Driving on the center-line
5) Failure to heed stop signs
6) Improper passing
7) Disregarding signals
d. Equipment violations
Although equipment violations may not appear to be as important

as the moving violations, many accidents are the direct result of
faulty vehicular equipment. As a result of the Police Division’s
commitment to traffic safety, we must recognize the significance
of these violations and our role in reducing them.
e. Public carrier / Commercial vehicle violations
The major concern in dealing with this class of violation is that

drivers are properly licensed and qualified to safely operate the
vehicle and that the vehicle is properly registered, equipped and
insured to legally operate upon the highways of the City.
f. Other non-hazardous violations
Because of the limited relationship of non-hazardous violations to

accident causation an officer’s law enforcement discretion is
greater.
g. Multiple violations
In the event a motorist is stopped and may be charged with more

than one violation, a separate summons will be issued for each
charge.
h. Newly enacted laws and / or regulations
Officers are not authorized to either initiate or extend legislative

periods of grace, however, the best interests of the community
may be served through officer judgment and application of
appropriate enforcement action.
i. Special enforcement practices
1) Bicycle and Pedestrians
a) Police Officers should control bicycle and

pedestrian traffic so as to minimize their
interference with and exposure to vehicular traffic.
b) Enforcement action should be taken against

bicyclists and pedestrians who recklessly disregard
traffic laws and / or create a hazard to themselves
and others.
(1) Bicyclists who operate in a careless and

reckless manner upon the public streets and
roads should be cited, as could any other
vehicle operator.
(2) Pedestrians or bicyclists involved in traffic

crashes should be charged if it is found,
upon investigation that they are at fault.
2) Off-road vehicles
a) The need for enforcement exists with the increase

in use and popularity of off-road recreational
vehicles while on the public highways.
b) This requires a strict enforcement approach to

enforcing licensing, registration, equipment and
operations violations committed with off-road
recreational vehicles while on the public highways.
c) In accordance with State Code, an exception to

such enforcement allows particular type of
motorcycles to operate on portions of the public
highway while participating in certain approved and
sanctioned sporting events.
d) Accidents involving off-road vehicles are to be

investigated in the same manner as any other
motor vehicle crash.
4. Selective Enforcement and Saturation Patrols
The ultimate goal of selective traffic law enforcement is to reduce traffic

collisions/crashes. This may be achieved through the application of such
techniques as geographic/temporal assignment of personnel and
equipment and the establishment of preventive patrols to deal with
specific categories of unlawful driving behavior.
a. Selective Enforcement or Saturation Patrols for traffic

enforcement may be utilized as a deterrent to traffic violations at
High Accident Intersections and other locations where traffic
violations are occurring.
b. These locations can be identified by Shift Commanders, the

Traffic Unit or Crime Analysis based on motor vehicle crash
statistics.
c. These locations may also be selected based on citizen

complaints of speeding or other traffic violations.
d. Each Selected Enforcement Activity shall be documented on a

Saturation Patrol Activity Report by the Operations Branch.
Results of Saturation Patrols shall be forwarded through the
Chain of Command to the Operations Branch Commander.
e. Annually the Operations Branch shall evaluate the effectiveness

of Selective Enforcement & Saturation Patrols to include the
following:
1) Compilation and review of traffic collision/crash data
2) Compilation and review of traffic enforcement activities

data
3) Comparison of collision/crash data and enforcement

activities data
4) Implementation of selective enforcement techniques and

procedures
5) Deployment of traffic enforcement personnel
6) Documented annual review of selective traffic

enforcement activities.
5
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
PROVIDING POLICE 1/27/95
ESCORT SERVICE OVERSIGHT

Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P #1141 dated 4/8/86, and Chief’s Directive 1141.1 dated 9/21/93
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for providing law enforcement
escort services under scheduled and emergency conditions.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division recognizes that there are legitimate requests for police
escort services to ensure that safe, orderly and efficient movement of traffic or
expedite delivery of special items. Requests for these services will be honored to the
extent practical, consistent with the need to ensure that the act of escorting itself does
not create unacceptable risk to the public.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Scheduled escorts will require advance planning to include trip routes,

establishment of point traffic control locations, escort speed, multi-unit
coordination and any other appropriate measures to ensure safe passage.
B. Emergency escort service shall include the following procedures:
1. Emergency vehicles should not be escorted by officers except under

special circumstances approved by the supervisor.
2. Emergency escort of private vehicles is to be avoided whenever

possible. The preferred alternative is to arrange the transfer of persons
from the private vehicle into an appropriate emergency vehicle.
3. If in the opinion of the officer it is impossible or impractical to arrange the

transfer of a person from a private vehicle requesting escort, and if a
passenger in said vehicle appears to be in an immediate life-threatening
situation, the officer may, with specific approval of a supervisor, initiate
an escort of the private vehicle.
a. Regardless of the extent of threat to that person receiving

emergency escort, officers will conduct escorts in such a manner
that would not constitute unacceptable risk to the public.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1141 – PROVIDING POLICE ESCORT SERVICE Page 2 of 2
b. Officers conducting emergency escort services shall activate the

patrol vehicle’s emergency equipment; however, they shall not
proceed through traffic control devices without first stopping and
ensuring that both vehicles can safely proceed.
C. The Communications Supervisor or Road Supervisor will approve all requests

for escorts and will ensure appropriate units are dispatched. Under no
circumstances will private escort services be authorized to conduct escorts
within Hampton city limits.
P&P #1141 – PROVIDING POLICE ESCORT SERVICE Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
9/12/97
ASSISTING MOTORISTS OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for providing those services or
activities having an indirect effect on traffic flow and responding to citizen-generated
requests for assistance.
The Police Division has a responsibility to provide a communications link to obtain

needed services for motorists and to protect highway users stranded or disabled in
hazardous locations or environments.
II. POLICY:
Officers of the Hampton Police Division through their knowledge of assigned areas and
employment of diligent patrolling practices shall locate and render assistance to
highway users.
III. PROCEDURE:
Officers shall be constantly alert for highway users who appear to need assistance.
Whenever possible, consistent with the necessity to effect apprehensions of violators
and to answer previous calls-for-service or fulfill assignments, officers will stop and
offer their services to highway users who appear to be in need of assistance. Such
assistance may include but not be limited to:
1. Providing information or directions freely and in a pleasant manner upon

request. Officers will be familiar with various streets and highways in their area,
various services, facilities and tourist attractions available in order to provide
reliable and helpful information.
2. Providing assistance and/or arranging transportation for the sick or injured.
3. Requesting fire fighting services or other emergency equipment.
4. Assisting stranded or disabled motorists, to include arranging towing service if

needed.
5. Providing traffic control to reduce or remove hazardous conditions thereby

promoting safety, protecting human life and preserving the streets and
highways.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
03/21/07
EMERGENCY/ACCIDENT
INVESTIGATION EQUIPMENT
OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P # 1143 dated 04/08/03 and Ch. Dir. 1143.1 dated 10/15/03.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of the policy is to provide guidance to officers on maintaining equipment

needed to respond to and investigate accidents or other emergencies.
II. POLICY:
Officers of the Hampton Police Division are responsible for maintaining their equipment
and supplies in a state of operational readiness. This applies to equipment and
materials which are issued, assigned and provided (e.g., proper reports, forms, etc.) to
include items maintained in fleet and take-home cars. This will ensure that officers are
capable of providing those services which are consistent with emergency law
enforcement objectives and the needs of the community.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The tasks of the police officer in accident and emergency situations is to:
1. Stabilize the scene
a. Providing and/or requesting rescue, medical or other necessary

assistance.
b. Controlling and directing traffic in order to prevent further damage

or injury and expedite the movement of traffic.
2. Investigate
a. Conduct appropriate accident investigation duties.
b. In those circumstances where a more intensive investigation of

the accident is required the officer may request support and
specialized assistance from other Units within the Division.
3. Restore the situation or scene to a safe and normal state or condition as

quickly as possible.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1143 – EMERGENCY/ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 2
B. To accomplish these objectives, officers will be provided with the following:
1. Patrol officers will be issued reflectorized safety vests which are to be

used in accordance with existing policy and procedure.
2. Officers are responsible for ensuring that their assigned patrol vehicles
are equipped with an adequate number of flares (minimum of twelve).
3. Patrol vehicles will be equipped with:
a. First Aid kits of a type approved by the Department of

Transportation for use in vehicles and will contain assorted
bandages, compresses, and band aids.
b. Two (2) blankets in a suitable container.
c. Fire extinguisher with full charge.
d. Infection Control Kit.

e. Sharp knife.
4. All items are considered as part of the vehicle with accountability

attached to the vehicle operator.
5. Replenishment of the above supplies will be accomplished through the

Property & Evidence Unit. Property & Evidence will maintain an
adequate supply of these items on hand at all times.
6. Officers shall maintain an adequate supply of necessary reports and

forms to properly perform their required duties.
7. Officers that will be conducting fatal traffic investigations will have access
to a fatality accident investigation kit containing:
a. Clipboard
b. 100 and 300 foot measuring tapes
c. Marking crayon/chalk
d. An accident investigation template
e. Spray paint
g. Lumber Crayons
h. Marking nails
i. 4 pound hammer
j. Surveyor’s flags
P&P #1143 – EMERGENCY/ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 2
P&P #1143 – EMERGENCY/ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION EQUIPMENT Page 4 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
PROCESSING 09/11/06
SUSPENSION/REVOCATION CASES OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the proper handling of motorists
suspected or charged with operating a motor vehicle after their driving privileges have
been revoked or suspended.
II. POLICY:
In those cases where probable cause for revocation/suspension exists, the motorist will
be charged accordingly.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Prior to charging an individual with driving on revocation/suspension, probable

cause must be established. The failure to produce an operator’s license is not
in and of itself sufficient probable cause for this charge, though it may be an
indication that this is the case. Should no other evidence be developed, the
charge of driving without an operator’s license would be the proper charge,
which would normally be placed by summonsing the motorist. To establish
probable cause for driving on suspension or revocation, the officer must either:
1. Run an operator’s license check through D.M.V. and receive

confirmation, or
2. Obtain an admission from the motorist that his/her license is suspended

or revoked.
B. In cases where probable cause is established, the officer should ascertain

whether or not the motorist received any notification. Most often, this is done
via the same D.M.V. check, which will normally indicate “notice received” or “not
received”.
1. If notice has not been received, the motorist should normally be issued a
summons and released upon agreeing to appear in Court. Any license
presented should be confiscated, and a D.M.V. disqualification notice
issued the motorist. Seized licenses should be attached to the
disqualification notice.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1144 – PROCESSING SUSPENSION/REVOCATION CASES Page 2 of 2
2. The operator shall not be allowed to drive from the scene.
C. If the motorist is driving after notification has been made, the officer should
carefully weigh all information at hand. An offender who is willfully
transgressing the law might well disregard the summons or provide
false/misleading information or even be using false identification.
1. If the motorist has provided reliable information and is cooperative, he or

she should be summonsed to appear in Court.
2. If the officer concludes that the motorist is likely to disregard the

summons or has provided false or inaccurate information, he/she should
be taken before the magistrate for processing.
3. As in the previous situation, licenses should be seized. Any false or

altered identification should be tagged in as evidence and additional
charges placed if appropriate.
D. When an officer stops someone whose driver’s license is forfeited under 18.2-
272 (Driving after Forfeiture of License) the officer should use their MDT or ask
the Information Center to run their drivers history and criminal history to
determine if this would be their third violation within 10 years. If so, the person
will be arrested and a felony warrant obtained from the Magistrate. In addition,
an IBR report and Case File will be completed.
E. Any motorist who is a non-resident and faces possible imprisonment or

revocation of his operator’s license, when convicted, must be taken forthwith
before the magistrate for processing.
P&P #1144 – PROCESSING SUSPENSION/REVOCATION CASES Page 3 of 2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
METHODS OF HANDLING 03/30/10
SHOPLIFTING OFFENDERS OVERSIGHT

Operations
I. PURPOSE:
Shoplifting accounts for a significant percent of all Part I Crimes committed in the City
of Hampton and invariably takes up a lot of duty time. It is one of the few crimes where
an officer may make an arrest without a warrant when the alleged offense did not
occur in the officer’s presence. The policy sets forth the Police Division’s policy
methods of handling shoplifting offenses.
II. POLICY:
There are two alternative methods of handling shoplifting offenders. It shall be the
policy of the Hampton Police Division to handle all shoplifting cases in descending
order of priority as set forth in this Policy and Procedure.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Virginia State Code states the merchant has the right to detain the shoplifter for
one hour. The method of handling an adult shoplifting complaint is to first
interview the complainant, and evaluate the probable cause. Once probable
cause is established the following steps will be taken to determine whether to
arrest or summons the violator. All Felonies will be transported to the
Magistrate’s Office (in case of juveniles, take to Juvenile Intake Office) for
processing. If the matter is a misdemeanor, the State Code authorizes officers
to issue summonses to adults for certain misdemeanors not committed in their
presence and shoplifting is one of those exceptions (See §19.2-81).
B. When releasing the suspect on a summons, the Investigating Officer shall:
1. Verify the identity of the offender through one or more of the following (or
as other appropriate):
a. Pictured identification
b. Social Security number or name check through Division of Motor

Vehicle files or VCIN/NCIC files.
c. Records check
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1146 – METHODS OF HANDLING SHOPLIFTING OFFENDERS Page 2 of 2
2. Once identity is verified and as long as there is no reason to believe that

the person will not appear for court he/she should be released on a
summons.
3. When this situation occurs, the arresting officer becomes the

investigating officer and will complete a case file.
C. Special Requirements
1. Handling Juvenile Offenders: All felonies will be transported to the

Juvenile Intake Office for processing. If it is after office hours, Intake will
be contacted and the juvenile will be taken to Investigative Services and
handled by remote Tele-conference with the Juvenile Intake
Williamsburg office. In the cases of misdemeanor offenses, the
preferred method is to release the juvenile to his parent or guardian. In
all cases the identity of the juvenile should be verified through the
procedure listed in item III-B above.
Petitions are required in all cases and a Summons will not be

issued to a juvenile for shoplifting.
a. If the parent or guardian is contacted, release the juvenile to their

care/custody. (The investigating officer will complete a case file
and can direct the merchant to Intake to obtain petitions at their
leisure during normal business hours). The officer will need to
follow up for reporting purposes to insure petitions were obtained
or not.
b. If the parent cannot be contacted, the officer will transport the

juvenile to Juvenile Intake to obtain the proper petition and then
determine the proper course of action.
2. In all cases the reporting officer becomes the investigating officer and
should complete the crime report, including evidence list, and witness
list, as appropriate.
P&P #1146 – METHODS OF HANDLING SHOPLIFTING OFFENDERS Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
05/13/19
CUSTODY AND TRANSPORTATION
OF DETAINEES OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
This policy established procedures for maintaining custody and transporting detainees
in a manner that maximizes the safety and security of the detainee and transporting
officer(s).
II. POLICY:
Transportation of persons who are in custody is a constant requirement and frequent

activity. Officers maintain custody of detainees for only the minimum amount of time
necessary to accomplish these duties. A detainee is a person in the custody of a
member of the Division who is not free to leave.
These activities involve two general time periods. The first, is immediately following
arrest when the person is taken to the detention facility (lock-up, jail, a juvenile facility;
or other authorized facility or agency) for booking or holding. Officers make every
effort to assist the Sheriff’s Department personnel as required during the booking
process. The second, concerns the movement of detainees from the detention facility
to a court, hospital, medical facility or for other reasons.
Officers of the Hampton Police Division, while performing detainee transport, do so in a

manner that provides adequately for the safety and security of the detainee, the
transporting officer, and the public.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Officers maintain custody of detainees:
1. From time of arrest/apprehension until delivery to the Hampton Sheriff’s

Department, Newport News Secure Detention (when a juvenile is
ordered detained following arrest) or other authorized facility or agency;
2. From time of accepting custody of a detainee outside the City limits until
delivery to an appropriate detaining facility/agency;
3. For legitimate investigative purposes (i.e., interrogation, show-up, line-up,

etc.).
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1147 – CUSTODY AND TRANSPORTATION OF DETAINEES Page 2 of 6
4. Whenever there are any unserved warrants/petitions which have been

obtained by any Hampton Police Division officer, regardless of any
existing court detainers or charges;
5. Only during such other times as dictated by circumstances and approved

by the Chief of Police.
B. Once an individual has been in the custody of the Sheriff or appeared in any
Court, the Hampton Sheriff’s Department assumes responsibility for the
transportation of the detainee unless a Division member obtains additional
warrants. Any transportation resulting from service of court paperwork,
including a Failure to Appear warrant or capias, that has just been issued, is the
responsibility of the Sheriff’s Department.
C. All detainees will be searched by the transporting officer prior to transport. In

the event one officer assumes a transport of a detainee, an additional search is
made by the transporting officer. Female officers conduct searches of female
detainees. In the event a female officer is not available, the female detainee is
searched in accordance with Policy and Procedure #502 (Mass Arrest)
HANDLING AND PROCESSING.
D. When practical, officers transport detainees of the same sex. This is especially
a consideration in situations where lengthy transport is necessary. In the event
that circumstances require that a detainee be transported by an officer of the
opposite sex, the officer logs their mileage with the dispatcher at the beginning
and end of the trip.
E. Searching Police Vehicles
1. The transporting officer shall search their vehicle prior to and

immediately after each detainee transport to ensure that no weapons,
contraband or other items are located in the detainee area of the vehicle.
2. In order to ensure safe transport and other law enforcement capability,

all officers check their respective vehicle at the beginning of their watch
to ensure that all equipment assigned to their unit is available and in
good condition and that the vehicle is ready to be put into service.
F. Detainees being arrested shall remain handcuffed during transportation within

the guidelines contained in “Use of Force and Related Equipment”, P&P 533. If
the prisoner cannot be controlled by normal restraints, the transporting officer
shall advises the supervisor and take appropriate action (i.e., , transfer the
detainee to a unit with a shield, transport with two officers, or if necessary
request the paddy wagon from the Sheriff’s Department, etc.)
G. Positioning of detainees in transport vehicles is determined by the type of

vehicle, number of detainees to be transported, and the number of officers in
the vehicle. The following procedures are utilized in transporting persons in
custody:
1. When transported in vehicles equipped with safety screens, detainees

are placed in the rear seat area of the vehicles.
2. When being transported in one-man vehicles not equipped with safety

screens, the detainees are normally handcuffed from behind and seat
belted in the front right seat of the vehicle. In two-man or detective
vehicles without screens, the detainee is handcuffed behind his back
and is placed either in the rear seat behind the passenger’s position or in
the front passenger seat. The second officer places himself behind the
driver to monitor the detainee. Depending on the disposition of the
detainee, handcuff belts and leg irons may be used to further secure the
detainee.
3. In no case will a lone officer, in a vehicle not equipped with a safety

screen, transport more than one detainee without prior approval from a
supervisor.
H. Control of detainees WHILE Transporting
1. Visual contact:
a. While transporting a detainee, the officer maintains visual contact

whenever possible.
b. In unusual circumstances when visual contact is not possible (i.e.,

use of toilet facilities, treatment area in emergency room, etc.),
the officer ensures that there are no escape routes or weapons
available to the detainee while out of the officer’s sight.
2. In those situations involving lengthy transportation activities when meals

are necessary the officer utilizes a place not normally frequented by the
officer. This serves to minimize any chance of a prearranged plan for
someone to attempt release of the prisoner.
3. When transporting a detainee, the transporting officer responds to the

need to provide law enforcement services only in the following situations:
a. When it is necessary for the officer to act immediately in order

that a potential victim is not harmed.
b. When a person has been injured and immediate assistance is

required.
c. In any of the above situations, the transporting officer ensures

that the detainee is secure and protected and notifies their
supervisors as soon as possible of their actions.
4. Detainee Escapes:
a. If a detainee escapes within the Hampton City limits, the

transporting officer shall take the following actions:
(1) notify the Communications Section (COMSEC) of the

escape.
(2) provide COMSEC information on the detainee’s physical

description, last known direction of travel, and any other
pertinent information which would aid in the safe recovery
of the detainee.
(3) submit a Special Report before the end of the shift to

his/her immediate supervisor explaining the circumstances
of the escape.
b. COMSEC’s responsibility is to request assistance for the

transporting officer and to advise the transporting officer’s
supervisor of the situation.
c. The transporting officer’s supervisor ensures that all means are

exhausted to recapture the detainee by setting up a perimeter of
the affected area and utilizing a tracking dog, if available.
d. If a detainee escapes outside Hampton City limits, the

transporting officer shall:
(1) notify the jurisdiction in which the escape occurs by the

most expeditious means available.
(2) notify the Hampton Police Division Communications

Supervisor of the situation as soon as practicable. The
Communications Supervisor shall notify the on-duty Shift
Commander for information purposes.
(3) submit a Special report to his/her immediate supervisor

before the end of his/her shift explaining the
circumstances of the escape.
e. The officer shall be physically involved in the recovery of the

prisoner in accordance with law.
5. The transporting officer shall not allow a detainee to communicate with

other people while in transit unless the situation is such that a verbal
exchange is necessary. The officer shall exercise good judgment when
deciding whether to allow a conversation to take place between the
detainee and another party when the detainee is in the process of being
transported from one point to another.
6. When transporting detainees from one facility to another or taking a

person in custody to Adult Intake for booking or holding, the transporting
officer shall follow these procedures:
a. The officer’s firearm is secured in the designated place at the

facility being entered or in the trunk of the officer’s car before the
detainee leaves the vehicle.
b. Restraining devices are removed when the officer is sure that the
detainee is properly controlled and secure.
c. The proper paperwork (warrants, committals, etc.) shall be

submitted to the appropriate person(s) at the receiving facility and
in situations that require it, the officer shall ensures that proper
signatures are obtained on paperwork to be returned to the Police
Division or issuing authority.
d. The transfer of custody of a detainee from one officer to another

is noted on the arrest sheet and in the IBR Supplemental Report
if applicable. All related paperwork (warrants, committals, etc.)
remains with the transporting officer.
e. A notation is made on the arrest sheet of who the detainee was

turned over to at the receiving agency.
f. If the transporting officer is aware of any medical conditions, or

escape risk of the arrestee, the receiving agency shall be advised
and a notation shall also be made on the arrest sheet in the
appropriate area.
I. Transport Equipment:
1. All marked police vehicles are equipped with safety screens separating
the front and rear compartments. Normally these vehicles are utilized in
detainee transports in order to prevent detainee access to the driver’s
compartment.
2. Similarly, the paddy wagon has a secure prisoner area which is

separated from the driver’s compartment and can be borrowed from the
Hampton Sheriff’s Department in special situations when detainees are
violent, might harm themselves or others, or destroy property.
3. All vehicles equipped with safety screens and utilized for the
transportation of detainees have the rear interior door and window
handles/controls removed or disabled to minimize the risk of escape by
detainees being transported.
J. Documentation:
1. When picking up a detainee for transport at a detention facility, the

transportation officer ensures that he has the correct person. This is
accomplished by:
a. The officer’s personal knowledge of the detainee.
b. Verification by the jail custodian or other authorized person of the

detainee’s identity.
2. When transporting a detainee from a detention facility to another, the

transporting officer ensures that the following items accompany the
detainee:
a. The original(s) of the properly executed arrest warrant(s).
b. Medical records and/or medication.
c. The detainee’s personal property.
3. In the case of the interstate transports, the officer will take the original
warrant plus two certified copies. Upon service of the warrant, the facility
is given one copy, the detainee is given the other copy, and the original
remains with the officer to be returned to the court.
K. When a Hampton officer initiates transport of a detainee from one detention

facility to another and has information concerning the detainee’s escape,
security, suicidal potential, or other medical condition, he/she completes an
incident report which accompanies the documentation required in Section J
above. A copy of the incident report is turned over to the receiving facility. The
original and remaining copies are processed as any incident report in
accordance with the existing Division policy.
L. In the event officers of the Hampton Police Division are required to transport
dangerous or security risk detainee’s to court, the court shall be notified before
transport takes place in order to ensure the proper handling of the detainee can
be planned.
M. Transportation of detainees to special events (i.e., funerals, hospital to visit

relatives, etc.) is handled by the Hampton Sheriff’s Department.
N. Upon completion of transportation duties, officers return to their assigned duties

and law enforcement activities.
O. If a foreign national is arrested or detained, the foreign national must be told of

their right of consular notification and access. A determination must be made
as to whether consular notification is the option of the arrestee or if it is
mandatory. The appropriate consular office should then be notified immediately
upon this determination.
P. On extraditions requiring officers to fly armed, officers shall follow the latest
guidelines on Flying Armed established by the Transportation Security
Administration (TSA).
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
12/10/15
PATROL SERVICE OFFICERS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the selection, training, and
assignment of Patrol Service Officers (PSO).
II. POLICY:
The PSO is used to supplement the duties of the School Crossing Guard, and perform
other tasks not requiring full sworn authority. The Operations Branch Commander has
the operational responsibilities for PSO’s.
III. PROCESURE:
A. SELECTION PROCESS
1. Professional Standards (Personnel and Recruiting) is responsible for

coordinating the applicant processing of PSO’s. The process proceeds
as follows:
a. The selection process begins with the position posting for PSO.
Posting is the responsibility of the Recruiting Unit.
b. The application is completed through the Recruiting Unit. The

application package includes a background questionnaire,
release letter, and EEO form.
c. Personal interview.
d. Criminal, financial and DMV records check.
e. Polygraph examination.
f. Photographing and fingerprinting.
g. Drug screening.
h. Final investigative report/synopsis.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1201 – PATROL SERVICE OFFICERS Page 2 of 2
i. Review of investigative synopsis.
j. Chief’s selection interview.
B. AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY
The PSO is not commissioned as a law enforcement officer and does not
perform duties requiring sworn police authority. Their role is to augment
Division personnel in performing the following duties prescribed by the Chief of
Police.
1. Supplement school crossing guard locations when needed
2. Perform interdepartmental mail delivery
3. Traffic control
4. Provide funeral procession escorts
5. Abandoned vehicles
C. UNIFORMS
Uniforms for PSO’s are specified by the Chief of Police. They are clearly
distinguishable from the uniforms of sworn officers.
D. TRAINING
1. Providing training is the responsibility of the Traffic Unit Supervisor or his

designee.
2. Prior to the performance of duties, the PSO receives the following formal
training:
a. Traffic direction
b. Wearing of the Uniform
c. Applicable laws and ordinances
d. Applicable policies and procedures
e. Defensive Driving (PSO only)
f. On-the-job Training.
3. PSO’s receive refresher training periodically at regularly scheduled

meetings, and attend Civilian In-service training as required.
4. Training is documented with lesson plans consistent with existing policy

and procedure. Lesson Plans are approved and maintained in the
Training Unit.
5. Training records are maintained in a manner prescribed by the Training

Unit Commander.
P&P #1201 – PATROL SERVICE OFFICERS Page 3 of 2
P&P #1201 – PATROL SERVICE OFFICERS Page 4 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
EMERGENCY 03/08/2021
COMMUNICATIONS CENTER OVERSIGHT

Support Services
(ECC)
I. PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for Emergency Communications Personnel for all phases of

employment in the Public Safety Communications and Information Centers.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division that all Communications personnel will
be proficient in their assigned duties and responsibilities, and perform such duties in a
professional, courteous and confidential manner.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Personnel assigned to the Public Safety Emergency Communications Center

(ECC) or the Central Records Information Center shall strictly adhere to
Federal, State, and Local laws as well as Federal Communications
Commission, (FCC) regulations governing Telecommunications Privacy.
Duties and functions include access to Virginia Criminal Information Network
(VCIN), Virginia Dept. of Motor Vehicles (DMV), National Crime Information
Center (NCIC), and National Law Enforcement Telecommunications System
(NLETS). Access is authorized under the direct supervision of the Virginia
State Police. The Hampton Police Division is under agreement with the Virginia
State Police to operate the system exclusively for Criminal Justice Purpose
only. Any unauthorized dissemination of information on the part of the
employee could result in termination and/or grounds for criminal prosecution.
B. STATEMENT OF UNDERSTANDING
Personnel assigned to the Public Safety ECC or the Information Center are
employed under a twelve (12) month probationary period. The twelve-month
probationary period shall be calculated from the date the employee successfully
completed the E911 Tele-Communications Specialist-I course and/or the date
of assignment to full duty, i.e.: assigned to a shift, special assignment, etc.
Personnel will remain in compliance with the State of Virginia’s Department of
Criminal Justice 911-Emergency Communications Standards, City of Hampton
Personnel Policies Manual, the Hampton Police Division's Policies and
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1401 – EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER Page 3 of 7
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
T TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
D. PUBLIC SAFETY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER RESPONSIBILITIES
1. The Public Safety Emergency Communications Center is responsible for:
a. Radio Communications – serves as net control for all radio

communications of the Police and Fire Division, and the City of
Hampton.
b. Telephone communications – serves as the central console for

receiving calls for police and fire/EMS services (emergency and
non-emergency).
The following information will be obtained and recorded for all

calls for service and self-initiated activities:
1) Incident number;
2) Date and time of request;
3) Name and address of complainant, if possible;
4) Type of incident reported;
5) Location of incident reported;
6) Identification of officer(s) assigned as primary and
backup;
7) Time of dispatch;
8) Time of officer arrival;
9) Time of officer return to service; and
10) Disposition or status of reported incident.
c. Teletype and automated data communications – The Information

Center and Records Sections serve as the central locations for
inputting and receiving of NCIC and VCIN data.
2. In the normal course of events, any information or assistance requested

of the Public Safety ECC that falls outside of specified routine duties will
be channeled directly through the Public Safety Communications Center

Commander for appropriate action. In the absence of the Emergency
Communications Commander the Emergency Communications
supervisor will act in his/her absence.
3. Emergency Communications supervisors will be directly responsible to

the Commander of the Communications Center. The effective and
efficient operation of the 911 system shall be the responsibility of the
Communications Commander.
E. TELEPHONE CONSOLE OPERATIONS
1. Enhanced 911 (E911) and Wireless 911 (W911)
a. Enhanced and Wireless 911 is an emergency telephone number

that is incorporated into the Emergency Communication Center
telephone system. Each phone console is equipped with the
Automated Number Identification Display Screen (ANI), and an
Automatic Location Identification Display Screen (ALI).
b. Transfer speed dial buttons are located on the phone console for
instant activation which permits telecommunicators to transfer
calls quickly to pre-selected services (i.e.; Non emergency lines or
other Public Safety Agencies).
2. HEARING IMPAIRED (TDD) CALLS
a. All emergency 911 lines and non-emergency administrative lines

are capable of accepting TDD calls.
b. Each console has a TDD interface within the telephone system.
3. EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT-EMERGENCY MESSAGE REPORTING
a. The Emergency Communications Center will report all emergency

messages to the Office of Emergency Management in a manner
that allows sufficient time for proper notification and reaction to
the message.
b. Messages from the State Department of Emergency

Services will be received over the VCIN (teletype) circuit or
Division email. The Communications Center is responsible for
monitoring these circuits and ensuring that message traffic
received from the State Department of Emergency Services is
promptly forwarded to the Office of Emergency Management.
4. TEXT to 911
a. In lieu of voice communications, callers may opt to contact the

ECC via SMS messaging, also called texting. Calls received via
SMS Messaging will come in on the Intrado Viper system. Text

messages will only be received when logged into the system.
Call-takers can reply to a 911 text by typing a manual message or

by use of pre-set messages. All correspondence from the call-
taker should be in plain language (no “texting” lingo, shortcuts
and/or acronyms). Dispatchers may ask the caller if they can
speak to them by phone when necessary.
b. Calls received via MMS Messaging will come in via email to the
“Police Comm Supervisors” and “Police Crime Analysis”
distribution lists. Any data received in the message via SMS
Messaging will still come in on the Intrado Viper system. Not all
phone carriers support MMS Messaging into 911 centers,
therefore, an error message received on the caller’s phone is not
necessarily malfunctioning equipment in the 911 center.
c. If it is determined that Language Line services are needed, a

voice call will be placed to the caller and then transferred to the
Language Line.
d. It may not be possible to transfer a text message conversation to

another PSAP because some do not have the capability to take
text messages. If a text message is received and it is determined
that the emergency is occurring in another jurisdiction, the call
can be transferred to them if it is known that they can process
calls by text message. If it is unknown whether or not the other
jurisdiction can take the text message, begin to handle the call as
if it was for Hampton. Contact will also be made with the other
jurisdiction to determine if the text message can be transferred to
them.
Any time a text message is transferred to another jurisdiction,

phone contact must also be made with that PSAP to ensure they
received the information. The session should be kept open until
contact is made with the appropriate jurisdiction in case they need
additional information.
e. For all SMS/MMS messages, a call will be created in CAD

including all pertinent information for documentation purposes.
These calls will be handled as traditional emergency/non-
emergency calls that are received in the ECC.
5. TAPE RECORDING OF EMERGENCY TELEPHONE AND RADIO

TRANSMISSIONS
a. The Emergency Communications Center maintains a Voice

Logging system that electronically records all administrative and
emergency telephone calls and radio transmissions in the
Emergency Communications Center on a 24 hour basis.
Telephone and Radio traffic to the Information Center is also

recorded.
b. Each console in Communications has the capability of immediate

playback of either telephone lines or radio transmissions (to verify
or obtain missed information). Communications employees shall
follow the operating instructions for the Instant Recall Recorder.
c. Recording (Record Keeping)
All recorded information will be maintained in accordance with

Library of Virginia Retention Guidelines and the direction of the
City Attorney.
d. If it is necessary for a tape to be requested for an investigation or

court purposes, the appropriate investigator or designee of the
court should contact the Communications supervisor to request
the tape.
6. ALARM MONITORING SYSTEMS
a. The Emergency Communications Center does not monitor

commercial or residential alarm systems. Alarm responses are
originated by private security companies which monitor the alarms
and contact the Communications Center by phone when an alarm
is activated.
b. Currently there are no policies or ordinances allowing the ECC to

monitor commercial and/or residential alarms.
7. INFORMATION CENTER RESPONSIBILITIES
Personnel assigned to work in the Information Center will come under the
supervision of the Central Records Supervisors. Employees within this
center will handle non-emergency dispatch functions. The Information
center will:
a. Enter, retrieve, and update information on Virginia Criminal

Information Network (VCIN) and National Crime Information
Center (NCIC). The following lists some of the current databases
for which Communications staff assumes management
responsibility:
(1) Stolen cars

(2) Runaways
(3) Missing persons
(4) Stolen license plates
(5) Firearms clearinghouse entries
(6) Repossessions of vehicle documentation
(7) Towed vehicle file for city and private property
8. USE OF THE INFORMATION CHANNEL
a. Unless their vehicle is equipped with an MDT all units, Patrol and
Investigative, regardless of their status are directed to use the
Information channel, when it is open for the following:
(1) License checks

(2) Stolen items checks
(3) Warrant checks
(4) Directory information
(5) Wrecker requests
(6) Notification of business owners
(7) Notification of public works of a hazard
b. Officers who are going to use the Information channel will advise
the telecommunicator on their primary channel that they are
switching to the Information channel. Officers are encouraged to
remain on the Information channel until they are given the results
of their request.
c. Upon completion of a transaction on the Information channel, the

officer should return to their primary channel.
9. USE OF PRIMARY CHANNEL
a. All units: Patrol and Investigative, regardless of their status, shall

use their primary channel without going to the Information channel
for the following:
(1) Calls for fire equipment
(2) Calls for ambulances
(3) Stolen auto checks on vehicles that they have stopped.
b. Transmissions that will extend for a considerable length of time

should be taken to a TAC channel if possible.
10. EQUIPMENT REPAIRS
a. Individual officers are not authorized to take Communications

portable radios to the repair shop without first being specifically
authorized to do so by the Public Safety Communications Unit
Commander. The Special Projects supervisor will be advised of
all mobile radio equipment taken to be repaired.
b. In the event a malfunction occurs with a hand held radio, the

officer will bring the affected radio to the Emergency
Communication Center to be deadlined. Officers whose portable
radios are in repair may check out a loaner radio from the
Information Center for the duration of their shift.
P&P #1401 – EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER Page 8 of
7
Redaction Log



Redaction Log

Pages

Code §2.2-3706(B)(5).
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
07/09/14
RADIO OPERATION OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this procedure is to establish guidelines for the standard operation of
the Police Radio System, and cellular phones by Division personnel. This policy
consists of the responsibilities and procedures for all members of the Police Division.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to maintain a sophisticated well-

disciplined radio communications system that utilizes well devised and recognized
codes. The Division's radio communications system is augmented by cellular
phones.
III. PROCEDURE:
Every patrol officer engaged in a field assignment will have access to radio
communications. This will ensure that patrol officers have a means of maintaining
constant radio communications in order to exchange information, request assistance,
transmit orders or instructions and respond to calls for service.
The City of Hampton is licensed by the Federal Communications Commission to

operate a two way radio system, and we are required to be in compliance with
regards to transmissions, station identification and language.
A. TALK GROUPS
1. The City of Hampton has a new Motorola Digital Emergency

Communications System using the Mototola Astro 25 communications
integration system covering both 700 and 800 MHz. This system is
comprised of three (3) transmission/reception towers as well as a fail-
safe backup located at the City Hall building. Tower sites are:
- Bluebird Tower: SW of Bluebird Gap Farm

- Buckroe Tower: Behind 243 6th Street (open field)
- Big Bethel Tower: Behind fire station #11
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1402 – RADIO OPERATION Page 2 of 8
2. The communications system uses portable, mobile and base station

systems pre-programmed with agency specific talk groups and both
700 and 800 MHz frequency capabilities. This policy focuses primarily
on the police talk group configuration. Additional information pertaining
to other Hampton agencies may be obtained from the City Radio
Managers Office.
B. SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1. The primary talk group frequency for normal, daily operations is the
800 MHz frequency talk groups. There are 16 channels pre-
programmed into each HPD portable and mobile radio. Both portable
and mobile radios are programmed in an identical manner to eliminate
confusion. Of the 16 channels, all but 6 are encrypted. Encrypted
channels use a 24-bit encryption key which renders the channel
undetectable by any scanner or other radio even if that device is
programmed with that channel’s frequency set. Only communication
devices with the correct encryption key will be able to receive and or
transmit on that channel. Caution must be used when operating on
unencrypted channels as outside parties may be monitoring.
2. 800 MHz (POLICE) TALK GROUP
a. HA-PTAC1 (Tactical1 *Encrypted*) - This channel is used as

the primary talk around for the Wythe sector. It is used when
transmissions are lengthy or would otherwise tie up the primary
Wythe dispatch channel.
b. HA-W-DISP (Wythe Sector Primary *Encrypted*) – This is the

primary dispatch channel for the Wythe Sector.
c. HA-PINFO (Information *Encrypted*) – The information channel

is for non-emergency requests for information such as operator
license checks, DMV checks, towing, etc.
d. HA-C-DISP (Chesapeake Sector Primary *Encrypted*) – This is

the primary dispatch channel for the Chesapeake Sector.
e. HA-PTAC2 (Tactical 2 *Encrypted*) - This channel is used as

the primary talk around for the Chesapeake sector. It is used
when transmissions are lengthy or would otherwise tie up the
primary Chesapeake dispatch channel.
f. HA-/NN-MA (Hampton/Newport News *Not Encrypted*) - This is

the mutual aid channel between Hampton PD and Newport
News PD. This channel is not monitored and as such,
coordination with Hampton Communications is needed to alert
Newport News.
g. HA-PTAC4 thru HA-PTAC6 (*Encrypted*) – These tactical

channels are used for all non-emergency communications and
are not typically monitored by Communications.
h. HA-SWAT (*Encrypted*) – This channel is designated for

SWAT operations/training only.
i. HA-CITY1 and HA-CITY2 (*Not Encrypted*) – These channels

are used for non-emergency communications and are not
typically monitored by Communications without prior
arrangements. Additionally, portable radios issued by the city to
Coliseum and Convention Center staff utilize CITY1 and CITY2
and as such these are not encrypted channels.
j. PD/FD/HCS (Police/Fire/Schools *Not Encrypted*) - This

channel is used as a common channel for police, fire and city
schools. This channel is not typically monitored by
Communications.
k. HA-EOC (Emergency Operations Center *Not Encrypted*) -

This channel is used by the City Emergency Operations Center.
l. HA-INTAKE (Adult Intake Facility (*Not Encrypted*) - This

channel is used by the Adult Intake Facility (lock-up).
m. HA-NARC (Special Investigation Unit) (*Special Encryption*) –

This channel is used solely by the Hampton Police Division’s
Special Investigations Unit. Only those officers assigned to this
unit or with special authorization by the Chief of Police will have
programmed into their portable radios a unique encryption key
which will allow for communications on this channel. This
channel is not monitored by Communications Personnel.
3. 700 MHz (ORION) TALK GROUP
ORION (Overlay Regional InterOperability Network) – Each portable

and mobile radio is equipped with a series of talk groups programmed
in the 700 MHz range. This radio system is referred to as “ORION”.
The purpose of the ORION 700 MHz talk groups is to provide
seamless interoperable communications via towers and a regional

microwave ring between all agencies which participate in the ORION
project during large scale multi-jurisdictional incidents. Those
jurisdictions are: Hampton, Newport News, Norfolk, Virginia Beach,
Chesapeake, Suffolk, and Portsmouth. ORION is not intended to be
used as a nominal mutual aid talk group and requires advance
coordination with Communications prior to use. Virginia Beach is the
primary controller for the ORION system.
C. PUBLIC SAFETY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER OPERATIONS:
1. Under the scrutiny of FCC and the Bureau of Emergency

Communications command structure, the Public Safety Emergency
Communications Center has the responsibility of governing the
manner in which communications are performed.
2. The function of the Public Safety Telecommunicator is to broadcast

impersonal radio messages to the field units, and to receive their
requests. It is expected and required that when a telecommunicator
gives an assignment, the units take the appropriate action. This
function does not permit discussion or disagreement to take place
about the task over the radio. Any difference of opinion about
dispatched information should be handled by the affected supervisors.
D. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR POLICE RADIO

OPERATIONS
1. The Public Safety Emergency Communications Center shall determine

the priority of calls according to the degree of emergency.
2. All on-duty units will be required to log in and out of service, using the
appropriate terminology. There may be situations where personnel
may be exempt from this requirement when given approval by the
Chief of Police under circumstances requiring them to deviate from this
policy.
3. All units shall give their location when acknowledging receipt of a call.
4. Every on duty officer must report their status and location (as
appropriate) each time they go out of service.
a. This procedure is fundamental in promoting officer safety.

Effective police operations are contingent on the requirement to
log out of service.
b. In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for a unit

commander (lieutenant or above) to exempt an officer from
reporting his/her status and location. Personal safety and
impact on operations will be key factors considered in granting
such exemptions.
c. When this occurs, the authorizing commander will contact the

Public Safety ECC Supervisor on duty and advise them of the
exemption.
5. All units responding to a call, even though not dispatched by the Public
Safety ECC, shall notify the telecommunicator that they are responding
and give their location at the time of the call.
6. All units dispatched on calls will acknowledge their arrival at the scene
of the call, by the use of “arrived” or “on scene”
7. All units and Public Safety Telecommunicators will use the letter "X"
behind the unit number when attempting to contact units that are
currently on an assignment. Example: " 1204X" or "1200 to 1204x."
E. PHONETIC ALPHABET
1. In broadcasting information, spell the names that are unusual or those

that have a different spelling.
2. In spelling or when using letters in messages officers must utilize the

International Phonetic Alphabet.
A - Alpha B – Bravo C – Charlie D – Delta

E – Echo F – Foxtrot G – Golf H – Hotel
I – India J – Juliet K – Kilo L – Lima
M – Mike N – November O – Oscar P – Papa
Q – Quebec R – Romeo S – Sierra T - Tango
U – Uniform V – Victor W – Whiskey X - Xray
Y – Yankee Z – Zulu
F TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
• Police Officer Needs Help

• Burglary in Progress
• Certain Felonies in Progress
• Shootings
2. BOL’s will be broadcast upon receipt of report on the following or upon

request of any on scene supervisor.
• Stolen Vehicle
• Lost Child
• Runaway
3. Public Safety Telecommunicators will use the alert tone settings on

the console for the following calls for service:
a. A single alert tone will be used when broadcasting a Signal 1

“Police Officer Needs Help."
b. The pulse tone setting on the console will be used when

broadcasting a burglary (in progress/just occurred), a robbery
(in progress/just occurred), hold-up alarms and shootings.
c. The warble tone will be used to announce the closing and

opening of the air on a specific channel.
Example: Warble tone: “The air is closed on Wythe”.

Warble tone: “The air is open on Wythe”.
I. COMPLETE RADIO FAILURE
1. Public Safety Emergency Communications Center personnel will notify

all units of the Police Division who have personnel on duty at the time
of the failure that such a condition does exist.
2. The Public Safety ECC will make every attempt to handle each request
for assistance received from citizens. Emergency calls will receive top
priority and complaints of a minor nature will be handled as time
allows. Communications personnel will not advise the public that we
have lost radio contact with our units.
3. Public Safety ECC personnel will dispatch emergency calls via MDT,
cell phone or landline phone.
4. In the event of complete radio failure, all patrol units will proceed to a
telephone/cell phone within their district or as close to their district as
possible. Each unit will contact the Public Safety ECC providing the
number of the phone they are using. They will remain by that phone
until dispatched or the radio service returns.
5. Upon clearing any call, units will locate a phone, contact

communications and provide their disposition. If they are using a
landline, they will wait at that location for additional directions.
6. During this state of emergency, all other units will report directly to their
Unit Commander or Officer in Charge. The Unit Commander or Officer
in Charge will be responsible for establishing communication with the
Public Safety Emergency Communications Center assuring that
emergency service can be sustained during complete radio failure.
7. If the radio failure is determined to be of an extended nature, the

Tactical Team will, under the direction of the Chief of Police, call to
duty at least one team to assist with responding to calls for service.
Redaction Log



6 1
Redaction Log

Pages
6(1)

Code §2.2-3706(B)(5).
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
EMERGENCY MEDICAL 04/23/12
DISPATCHING OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide direction for the implementation and use of the
Emergency Medical Dispatch (EMD) system.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to use an emergency medical dispatch
program that has been approved by the Operational Medical Director of the division of
Fire and Rescue. Only those telecommunicators who have successfully completed
approved training will provide this service.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Training – All training will be conducted by qualified instructors.
1. Telecommunicators will complete all required training prior to engaging in

EMD procedures. This will also become part of the training provided to
new telecommunicators. CPR certification will be approved by the
Operational Medical Director (OMD).
2. EMD certification requires that telecommunicators participate in

continuing training or related education to maintain certification.
Retraining and recertification in EMD and CPR will meet the
requirements established by applicable laws, state standards, or under
the direction of the OMD.
B. Operations
1. A protocol card file will be kept at each workstation engaged in EMD.

The EMD protocol program is also interfaced with the Computer Aided
Dispatch system.
2. Telecommunicators will strictly adhere to the appropriate protocol when

handling an EMD call. Pre- and Post dispatch instructions will be
provided to the caller verbatim.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1403 – EMERGENCY MEDICAL DISPATCH Page 2 of 2
3. Callers should be kept on the telephone until the arrival of EMS

personnel if the call is of a serious nature as per protocol or if, in the
opinion of the call taker, it would benefit the caller emotionally to remain
on the phone.
4. The on duty Communications Supervisor may suspend EMD as

circumstances warrant. If EMD is suspended, the on duty EMS
Supervisor will be notified immediately. The Communications
Supervisor will then submit a Special Report forthwith to the Commander
of Communications detailing the reasons for this action.
5. A quality assurance review of EMD calls will be conducted on a regular

basis by Emergency Communications Staff members. A report of this
review will be submitted monthly to the Commander of Communications.
P&P #1403 – EMERGENCY MEDICAL DISPATCH Page 3 of 2
-
POLICY & PROCEDURE SERIES #1404 PAGE 1 OF 5
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
3/22/2022
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER
OVERSIGHT
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES Support Services
ALL MANUALS P&P# 1404 dated 01/19/2022
I. PURPOSE
To establish administrative procedures pertaining to the management of the

Emergency Communications Center (ECC.)
II. POLICY
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to define the administrative functions of
the Emergency Communications Center. These functions include but are not limited
to workplace rules, training, personnel assignments, rosters, leave submission, and
approval procedures. These functions will be clearly defined to ensure compliance
with workplace standards and equitable treatment.
III. PROCEDURE
The following procedures establish standard operating procedures for the
administrative functions of the Emergency Communications Center. Decisions
pertaining to situations not covered in this policy will be based upon City Policy,
Hampton Police Division Rules & Regulations, Policies & Procedures, and other
documented standard operating procedures such as NCIC/VCIN regulations, training
bulletins, lesson plans, etc.
A. WORKPLACE RULES
1. Attire
a. All Emergency Communications Center personnel attire will be

in compliance with HPD Policy and Procedure 1102, “Personal
Appearance,” Section H. “Attire for Civilian Employees.”
b. Footwear must consist of closed-toe manufacture. Open toe

footwear is prohibited.
2. Personal Items
a. Personal Cellular Telephones are permitted in the workplace
and are to be utilized for emergency personal communication
only.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1404 - EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES Page 2 of 5
1) Personal Cellular telephone usage must comply with all

VCIN/NCIC security regulations.
2) Personal Cellular telephones may not be utilized for
social media access, video gaming/playback, or personal
telephone/digital communications not of emergency
nature while seated at ECC work stations.
b. All other electronic items that have video gaming or playback
capabilities are prohibited in the workplace.
B. TRAINING
1. All initial, career development and specialized training will be
completed pursuant to the Emergency Communications Center
Training Plan.
C. Virginia Criminal Information Network (VCIN) certification
Personnel in positions that require VCIN access are required to meet and
maintain the following eligibility criteria as specified in the VCIN manual:
1. Applicant with a felony conviction will not be permitted access to the
NCIC/VCIN system.
2. Applicant who is wanted for a crime in state or out of state will not be
permitted to access the VCIN system.
3. Applicant with a Class 1 or 2 misdemeanor conviction(s), excluding
those set forth in Title 46.2 of the Code of Virginia or one offense of
D.U.I., and substantially similar offenses under the laws of the United
States and any political subdivision thereof, will not be permitted
access to the NCIC/VCIN system. These crimes are characterized as
involving moral turpitude (lying, cheating, or stealing) or gross
misconduct (generally, crimes against a person and crimes involving
drugs or other controlled substances).
4. Applicants found not guilty of any crime by reason of mental illness will
not be permitted access to the NCIC/VCIN system. Applicants that
have been charged with a criminal offense where the offense was
disposed of in any manner due to mental illness will not be
permitted access to the NCIC/VCIN system.
5. Access will be denied to any applicant with prior serious

abuses/violations of NCIC/VCIN systems when it has been determined
that access by the applicant would not be in the public’s best interest.
6. Access will be denied to any applicant listed on the Terror Watch List.
7. Access will be denied to any applicant listed on the Violent Gang File.
D. PERSONNEL ASSIGNMENTS
1. Personnel assignments will be made at the discretion of the
Communications Unit Manager pursuant to staffing needs.
2. Requests for transfer/reassignment will be regulated by Hampton
Police Division Policy and Procedure 641, “Position Assignment
Management.”
E. ROSTER / SHIFT MANAGEMENT
1. Rosters
a. Rosters will be maintained a minimum of 3 months in advance
of the current month.
b. Rosters will accurately project real-time staffing projections
including leave, training, etc.
2. Assignments
a. Personnel assignments will be noted on the rosters as
described above. Daily shift assignments may be modified by
the on-duty shift supervisor pursuant to staffing needs.
3. Meal Breaks
a. Meal break schedules will be coordinated by the on-duty shift
supervisor.
b. They will consist of one 45-minute break per employee.
c. Employees may leave the center during meal breaks.
d. Meal breaks may be canceled at the discretion of the on-duty
supervisor when necessary to ensure staffing for emergency
situations. The on-duty supervisor may resume meal breaks
when allowable.
e. Meal breaks will not be authorized to occur during the first and
last hour of each shift.
F. LEAVE SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL PROCEDURES
1. Time off Requests (TOR - other than sick leave)

a. All Communications personnel will follow the Hampton City
Policy, Chapter (7); Leave & Absence from Work in the
Personnel Policies manual.
b. Requests for time off may be submitted up to ninety (90) days
in advance for leave.
c. Any requests for time off beyond ninety (90) days must be
approved by the Communications Manager prior to entering the

TOR into Kronos.
d. Submitting time off does not guarantee approval. Requests will
be reviewed prior to approval, to ensure minimum staffing levels
for the unit are maintained.
e. TOR’s beyond ninety (90) days in advance will not be approved
unless authorized by the Communications Manager.
f. If an employee is transferred to another shift and leave had
been approved prior to the transfer, the approved leave will still
be honored.
2. Sick Leave
a. Communications personnel requesting pre-approved sick leave
will notify their supervisor and submit a TOR through the Kronos
System. Requests for extended leave/FMLA will be submitted
and processed pursuant to City Policy.
b. Communications personnel calling in sick for their shift
(workday, on-call, and scheduled mandatory & voluntary
overtime) will need to contact the on-duty Communications
Supervisor a minimum of three (3) hours prior to their report for
duty time. The employee must call on a recorded
Communications line.
c. Communications personnel may be required to bring in medical
documentation to approve sick leave pursuant to City Policy if
there is reason to believe that the employee is abusing sick
leave.
d. Communications personnel desiring to leave their work
assignment and use any type of leave to cover their absence
are required to communicate the request in person to the on-
duty supervisor. They must receive confirmation of approval
from the on-duty supervisor prior to departing their assignment.
G. WAE Dispatchers
1. Certification
a. WAE Dispatchers must maintain all certifications necessary to
complete their respective job functions in the Hampton Public
Safety Communications Center.
b. The Hampton Public Safety Communications Training
Coordinator will coordinate and track all WAE Dispatch
certification and recertification requirements.
2. Duty Requirements
a. All WAE Dispatchers are required to complete a minimum of 36
duty hours in the Hampton Public Safety Communications
Center each calendar quarter to maintain eligibility unless
excused in writing by the Support Services Commander.
b. The individual Communications Shift Supervisors will
coordinate, track, and report all WAE assignments for their
individual shifts. They will submit all WAE duty data to the
Public Safety Communications Training Coordinator by the end
of each month for tracking and file maintenance.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
11/29/11
POLICE CENTRAL RECORDS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
ALL MANUALS P&P # 1406 dated 02/01/01 and Chief's Directive 1406.1 dated 04/17/07.
I. PURPOSE:
To establish the role of the Central Records Unit, and to set forth responsibilities and
guidelines for the operation of the Unit.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division will maintain a Central Records Unit that continuously
conducts those records-keeping and permit issuance activities basic to the
operational and informational needs of the Division. This will be done in compliance
with applicable laws and ordinances. This policy applies to all records and permits
including those stored in computerized files which are subject to the provisions
relating to security, access, and release of information.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Compliance with Law
1. The maintenance and release of all information will comply with all
relevant Federal, State, and local laws at all time. Any questions in this
regard shall be referred to a Records Unit supervisor, who may in turn
seek guidance from the City or Commonwealth Attorney in determining
what information is to be maintained and released. Administrative
Records will be maintained as required by law and/or Division Policy.
B. The Central Records Unit shall maintain the “OneSolution” Records

Management System (RMS), an electronic repository of records and
information to include but not limited to:
1. Incident Reports – reports submitted by Division members and Animal

Control documenting the facts and circumstances surrounding a crime
or event (IBR reports).
2. Traffic Accident Reports – officer's written account of the facts and

circumstances involved in a motor vehicle accident.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1406 – POLICE CENTRAL RECORDS Page 2 of 7
3. Warrants, Protective Orders and Summonses – items authorizing

arrest of a subject and/or summoning an individual to court.
4. Arrests – persons arrested on criminal or traffic charges.
5. Names – A Master Name Index File is maintained through the Records

Management System. This is a name relational database that is linked
to all modules within the system. It serves as a cross reference within
the database that includes persons named as victims, witnesses,
suspects, persons wanted or arrested, listed in traffic accident reports
and field contact cards.
6. Property file – to include stolen and recovered property.
7. Vehicle file – to include any vehicle information listed in any of the

other reporting modules.
8. Virginia Uniform Summonses – all traffic and criminal summonses

issued by Division members and Animal Control.
9. Parking Tickets – all parking tickets issued by Division members.
10. Field Contact Cards – lists information on Field Contact Cards

submitted by officers.
11. Automated Criminal History Files – files maintained on individuals

arrested in the City Hampton or by any law enforcement agency
pursuant to warrants from the City of Hampton. This module includes
at a minimum personal information and photographs. Fingerprint
cards associated with these files are kept in digital format in the
LIVESCAN and AFIS systems. Inked Palm Print cards are kept in
hard copy files.)
a. Criminal histories are given an automated sequential

identification number and cross-referenced by the names
module. Only one number is issued to each name and each
subsequent arrest of that person will be added to the existing
file. (Individuals who are arrested that have older hard copy files
are added to the automated files and the hard copy file
removed to assure they have only one identification number
and file.)
b. In accordance with state law, criminal history files of juveniles

in the automated files will be identified separately from those
of adults and access will be strictly controlled.
c. Deletion of a record or any portion of a record shall be in

compliance with a court order for expungement of records or
Commonwealth of Virginia Library Retention Regulations.
C. Also maintained in the Central Records Unit are hard copies of Criminal
History Files prior to 1999. These files are maintained on individuals arrested
in the City Hampton or by any law enforcement agency on warrants from the
City of Hampton. These files contain at a minimum: photographs if available
and fingerprint cards.
1. Criminal histories are filed by a sequenced identification number and

cross-referenced by name. Only one number is issued to each name.
a. Deletion of a record, or any portion of the record, shall be in

compliance with a court order for expungement of records or
Commonwealth of Virginia Library Retention Regulations.
2. Criminal history information transcripts can be obtained from the State

Police through VCIN for law enforcement purposes only.
3. In accordance with state law, hard copies of criminal history files of

juveniles will be maintained separately from those of adults and access
will be strictly controlled.
a. Juvenile criminal history files will be maintained pursuant to

state code.
b. Police officers will be allowed access to hard copies of juvenile

criminal history files for identification and/or investigative
purposes on a need to know basis.
D. Records Maintenance
1. Security
a. All records will be maintained in such a manner as to ensure

security and privacy while allowing for constant updating,
retrieval, and distribution.
b. Only authorized persons will be permitted access to the

Records and Warrants Unit.
c. Original records will not be removed from the Central Records

Unit without express permission from the Support Services
Commander or their designee. When this is authorized, the
person taking custody of the items, and the date, shall be noted
and placed in the record. Appropriate notation should also be
made upon return of said records.
d. In the event a record is found to be missing, a Records

Supervisor shall be notified immediately. The supervisor shall
promptly initiate an investigation into such matters, and forward
a written report to the Support Services Branch Commander.
All avenues will be exhausted in attempting to locate missing
records. If items cannot be found, the Support Services Branch
Commander will be notified in writing by the supervisor
involved.
e. The introduction of outside/unauthorized disks or software into

any agency owned computer in the Central Records Unit is
strictly prohibited.
2. Privacy
a. Police Record Information shall only be disseminated to:
(1) Those authorized by Virginia State Code 19.2-389.
(2) Authorized officers or members of law enforcement

agencies.
(3) Agencies authorized by state or federal statute or

executive orders to conduct investigations that determine
employment or security clearance eligibility.
(4) Agencies of any political subdivision of the state, for

purposes of determining suitability for public
employment, license, or permit.
(5) Any individual or agency authorized by Court order or

rules.
(6) Service companies as defined by the Code of Virginia.

(7) Criminal History information from any of the Divisions

computerized systems shall be used only for the Law
Enforcement purpose for which the request was made.
Dissemination of such information outside of it’s
intended Law Enforcement use will result in disciplinary
action, and possible criminal prosecution.
(8) Social Services Personnel with appropriate ID will be

allowed to obtain Criminal Histories only for the
purpose of placing foster children. A purpose code of X
must be entered with these transactions. All
disseminations to Social Services must be logged as a
secondary dissemination with DSS 63.1-56.01 in the
ORI field.
.
3. Any request for records information that is questionable is to be
referred to a Records Unit supervisor.
a. The supervisor may request in writing the source of the

authority permitting access to this information.
b. If necessary, the Records Supervisor will consult with the City

or Commonwealth Attorney prior to the release of any
information requested.
c. All copies made of police records will be made in compliance

with the Virginia Privacy and Security Act (VA Code Section
2.1-377 through 382).
4. Coordination with other agencies
a. Through established liaison activities with the Courts, records

will reflect the current status of charges, both pending and tried.
Criminal dispositions will be recorded and become part of the
record.
b. Through established procedures, the Sheriff's Office will

forward fingerprints and photographs of adult suspects charged
with felonies and Class 1 and 2 misdemeanors.
c. Juveniles will be finger printed and photographed by the

Forensic Unit, with assistance from the investigating officer.
5. Retention and Destruction of Records
a. The Central Records Unit will adhere to the Retention Schedule

as set forth by the Library of Virginia, “Retention and Disposition
Schedule”, which is consistent with all legal and administrative
requirements.
b. Destruction of records will be done in a manner that is

consistent with all Federal, State and local laws, especially
those pertaining to privacy.
c. Confidential personal records will never be placed with general

refuse that is not disposed of in a secure manner.
6. Information Dissemination, Fee Collection and Processing
a. Upon request from entities or individuals that are legally entitled

to such information, a copy of the front page of a Crime or
Incident Report will be provided for a fee. As set forth in VA
State Code 15.1, certain confidential information will be blocked
out.
b. Drivers, owners, their insurers for same will likewise be provided

with a copy of the Form FR-300 for a fee.
c. All other information contained in these reports is considered

investigative in nature (VA State Code 2.1-342) and is thus
exempt from disclosure. Individuals who request additional
information will be referred to the investigating officer or, where
appropriate, to the City Attorney.
d. IN NO CASE WILL ANY FURTHER INFORMATION BE

RELEASED WITHOUT THE PERMISSION OF THE
INVESTIGATING OFFICER OR THE COMMANDER OF THE
RECORDS UNIT.
e. Only authorized Records personnel will collect the appropriate

fees as set forth in this Policy.
f. Upon receipt of any fee, personnel shall immediately enter the

transaction in the cash register or appropriate log. Receipts will
be provided for all funds collected. Fees will remain in the form
in which they were received (i.e., cash or check). No checks will
be exchanged for cash for any citizen or city employee.
g. All monies will be kept in a designated secure place. A Records

Supervisor or his/her designee will review transactions.
h. The City of Hampton may conduct additional internal audits

when appropriate. Central Records personnel shall cooperate
fully with any such action.
i. Monies collected by the Central Records Unit will be

transported to the City Treasurer's Office on a regular basis.
This will be done by a sworn officer whenever possible. At no
time will a single civilian employee transport a deposit.
j. The Records Unit will generate a monthly accounting report. A

copy will be sent to Professional Standards and Accreditation.
7. Records information shall be accessible to Operations and

Investigative personnel at all times. Information Center personnel will
have access to all Central Records Information after-hours.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
07/20/2022
DISPATCH OPERATIONS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy will be to establish the proper operational procedures to be
followed while answering calls for service and dispatching units.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to enter into the computer aided
dispatching system all citizen requests for assistance and all officer initiated actions as
prescribed in the following procedures.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. COMPUTER AIDED DISPATCH (CAD)
1. CAD NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS: The Communications Unit Commander will

be responsible for assigning all new police employees proper CAD numbers.
He The Commander will also be responsible for changing or updating CAD
numbers as needed to enhance the operations of the system.
2. UNIT STATUS: Police units will be added into the computer during shift
change or at other times which requires such action.
a. Any status change of a unit can be administered by the

Telecommunicator responsible for the monitoring, updating or
dispatching calls for service on the assigned talk group.
b. The status of a unit can be returned to an available status in one of the

following two manners:
(1) If a unit is out of service on a self initiated call, the

Telecommunicator would simply mark them back in service with
no disposition needed.
(2) If the unit was committed to a call for service, a disposition must
be provided by the unit in order to clear the complaint.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1408 – DISPATCH OPERATIONS Page 2 of 10
(3) If the complaint was dispatched via the MDT (Mobile Data
Terminal) see Section J, #2 of this policy.
3. RADIO CHANNEL IDENTIFICATION: Police radio channels are identified

automatically by way of a timed recording broadcast which is mute to the
dispatcher.
4. NATURE CODES: The CAD system routes calls for service by location and
Nature-code. These areas must be populated before a call for service could
can be dispatched.
5. MALFUNCTIONING EQUIPMENT: In the event of a malfunction or failure of

any equipment in the Communications Center, the Communications
Supervisor will notify the appropriate agency or person to correct the failure.
Documentation will be made in the ledger book of repairs. In the event of a
major malfunction or failure, the Commander will be notified immediately by
phone and an incident page sent.
6. POWER FAILURE: In the event of a power failure or computer failure, during

which time the CAD system becomes inoperable, complaints will be handled
manually on the appropriate forms until the computer system is fully restored.
All manual complaints will then be entered into the CAD system by the
Communications Supervisor or their designee on the shift that is on duty at
the time the computer system is restored.
B. USE OF 4-DIGIT NUMBERS TO IDENTIFY UNITS
1. In an effort to assist the dispatchers in making entries into the computer and
to enhance the efficiency of our communications system, four digits will be
used to identify patrol districts during radio transmission. The first number will
be the shift number. For example:
a. Night Shift will use a 1000 series designation: An officer working

District 201 during the night shift will contact Communications by
stating, "1201 to Communications".
b. Day Shift will use a 2000 designation: An officer working District 201
during the Day Shift will contact Communications by stating, "2201 to
Communications".
2. Units will retain their four (4) digit identifier throughout their shift, even when
"cross dispatched" to another district.
3. The following alphanumeric identifiers will be utilized by officers not

working a patrol district, when identifying themselves on the radio. All
alphanumeric identifiers will be used following the officers assigned CAD
number. (ex: 123Echo).
ALPHA UNIT VERBAL

DESIGNATION IDENTIFIER
A - ALPHA OFF DUTY CAD# - ALPHA
C - CHARLIE CIVILIAN CAD# - CHARLIE
D - DELTA DETECTIVES CAD# - DELTA
E - ECHO EXTRA DUTY CAD# - ECHO
F - FOXTROT FORENSIC (CSU) CAD# - FOXTROT
G – GOLF GANG UNIT CAD# - GOLF
H – HOTEL HOMELAND SEC. CAD# - HOTEL
K - KILO COMM. RELATIONS CAD# - KILO
L - LIMA LIMITED DUTY/ CAD# - LIMA
SPECIAL
ASSIGNMENT
P - PAPA PROFESSIONAL CAD# - PAPA
STANDARDS/ADMIN
UNITS
R - ROMEO SCHOOL CAD# - ROMEO
RESOURCE
OFFICER
S - SIERRA SIU CAD# - SIERRA
4
T - TANGO SWAT/MRT/CNT CAD# - TANGO
(Tactical & Crisis
Negotiation Teams)
Z – ZULU Real Time Information CAD# - ZULU
Center (RTIC)
Other agency’s officers utilizing HPD assigned Channels will use assigned
alphanumeric prefixes and their agency assigned number to identify
themselves when transmitting on Hampton Channels. (ex: Tango1234 would
signify officer 1234 from Thomas Nelson Community College.)
Dispatchers and Officers will be provided a list of interoperable agency

identifiers as they become available.
C. DISPATCHING POLICE UNITS
1. Call Takers, Dispatchers and Officers are NOT AUTHORIZED to disregard a

complaint of any kind. If the authenticity of a complaint is questionable, it will
be brought to the attention of the Communications Supervisor immediately.
2. The Communications Supervisors and Commanders are the only personnel

authorized to make discretionary decisions as to whether or not a unit will be
dispatched in response to any complaint or request for assistance received in
the Communications Center.
3. Dispatchers shall not hold or delay dispatch to the maximum time period
allowed when other units are available in the immediate proximity. Units shall
be dispatched in the following priority:
a) Patrol Units
b) Warrant/Community Relations Units
c) Investigative Services Units
d) Administrative Units.
4. When a complainant requests to see an officer, Communications will note

that request on the initial complaint and the dispatcher will advise the
responding officer to see the complainant.
5. Once Communications assigns a call for service to an officer via MDT, and it
becomes evident that the officer has not acknowledged the call or marked en-
route to the call within a 5-minute time frame, the CAD system will generate a
visual signal to Communications making them aware the call has not been
addressed. Communications will verbally contact the officer and make them
aware of the assigned call. The officer will acknowledge via radio and handle
the call appropriately through MDT operation.
It is the responsibility of Public Safety Communications personnel to ensure

that all calls for service are handled in a timely fashion. This includes call
handled via MDT.
6. ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATIONS:
Alternative communications devices such as cell phones, cell phone

texting, voice over internet and other similar technologies shall not be
used for dispatching police units on complaints or for clearing
complaints, except during times of complete radio failure. Complaints
shall be dispatched via police radio, recorded telephone lines or MDT so a
record of the communication exists. Should radio failure occur, units will be
dispatched via cell phone or landline.
D. DEFERRED DISPATCH
Deferred Dispatch is used to defer calls-for-service, from being dispatched to patrol

units when the assistance required can be delivered by other means such as
sending the dispatch to the Division Integrated Criminal Apprehension Program
(ICAP) officer.
1. Citizen's calls for assistance are many times just requests for advice,
directions, information, a remedy for a minor problem, or request for a minor
incident report. Deferred Dispatch may be approved for many low priority
calls.
a. Techniques of deferring calls-for-service from being dispatched to

patrol units allows the Division to utilize its resources more
economically while still providing our citizens with a proper level of
police service.
b. The availability of patrol units to answer more serious situations would

be enhanced through deferred dispatching techniques.
c. Patrol officers will be able to direct more attention towards directed

patrol activities and investigations.
E. CALL PRIORITIZATION:
1. Call prioritization procedures have been established to evaluate and rank

calls for police service by degree of severity. Call prioritization allows officers
to be more responsive to high priority calls. The Police Division recognizes
three levels of prioritization.
2. The three levels of Call Prioritization are:
Level 1 High - Dispatch Immediately

Level 2 Normal - Dispatch within 3-5 minutes
Level 3 Low - Dispatch within 5-15 minutes
a. LEVEL 1: HIGH - IMMEDIATE DISPATCH
(1) Threat to life or great danger of serious injury or major property

damage.
(2) Active felony, violent misdemeanor, or situations which may

result in either.
(3) Any crime in progress or crime scene where the suspect may
still be present or close by.
(4) Accident or illness that may result in substantial personal harm

or death.
(5) Any unusual incident that demands an immediate response.
b. LEVEL 2: NORMAL
(1) Any calls which are not of an emergency nature, but which
should be dispatched due to the nature of the request for
service shall be handled through standard operating
procedures.
(2) Non-active felony, misdemeanor, or any other incident that is

not in progress or just occurred with the suspect in close
proximity and does not require an immediate investigation.
c. LEVEL 3: LOW
Calls in which a sustained delay in response would not have an

adverse impact on the incident or reduce the quality of service to the
community. Such calls may be delayed for a period not to exceed 15
minutes prior to dispatch or notification of patrol supervisor if no officer
is available. It is not intended that all Level 3 calls be delayed for the
maximum period of time specified.
(1) In-house and telephone reports.
(2) Officer initiated calls (i.e., appointment, personal)
(3) Any incident that involves a minor violation or offense (i.e.,

noise complaints, loitering, etc.)
d. All calls for service requiring the presence of an officer will be

dispatched as soon as a unit is available. The dispatcher should
remember that circumstances may change the priority level and act
accordingly. It is of utmost importance to keep the complainant
advised of the status of the call for service.
3. Holding Calls for Service
a. Dispatchers are responsible for making timely notification to police

supervisors when calls for service are holding. Communications
Supervisors are responsible for ensuring dispatchers make timely
notifications as noted below.
b. Calls for service that are not immediately dispatched (holding) will be
relayed pursuant to the following guidelines regardless of priority level:
(1) The on-duty dispatcher will immediately notify the first level field
supervisor (i.e. Corporal / Acting Corporal) when any complaint
cannot be immediately dispatched.
(2) The on-duty dispatcher will notify the next level field supervisor
(i.e. Sergeant / Acting Sergeant) of a holding complaint when it
has been holding for ten minutes from the time it was received.
(3) The on-duty dispatcher will notify the on-duty Watch

Commander (Platoon Lieutenant) or Staff Duty Officer when
any complaint has been holding 30 minutes from the time the
call was received (20 minutes after Sergeant / Acting Sergeant
notification.)
c. Phone messages not immediately dispatched (holding) will be relayed

pursuant to the following guidelines:
(1) Call takers receiving phone messages for officers will advise the
citizen of the potential delay in response based on the officer’s
status and that the message will be relayed to the officer as
soon as possible.
(2) The on-duty dispatcher will immediately notify the intended

recipient of the message as soon as it is received.
(3) The on-duty dispatcher will notify the officer’s first level field
supervisor (i.e. Corporal / Acting Corporal) of a holding
message when it has been holding for thirty (30) minutes from
the time it was received.
d. The on-duty dispatcher will add holding notifications to the notes in

each associated CAD event record.
F. Dispatched Personnel: Personnel dispatched on a call for service will be obligated to

handle the call and take appropriate reports. Dispatched personnel will not refer the
complaint to an alternative handling procedure unless directed to do so by the Patrol
Supervisor
1. Communications Personnel: Communications personnel will have the

authority and responsibility to determine the type of call and priority code to
be assigned, determine unit available, and dispatch the appropriate unit.
Communications personnel will, upon the dispatching of calls for service,
provide business name information (if appropriate). Once the call is
dispatched it will be incumbent on the dispatched unit to handle the call

appropriately. Communications personnel will make every attempt to
eliminate or reduce cross-dispatching of units. However, if another unit is in
the immediate proximity and available for call, it may be dispatched to an
adjoining district to assure prompt response. It is the responsibility of the
individual dispatcher to keep the Communications Supervisor and the
appropriate Patrol Supervisor appraised of any calls for service that are
holding.
2. Communications Supervisor: The Communications Supervisor will have

authority to insure that all complaints are answered promptly. He/She will
have the authority to direct vehicles from one section of the city to another in
order that waiting calls may be answered with reasonable time limits. In the
event of a temporary reassignment from one sector to another by the
Communications Supervisor, it will be his/her responsibility to insure that the
appropriate Road Supervisor is notified of his/her decision. In the event that
there is not a unit available to respond to waiting complaints, the
Communications Supervisor will insure that proper notation is made on the
complaint log, and the road supervisor is notified.
G. EMERGENCY MESSAGES
The Hampton Police Division will accept and utilized all available means to deliver
legitimate emergency messages received through VCIN/NCIC:
1. ACCEPTANCE: The Communications Section, upon receiving requests for

the delivery of messages, will verify the status of the request.
Emergency messages may include: notification of deceased persons, serious

illness or attempts to locate missing persons.
2. DELIVERY: Once a request is received, every effort will be made to deliver

the message.
a. The message will be delivered by Division Officers. At no time will

Communications personnel attempt to deliver messages by phone.
b. Notification concerning death messages should always be tactfully

delivered in person by a police officer with the assistance of the police
chaplain, if available.
c. If all attempts to make delivery of the message are unsuccessful, then

a note may be left at the address to contact the Officer or efforts to
deliver may continue throughout the tour of duty or into the next shift.
3. Specific incidents will be handled on an individual basis at the discretion of

and in a manner determined by the Communications Section Supervisor.
H. PREMISE ALERT
When information becomes available that identifies locations that may be hazardous
to public safety personnel, that information should be entered into a “CAD Premise
Alert”
1. All premise alerts must be approved by the Communications Commander

prior to entry.
Once entered, the information will be forwarded to the Police and Fire Division
through a memo (electronic email) for their distribution.
2. “Premise Alerts” may have an expiration date included or be automatically

renewed at six-month intervals, after the information is verified and a new
memo is approved.
3. The Communications Unit will notify the originating source of the initial alert
two weeks prior to the expiration, for a status update or deletion.
I. MDT DEFINED
1. MDT and MCT are used interchangeably; one standing for Mobile Data
Terminal and the other, Mobile Computer Terminal.
2. “Silent Dispatch” is a term used for handling calls for service without
the use of voice communications. There are many calls that the
Hampton Police Division responds to daily that could fit this criteria:
a. Calls that due to their nature are low in priority

b. Calls that necessitate a one-unit response
c. Calls that do not require patrol supervisory notification
Not everyone has MDT availability therefore complete silent dispatch

may not be an option.
J. THE DISPATCH PROCESS
1. When it is determined that a call for service can be handled silently, the
dispatcher will electronically dispatch the officer via MDT to respond. The
officer responding will mark en-route and arrive via MDT.
a. Officers that have units equipped with a MDT will have calls for
service that occurs in their district assigned to them. This could result
in calls for service being held.
b. It is the responsibility of the officer to keep his/her supervisor aware of

holding calls they are unable to address.
c. Officers may notify their supervisor of the holding calls for service.
Once notified, the supervisor may redirect the calls for service to
other units. The Officer is not authorized to redirect or re-dispatch
complaints.
d. Communications personnel shall ensure calls routed via MDT are

acknowledged by the assigned unit.
2. Any call handled silently needs to remain silent unless it escalates to a

higher priority. Calls handled over the radio will stay on the radio.
3. Officers who are assigned calls via MDT will utilize the equipment to mark
en-route, on scene, add notes if necessary, obtain IBR Numbers and clear
the call they were dispatched to.
4. The MDT will not be utilized while the vehicle is in operation. Officers
stopping vehicles or persons shall verbally mark out of service.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
07/20/2022
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
II. POLICY:
III. PROCEDURE:




APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE

dispatcher.
can be dispatched.


a. Night Shift will use a 1000 series designation: An officer working

Communications".

ALPHA UNIT VERBAL

SPECIAL
ASSIGNMENT
STANDARDS/ADMIN
UNITS
RESOURCE
OFFICER
4
(Tactical & Crisis
Negotiation Teams)
Center (RTIC)



a) Patrol Units

route to the call within a 5-minute time frame, the CAD system will generate a

handled via MDT.

texting, voice over internet and other similar technologies shall not be
used for dispatching police units on complaints or for clearing
complaints, except during times of complete radio failure. Complaints
shall be dispatched via police radio, recorded telephone lines or MDT so a
record of the communication exists. Should radio failure occur, units will be
dispatched via cell phone or landline.

(ICAP) officer.
calls.

police service.





damage.

result in either.

or death.
b. LEVEL 2: NORMAL
procedures.

c. LEVEL 3: LOW



3. Holding Calls for Service
a. Dispatchers are responsible for making timely notification to police

supervisors when calls for service are holding. Communications
Supervisors are responsible for ensuring dispatchers make timely
notifications as noted below.
b. Calls for service that are not immediately dispatched (holding) will be
relayed pursuant to the following guidelines regardless of priority level:
(1) The on-duty dispatcher will immediately notify the first level field
supervisor (i.e. Corporal / Acting Corporal) when any complaint
cannot be immediately dispatched.
(2) The on-duty dispatcher will notify the next level field supervisor
(i.e. Sergeant / Acting Sergeant) of a holding complaint when it
has been holding for ten minutes from the time it was received.
(3) The on-duty dispatcher will notify the on-duty Watch

Commander (Platoon Lieutenant) or Staff Duty Officer when
any complaint has been holding 30 minutes from the time the
call was received (20 minutes after Sergeant / Acting Sergeant
notification.)
c. Phone messages not immediately dispatched (holding) will be relayed

pursuant to the following guidelines:
(1) Call takers receiving phone messages for officers will advise the
citizen of the potential delay in response based on the officer’s
status and that the message will be relayed to the officer as
soon as possible.
(2) The on-duty dispatcher will immediately notify the intended

recipient of the message as soon as it is received.
(3) The on-duty dispatcher will notify the officer’s first level field
supervisor (i.e. Corporal / Acting Corporal) of a holding
message when it has been holding for thirty (30) minutes from
the time it was received.
d. The on-duty dispatcher will add holding notifications to the notes in

each associated CAD event record.

Supervisor


holding.




the message.




H. PREMISE ALERT
Alert”

prior to entry.

memo is approved.
I. MDT DEFINED

b. Calls that necessitate a one-unit response


complaints.


SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
05/07/15
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
II. POLICY:
III. PROCEDURE:




APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE

dispatcher.
can be dispatched.


a. Night Shift will use an 1000 series designation: An officer working

Communications".

ALPHA UNIT VERBAL

SPECIAL
ASSIGNMENT
STANDARDS/ADMIN
UNITS
RESOURCE
OFFICER
4
(Tactical & Crisis
Negotiation Teams)
Center (RTIC)



a) Patrol Units

route to the call within a 5 minute time frame, the CAD system will generate a

handled via MDT.

texting, blackberry, voice over internet and other similar technologies
shall not be used for dispatching police units on complaints or for
clearing complaints, except during times of complete radio failure.
Complaints shall be dispatched via police radio, recorded telephone lines or
MDT so a record of the communication exists. Should radio failure occur,
units will be dispatched via cell phone or landline.

(ICAP) officer.
calls.

police service.





damage.

result in either.

or death.
b. LEVEL 2: NORMAL
procedures.

c. LEVEL 3: LOW




Supervisor


holding.




the message.




H. PREMISE ALERT
Alert”

prior to entry.

memo is approved.
I. MDT DEFINED

b. Calls that necessitate a one unit response


complaints.


SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
04/04/17
DIVISION ISSUED CELLULAR
MOBILE TELEPHONES
OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
Members are encouraged to use agency issued cellular mobile telephones to enhance
communication with the community, promote efficiency in their work, enable a quick
response in emergency situations, and enhance the safety of the members and
citizens. The purpose of this directive is to set forth guidelines to be followed by all
personnel pertaining to the use of agency issued cellular telephones.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division provides select sworn and civilian members mobile
phones to enhance officer safety, efficiency, and effectiveness in the performance of
their duties. Mobile phones are issued in order to allow employees a means by which
they can communicate with others, access city e-mail, investigate crimes, upload
photos, and research topics (via the Internet) relevant to their assignment. Mobile
phones are not to be used in lieu of radio transmissions, dispatching or clearing
complaints.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. GENERAL:
1. Members will not be required to check/respond to messages, voicemail,

or email while not on duty.
2. The Division issued mobile phone is to be used only for work related
purposes. The issued phone is department property and as such, is
open to inspection. The issued phone will never be used for accessing
any form of social media, unless related to a work assignment.
3. The Division issued mobile phone will be locked with a passcode. The
passcode will be provided, upon request, to the Support Services
Division Commander or his designee.
4. The iCloud account used on the Division issued mobile phone will be set
to the Members city email address.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1410 – DIVISION ISSUED MOBILE PHONES Page 2 of 3
5. Members are responsible with complying with all HPD Rules and
Regulations and all local, state and federal laws, including the Fair Labor
and Standards Act when using the Division issued mobile phone.
A. LIMITS ON PRIVACY AND SPEECH:
1. No Member shall have any expectation of privacy in any message, file,

image, or data created, sent, retrieved, received, stored on or posted
utilizing the Division issued mobile phone.
2. Electronic communications made on a Division issued device should

never be considered private, confidential, or secure.
3. All messages, files, images, and data created, sent, or retrieved over the
Internet (cloud or stored) or by any user are the property of the Division.
4. The Division has the right to monitor all aspects of its information
infrastructure including, but not limited to:
a. Social media visited by users
b. Material downloaded or uploaded by users
c. Photographs and videos downloaded or uploaded by users
d. Email sent or received by users
5. Such monitoring may occur at any time, without notice, and without the
user’s permission. In addition, except for exemptions under the
Freedom of Information Act (FOIA), electronic records, including a
message, file, image, or data created, sent, retrieved, received, or
posted utilizing the Division’s electronic communications tools, may be
subject to FOIA and, therefore, may be available for public
dissemination.
B. MAINTENANCE OF MOBILE PHONES:
1. Members that have been issued a Division issued mobile phone shall
provide reasonable care and security for the device.
2. Members are required to keep their Division issued mobile phone in the
protective case that was provided with the device.
3. Damaged or missing Division issued mobile phones will be immediately

reported to the member’s immediate supervisor and a loss packet will be
generated per policy.
C. EVIDENCE AND PHOTOGRAPHS PROCEDURES:
1. Members with Division issued mobile phones may use their device to
capture photographs of crime scenes. Members shall never take
photographs of anything displayed on an MDT monitor, or any computer
currently displaying confidential information.
P&P #1410 – DIVISION ISSUED MOBILE PHONES Page 3 of 3
a. Members must utilize the Axon Capture application to properly

tag, associate the proper IBR, and to upload all photographs to
Evidence.com
b. Members are required to download and utilize the Axon View and
Axon Capture apps.
2. Officers with Division issued mobile phones shall use their device to
access their BWC as opposed to the smart-device that was issued with
the BWC.
a. Officers must utilize the Axon View application to connect their

Division Issued mobile phone to their Axon BWC.
b. Once a Bluetooth connection has been established, Officers may

test the Live View of their BWC, review the status of their BWC,
and categorize videos that have been recorded.
3. No member shall knowingly post on the Internet or Social Media, or

share outside approved Law Enforcement sources, official photographs,
video images, audio files or text documents that belong to the Division
without the expressed written permission of the Commander of
Professional Standards. (For additional information see Division Rule &
Regulation 4.19.)
P&P #1410 – DIVISION ISSUED MOBILE PHONES Page 4 of
3
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
02/07/05
WARRANT SERVICE OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish a procedure for the disposition of warrants
that come into the possession of the Police Division.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division shall maintain an accurate information base and filing
system whereby warrant and wanted person information may be readily available to
operational personnel. The Police Warrant Section shall be responsible for ensuring
that all available and necessary means are employed for the service of outstanding
warrants.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Warrants:
1. When a warrant is received from the magistrate, it is processed by a

warrant clerk. All warrants are given a number. This number and other
pertinent information including charge, date of offense and the
complainant’s name is entered into the Division’s computerized warrant
file (the Pistol 2000 Records Management System). When applicable,
warrants are placed on VCIN and NCIC.
2. A warrant letter will be mailed when appropriate. Exceptions to warrant

mailing may include but not be limited to: domestic situations, life
threatening situations with weapons involved, or in those instances
where the suspect may flee the jurisdiction.
3. Warrants are assigned to warrant officers by districts.
4. All attempts to serve as well as final disposition, will be documented on

disposition forms inside the warrant. Final dispositions will be entered in
the computer file.
5. All unexecuted warrants will be purged within the time limit and manner
as prescribed by state law.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1416 – WARRANT SERVICE Page 2 of 4
6. When the officer obtains a warrant it will be their responsibility to see

that the case number is affixed to the warrant. They will also make
every effort to obtain identifiers needed in Procedure, Outstanding
Warrants, Number 1 of this policy.
7. When warrants with case numbers are served, the arresting officer will
submit an addendum on the arrest and forward it to the Case Quality
Control Unit for case file updating.
8. When a warrant is served as a summons, the executed copy of the

warrant/summons and the disposition form shall be completed and
turned in to the Warrants basket at the Information Center counter at the
end of the serving officers shift.
B. Outstanding Warrants:
1. When an outstanding arrest warrant is received at Headquarters from

the Magistrate, it is processed by a warrant clerk for immediate service.
The warrant(s) are given to a warrant officer or detective as soon as the
warrant information has been entered into the Division’s computerized
warrant file. A warrant case number is assigned and the warrant is
placed on VCIN or NCIC, depending upon the nature of charges. For
NCIC, the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office must approve for extradition.
The following minimal identifiers must be provided: Complete Name (to
include aliases), Race, Sex, Height, Weight, Hair color, Offense code,
date of warrant, case number (IBR), and extradition limitations. There
also has to be minimally one numeric identifier available such as DOB,
FBI number, military number, Social Security number, drivers license
number, license plate number or VIN number with vehicle description.
2. Prior to turning a felony warrant in to Records for NCIC/VCIN entry, the

officer obtaining the warrant will complete section “A” of the Review of
Pending Arrest form (extradition information) and attach it with the
warrant(s).
3. When an outstanding warrant is received from the Magistrate with

information that the subject(s) are attempting to flee the jurisdiction, an
officer may attempt warrant service immediately without processing the
warrant through Records. If the attempt fails, the warrant must be then
processed through Records to be placed on the computer.
4. When necessary for other jurisdiction to attempt service on in-file felony

warrants, the following procedure will be followed:
a. If an address outside Hampton is known and it is not practical for

our investigating officer to try to serve the warrant, a facsimile
(FAX) can be sent to that jurisdiction, preferably to a named
recipient.
b. Should an officer outside Hampton locate or wish to attempt

service on a suspect, we will send them a FAX of the warrant

along with relevant information.
c. The facsimile copy will be attached to the original warrant and

forwarded to the Courts as previously established.
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
INVEST TECHNIQUES
D. Procedure for Filing Warrants:
1. The Division’s computerized warrant file is maintained for availability of

warrant service information and easy access to felony or misdemeanor
warrants by Communications Section personnel.
2. When all the warrant information is available, the warrant will be placed
on VCIN and NCIC when applicable.
E. Warrant/Wanted Persons File:
1. Information shall be entered into the VCIN and NCIC Systems in

accordance with regional, state and federal guidelines. Generally, the
following criteria will serve as a basis for entering information into these
systems:
VCIN/NCIC – Individuals for whom a felony or serious

misdemeanor warrant is outstanding may also be entered. Before
an entry into the NCIC System is made a determination must be
made by the Commonwealth’s Attorney that extradition will be
authorized for the individual. All Felonies are entered in
VCIN/NCIC specifying:
a. Full extradition
b. Limited extradition
c. Extradition – surrounding states only
d. No extradition
e. Pending extradition (suspect already in custody and is
awaiting extradition back to our agency)
2. As information is received from other jurisdictions it will be filed in the

in/out teletype book. This reference book shall contain all teletypes
which have been directed to the Division, any area or region
encompassing the Division and all outgoing notices. The reference book
shall be maintained by the Information Center. Teletypes shall be filed
in the book for a minimum of 30 days or longer as necessary. Records
also maintains an in-coming/out-going message reference book.
3. In the event a hit is made on the VCIN or NCIC Systems, an effort shall
be immediately made to verify the information by making an inquiry to
the originating agency.
4. It shall be the responsibility of the Warrant Section or Communications

Section, whichever the case may be, to clear warrant/wanted person
information from the appropriate system once arrest and service has
been made. In order to support this process, investigating officers shall
make every effort to notify the Warrant Section/Communications Section
when the arrest is made.
5. If an arrest of a suspect wanted in Hampton is made in another

jurisdiction, a FAX of the warrant will be sent to the other jurisdiction
along with the hit confirmation. If an officer or detective wishes a warrant
to be served in another jurisdiction, a FAX with a designated recipient
will be sent to the agency making the attempt. When the suspect is
returned to Hampton, the FAX copy will be attached to the other copies
of the warrant and forwarded to the Court in the usual manner.
Felony warrants will not be mailed to other jurisdictions for service. If a

suspect is wanted in Hampton but will not be released to our jail
immediately, a detainer will be placed on said subject by the warrants
office or Information Center if after hours. If necessary, a FAX of one of
our warrants can be sent to the other jurisdiction. Multiple warrants for a
particular suspect will be filed and remain together – they will not be
separated.
-
Redaction Log


undercover officer and/or investigative
INVEST
3 techniques and procedures has been 1
TECHNIQUES redacted pursuant to Va. Code
§2.2-3706(B)(10).
Redaction Log

Pages

undercover officer and/or investigative 3(1)
INVEST TECHNIQUES techniques and procedures has been
redacted pursuant to Va. Code
§2.2-3706(B)(10).
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
ISSUANCE OF PERMIT TO DEAL 8/15/98
IN PRECIOUS METALS OVERSIGHT

Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines governing the issuance of permits to deal in precious metals.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division to follow the outlined procedures in
accepting applications and the issuance of a permit to deal in precious metals.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The Records Unit will provide the applicant with an application kit for a permit
which will contain:
1. Permit application
2. A copy of excerpts from State Code of Virginia, highlighting important

articles to aid the applicant in obtaining a permit.
B. Records personnel will collect the designated fee at the time the completed
application is submitted and will prepare a receipt for the fee, which is set by
state code.
1. Once the application for a permit is received for processing, a CCRE

inquiry will be sent to VCIN (Virginia Criminal Information Network). The
results will be reviewed by a supervisor, and if approved, then the
applicant will be fingerprinted.
2. Because of the long delay in obtaining the results of the fingerprints from
the FBI, the permit can be revoked after issuance, if for some reason the
FBI report does not coincide with CCRE findings.
3. A bond or letter of credit is required of dealers when a permit is issued in

the penal sum of ten-thousand dollars ($10,000.00).
a. For reference, refer to the Virginia State Code § 54.1-4106.
b. The bond or letter of credit is to be filed with each applicant’s
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1418 – PERMIT TO DEAL IN PRECIOUS METALS Page 2 of 2
applications, therefore, the Commissioner of Revenue does not require a

copy of the said bond or letter of credit.
4. Each dealer of a firm, corporation and partnership will be required to

have a permit and pay the designated fee.
5. All weighing devices used must have been inspected by the State and
written evidence of such approval presented to Records personnel prior
to the permit being issued.
6. The Records Unit supervisor shall be responsible for the collection,

storage and delivering of said fees to the Commissioner of Revenue’s
Office and receipts associated with the fees.
7. A file will be maintained in the Records Unit on each dealer to account

for:
a. The issuance of permits
b. Application for permits
c. Fingerprints
d. CCRE check
e. The bond or letter of credit in the penal sum of ten-thousand

dollars ($10,000.00).
P&P #1418 – PERMIT TO DEAL IN PRECIOUS METALS Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
02/20/03
PROCESSING SUMMONSES OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the control, issuance and
processing of summonses.
II. POLICY:
The issuing and accounting of summonses shall be rigidly controlled. This control will
begin in the Records Section and shall extend to the courts and Virginia Department of
Motor Vehicles.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. ISSUANCE:
1. Virginia Uniform Summonses are issued by the Records Section or

Communications Section by using the Hampton Police Division Traffic
Summons/Parking Ticket Dispense Voucher as a record of accounting.
2. Issuance of summonses will preferably occur through the Records

Section during regular business hours. During non-business hours the
Communications Section may issue summonses.
B. ACCOUNTABILITY:
1. Officers are responsible for maintaining summonses in a secure manner

and shall be held accountable for all summonses issued to them.
Personnel are to refrain from loaning summonses.
2. Summonses are issued to officers in consecutive numbers and should

be written in consecutive order.
3. Periodically, summonses must be voided (e.g., offender taken into

custody, writing error, etc.). Summonses will be voided only when
absolutely necessary. When this occurs, the officer will immediately
notify his supervisor via radio or telephone of the necessity to void a
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1423 – PROCESSING SUMMONSES Page 2 of 2
summons. The officer will then submit a Special Report with the reason
for voiding the summons to the supervisor for his approval & signature
prior to the end of the shift. Both the Voided summons and a copy of the
Special Report will be forwarded to Records in the usual manner.
4. In the event summonses are missing or stolen, a Special Report or

Crime Report, as appropriate, will be submitted.
5. As summonses are written by officers and returned to the Records

Section they will be checked for numerical sequence. The Records
Clerk will inform the Records Supervisor of any summons returned out
of sequence or an apparent missing summons which is not returned. A
memo will be sent to the officer requesting accountability of the missing
summons.
C. FILING AND STORAGE:
1. Upon the return of summonses issued, the completed summonses will

be filed in the Central Records Unit. Summonses data is entered into
the Pistol Records Management System under the officer’s name.
2. In compliance with the State Records Retention and Disposition

Schedule, all summonses will remain in a current file for a period of one
year.
3. At the conclusion of the storage period these summonses will be

destroyed.
D. CROSS REFERENCES:
1. Summons data is cross-referenced under the officer’s name,

defendant’s name, defendant’s social security or control number and the
uniform summons number.
2. All summonses are cross-referenced in the court’s computer under the

defendant’s name or docket number. These court records are
maintained for a period of ten years.
3. The Virginia Department of Motor Vehicles also maintains microfilm

records of all Virginia Uniform Summonses for a period of ten years.
P&P #1423 – PROCESSING SUMMONSES Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
REPORTING AND RECOVERING 01/20/11
STOLEN VEHICLES OVERSIGHT

Operations
I. PURPOSE:
To provide proper and consistent practices to be followed by all personnel when the
Division becomes aware of a stolen/recovered vehicle.
II. POLICY:
The Emergency Communications Division Information Center (hereinafter referred to

as "Information Center") is responsible for ensuring that all instances of
stolen/recovered vehicles are properly documented.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. REPORTING STOLEN VEHICLES:
1. Initial Reporting – Initial reports will be taken by a patrol officer. Upon

completion, the report will be taken immediately to the Information
Center, where the information will be entered into NCIC/VCIN.
2. Stolen Vehicle Hot Sheet – Stolen vehicle information is tracked on the

Division Intranet in the "Query" section under "10-61 Hot Sheets".
Uniform Patrol Officers are responsible to check this list for updates.
3. Communications Process
a. Upon receiving a stolen car report, the Information Center will

complete a Communications Stolen Vehicle Report (white sheet)
with the assistance of the Field Officer who took the initial Crime
Report.
b. Information Center personnel will immediately enter the stolen

vehicle data into NCIC and VCIN. Appropriate notations will be
made on the white sheet.
c. A hard copy of the NCIC/VCIN message will be taped to the back

of the white sheet. The original white sheet will be retained by the
Information Center and a copy will be attached to the Crime
Report, and forwarded to Case Quality Control.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1424 – REPORTING AND RECOVERING STOLEN VEHICLES Page 2 of 4
d. The Information Center employee entering the vehicle into the

computer will complete an Addendum Report indicating the
following:
1) Time received & Name of Officer delivering Addendum

2) Date and time of entry
3) Name of person making entry
4) NCIC and/or VCIN number; or
5) An explanation stating why an entry could not be made at
the time the information was turned over to the Information
Center. An explicit statement will be made as to who the
information was passed on to for entry into NCIC and/or
VCIN.
e. A BOL broadcast will be made to all road units. A hard copy of

the BOL will be placed in the Checkbook for the following shifts.
B. RECOVERY OF A STOLEN VEHICLE (LOCALLY):
1. When a stolen vehicle is recovered locally, a patrol officer will be

dispatched to the scene and his Field Supervisor notified. It will be left to
the discretion of the Field Supervisor as to whether or not there exists a
need to process the vehicle.
2. Processing of the vehicle will be accomplished by the on scene Uniform

Patrol Officer unless some extenuating circumstances prevail, then
processing will be accomplished by the Forensics Unit.
3. The Information Center Team Leader will ensure that the owner has
been notified of the recovery of his vehicle. At the end of the tour of
duty, if the owner has not been notified, the oncoming Information
Center Team Leader will be responsible for resuming notification
attempts. This will continue until such time that notification has been
accomplished.
4. The Communications Division will not take the initiative to contact any
other persons or agencies without first being directed to do so by the
Recovering Officer, Field Supervisor, or the Detective assigned to the
case. Upon request, the Communications Unit may notify the following:
a. The Forensics Unit

b. The assigned detective
c. The next wrecker on the list
5. The Recovering Officer will write an Addendum Report stating the

circumstances of the recovery.
6. The Addendum Report will be brought to the Information Center so that

stolen vehicle data can be removed from NCIC/VCIN.
7. The Information Center will initiate a separate Addendum Report stating

that the stolen vehicle was removed from NCIC/VCIN by indicating the
following:
a. Time received & Name of Officer delivering Addendum

b. Date of time of removal
c. Name of person removing the data
d. NCIC/VCIN number
A hard copy of the NCIC/VCIN cancellation message will be taped to the

back of the original white sheet, and with the Addendum, forwarded to
Case Quality Control. One copy (front and back) of the white sheet will
be forwarded to Case Quality Control.
8. A BOL cancellation will be broadcast to all road units. A hard copy of the
BOL will be placed in the Checkbook for the following shifts.
C. RECOVERY OF A STOLEN VEHICLE (BY ANOTHER JURISDICTION):
1. When the Hampton Police Division becomes aware that a vehicle

reported stolen from Hampton is recovered by another jurisdiction, that
jurisdiction will be directed to send us a Hit Confirmation (YQ) message
stating that they have recovered one of our vehicles. The
Communications Supervisor will ensure that a Hit Confirmation
Response (YR) message is sent to the recovering agency and the
following information is obtained:
a. The vehicle will be stored in a safe place.
b. Request that the recovering agency process the vehicle for this
agency.
c. Would they provide us with the name and phone number of their
officer who is assigned to the case?
d. Would they notify us when they have finished processing the

vehicle so we may notify the owner?
2. The Information Center will initiate an Addendum Report stating the

circumstances of the recovery and the answers to the four questions
stated above. A statement will be made as to whether the owner was
notified. The Addendum and the original white sheet (along with one
copy) will be forwarded to the Case Quality Control Unit.
3. The Watch Commander or the officer-in-charge will be contacted and

notification of an on-call detective will be left to their discretion based on
the circumstances of the theft and recovery, the hour of day, and the day
of week.
D. RECOVERY OF A STOLEN VEHICLE (FROM ANOTHER JURISDICTION):
1. When the Hampton Police Division recovers a vehicle reported stolen

from another jurisdiction, the Information Center will send a “YQ”
MESSAGE to the reporting agency in order to verify the vehicle is still
listed as stolen. Included in the “YQ” message will be a brief statement
as to the recovery of the vehicle, for example:
a. “…vehicle found abandoned…”
b. “…vehicle stopped and driver apprehended…”
c. “…vehicle recovered as result of an accident…”
2. The “YQ” message will request, “waiting for any instructions from your
agency…”.
3. After the reporting agency confirms the vehicle is still stolen, a LOCATE
message (L) will be sent to NCIC and/or VCIN.
4. Processing of the vehicle will be accomplished by the on scene Uniform

Patrol Officer unless some extenuating circumstances prevail, then
processing will be accomplished by the Forensics Unit.
5. A wrecker (NOL) will be called to tow and store the vehicle. Protective
storage will only be used if the vehicle is going to be processed at a later
time.
6. Notification of owners of vehicles recovered in Hampton but stolen from

another jurisdiction will be at the discretion of the agency having
jurisdiction over the original offense.
7. An Incident Report will be generated by the Officer recovering the stolen

vehicle.
P&P #1424 – REPORTING AND RECOVERING STOLEN VEHICLES Page 5 of
4
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
RECORDING AND 11/20/2018
REPORTING SYSTEM OVERSIGHT

Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
This policy describes the reporting categories of incidents occurring within the
jurisdiction of the Hampton Police Division, the basic information to be included in
the reports and the review, status and audit of the reports. The purpose is to
maintain a comprehensive reporting system which records reports of incidents and
the actions taken by law enforcement personnel.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to require the reporting of every
incident in one or more of the following categories if the incident is alleged to have
occurred in the City of Hampton:
a. citizen reports of crimes

b. citizen complaints
c. incidents resulting in an employee being dispatched or assigned
d. criminal and non-criminal cases initiated by law enforcement employees
e. incidents involving arrests, citations, or summonses
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Reporting System - The Hampton Police Division utilizes the OneSolution

Records Management System (RMS) to electronically maintain its records
keeping system. The RMS system is a secure system which can only be
accessed by those persons authorized by the Division with password entry.
1. Incident Reports- are reports submitted by Division members

documenting the facts and circumstances surrounding a crime or
event (IBR report). Every incident report will be assigned an IBR
case number by the communications CAD system at the time the
report is taken. (The numbering system is utilized to ensure that all
cases receive a number, that no numbers are omitted and that no
numbers are duplicated). This IBR case number will be given to the
reporting officer to be included on the report. All Incident Reports
will be entered into the Records Management System incident
module.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1429 – RECORDING AND REPORTING SYSTEM Page 2 of 4
2. Traffic Accident Reports - are an officer’s written account of the facts

surrounding a motor vehicle collision. Accident reports will be
assigned a “Case Number” by the communications CAD system to be
included at the top of the report by the investigating officer. All accident
reports will be entered into the RMS accident module.
3. Supplemental Reports - the supplemental report will be utilized by

officers to provide additional information for incident and accident
reports. It will contain the same IBR case number or Accident report
number as the original report it supports. Supplemental reports for an
Incident report will be entered into the RMS and supplemental reports
for an accident report will be filed with the accident report.
4. Computer Aided Dispatch Radio Log - the CADS complaint log serves
as a record of citizen's complaints or calls for service coming into the
Communications Section of the Police Division. It also serves as a
record of certain self-initiated activity by police officers which may or
may not be captured on the complaint log or some other formal report.
5. Communications Voice Radio and Telephone Recorded Tapes - the

communication's tapes serve as a record of the incoming calls even if
they do not qualify as a call for service and do not generate any other
type of written or recorded report. Recordings are maintained for 90
days.
6. Other reporting / recording documents - In addition to these

reporting/recording mechanisms, incidents involving arrests,
summonses and police/citizen contacts are recorded by one of the
following methods:
a. Field Contact Card – will be utilized when an officer has contact

with a citizen under any unusual or suspicious circumstance.
b. Arrest Sheet – will be completed by the arresting officer anytime
a person is taken into custody.
c. Summonses – both traffic and criminal in nature.
d. Parking tickets – issued by patrol officers and cadets.
All of the above information is entered into the RMS system in the
appropriate record keeping module.
7. Lost Cell Phone reports - When a citizen reports a lost cell phone, a
“Lost Cellular Phone” CAD will be entered in place of an IBR Report so
a tracking number is available for the report. The Tracking number will
be provided to the Citizen. The report form is available on the Division
Intranet site. The report should be completed and forwarded by the

victim to their cell phone provider. No record of the report is maintained
by the Division. If the cellular phone is stolen, an IBR report will be
generated.
B. All reports completed by personnel of the Hampton Police Division shall be

entered through the Mobile Field Reporting System, Moblink on a Division
computer, or written in black ink and shall contain, at a minimum, the following
information:
1. Date and time of the initial reporting
2. Name (if available) of the citizen requesting the service or victim's

name or complainant's name
3. Nature of the incident
4. Nature, date and time of action taken (if any) by law enforcement
personnel
C. Supervisory Review and Status of Reports
1. Supervisors of officers initiating any type of report are required to

review the report for content and accuracy, examine the solvability
factors as applicable, and make recommendations on the feasibility of
a follow-up investigation. The supervisor signs each report reviewed in
the appropriate space provided for that purpose, or electronically.
2. Cases are assigned for follow-up investigation through the Case

Quality Control unit, utilizing the RMS tracking system. The supervisor
of the unit assigned the follow-up (Investigations or Patrol) is
responsible to review the status of the case every 7 days in order to
determine if any change in the status of the case has occurred. All
open cases will have a supplement completed in order to update the
status on a weekly basis.
3. The RMS is a searchable database, which can provide the following

information:
a. Incident case number

b. Crime type
c. Officer/Detective assigned
d. Date assigned
e. Case status
f. Modus Operandi information
D. Audits and Evaluations of the Complaint Control Recording and Field

Reporting Process.
1. The Case Quality Control Unit and other supporting Records Unit
personnel conduct inspections on a continual basis of the recording
and reporting process. These inspections include the determination
that correct case numbers have been assigned for each completed
report, determining the accuracy and completeness of field reports,
and ensuring that reports and follow up assignments are properly
handled in accordance with Divisional and Commonwealth
requirements. Appropriate supervisors and officers are notified by
Case Quality Control when discrepancies are found and correction or
completion is needed.
2. The Records Unit ensures that accident reports are completed,

numbered and filed accordingly.
3. Professional Standards periodically reviews written directives which

pertain to the total reporting system in order to ensure detection of
discrepancies and/or need for revision.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
CRIME LINE TELEPHONE 01/21/05
PROCEDURES OVERSIGHT
CHIEF’S OFFICE
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines and procedures for answering the
Crime Line telephone, documenting anonymous tips, and providing the results to the
Crime Line Coordinator.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to operate the Crime Line telephone 24
hours a day in order to gather the most accurate information and disseminate that
information to the appropriate unit for investigation.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Answering Crime Line Calls
1. The Crime Line Coordinator will be responsible for answering the Crime
Line telephone during normal business hours, Monday through Friday,
0730 – 1630 hours.
2. After normal business hours, weekends and holidays, all Crime Line
calls will be forwarded to a cellular telephone or voicemail which will be
monitored by Investigative Services. The Investigative Services
supervisor will manage the answering of the Crime Line telephone
and/or checking of the voicemail messages. The Investigative Services
supervisor may assign a designee to manage calls.
B. Documenting Information on the “Fact Sheet”
1. The Crime Line telephone should be answered, “Hampton Crime Line”.
2. The persons answering the telephone will initially determine if the caller
has previously been assigned a Crime Line code number. If a number
has not been previously assigned, the caller will be assigned the next
number from the code number log. Once the code number has been
assigned, it will be recorded on the “Fact Sheet” in the designated place.
When the Crime Line phone is answered after normal business hours
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1430 – CRIME LINE TELEPHONE PROCEDURES Page 2 of 3
and the caller has not been previously assigned a code number, the
person taking the call will advise the caller to call the Crime Line number
between 0800-1630 hours, Monday through Friday, to obtain their
confidential code number. The caller should be able to provide the date,
time and information they furnished to obtain the confidential number.
3. All pertinent information received from the caller will be recorded on the
Crime Line “Fact Sheet”. These sheets must include the date, time and
name of the person taking the call.
C. Routing of Crime Line Information
1. During normal business hours the information will be immediately

entered into the Peninsula Crime Line computer and forwarded to the
appropriate unit for action. Four (4) copies will be maintained. One copy
will be filed in the Crime Line records and three (3) will be forwarded to
the appropriate unit for dissemination to the unit’s Lieutenant, Sergeant
and Investigating Officer.
2. After normal business hours, weekends and holidays, all Crime Line
“Fact Sheets” will be placed on the desk of the Crime Line Coordinator.
The Crime Line Coordinator will assign a code number and enter the
information into the computer the following business day and
disseminate the information to the appropriate unit.
3. Callers providing information that requires immediate attention should be

handled as any other call for service. The information will be captured
on the “Fact Sheet” and Communications will be notified immediately via
radio or telephone.
D. Follow-up on Crime Line Information
1. In order for Crime Line to work effectively, the Crime Line Coordinator
must have feedback concerning each of the anonymous tips in a timely
fashion regarding the investigator’s findings. Every effort should be
made to return the “Fact Sheets” to the Crime Line Coordinator within 15
days of the initial call. This report does not need to be a detailed
narrative of the findings, but rather a preliminary report that the
coordinator can pass on to the caller. This report can also serve to
solicit additional information regarding that case. If the information was
somewhat helpful, but you need additional help in a certain area, this
request can be made on the report to the coordinator so he can solicit
that specific information from the caller.
2. If the information resulted in an arrest, recovery of stolen property,

seizure of drugs or of a gun, this information should be documented at
the bottom of the “Fact Sheet” and returned to the Crime Line
Coordinator. The results should include the names of any persons
arrested, their charges, the amount of narcotics or stolen property
recovered and how many cases were cleared as a result of the
P&P #1430 – CRIME LINE TELEPHONE PROCEDURES Page 3 of 3
information that was provided. This report will allow the coordinator to
begin making arrangements for the appropriate reward.
3. It is understood that some “Fact Sheets” will take additional time to

investigate depending on the type of case. If more time is needed to
conduct the investigation, the supervisor should simply let the
coordinator know when an initial report is expected so that they will know
what to tell the caller should they call back.
4. On a quarterly basis, the Crime Line Coordinator will compile a list of all
Crime Line calls that have remained open for more than 90 days. This
“Inactivity Report” will be forwarded to each of the unit commanders for
action.
P&P #1430 – CRIME LINE TELEPHONE PROCEDURES Page 4 of
3
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
CAR KEYS AND 01/28/10
GARAGE GAS KEYS OVERSIGHT

Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish a system of maintaining control of vehicle

keys and City Garage computer gas keys, and to alleviate any unnecessary expenses
due to replacement of these keys.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Hampton Police Division that all personnel turn in vehicle
keys upon completing a tour of duty, with the exception of assigned Take Home Cars.
Officers assigned vehicles will be responsible for the garage computer gas key.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Location of Vehicle Keys:
1. Fleet vehicle keys for Uniform Patrol will be located at designated Field
Offices in the Wythe and Chesapeake Sectors. Each designated Field
Office will maintain fleet vehicle sign-in & sign-out log books.
2. Vehicle keys for Units other than Uniform Patrol will be maintained in the
respective unit.
3. Keys for vehicles in the Take Home Car Program will be maintained by
the officer assigned to the car.
4. A duplicate set of keys for ALL Division vehicles is maintained in the

Special Projects Office.
B. Issuance of Keys and Cars:
1. Fleet vehicles will be signed-out in fleet vehicle log books located at the
designated Field Offices.
2. On-going officers will not accept or exchange keys with off-going officers.
All keys will be signed in and out in the appropriate sector’s vehicle log
book.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1501 – CAR KEYS AND GARAGE GAS KEYS Page 2 of 3
3. Vehicles assigned to the Take Home Car Program will not be used as
fleet vehicles unless approved by the Special Projects Office.
4. Fleet vehicles will not be used on extra-duty assignments not requiring

the use of a vehicle. The Field Supervisor will be contacted before using
a Fleet vehicle for extra-duty to verify that there are sufficient vehicles for
shift personnel.
5. Fleet vehicles will be visually inspected by the receiving officer for

damage, safety hazards, the interior condition, and the garage computer
gas key prior to using the vehicle. Any problems should be reported
immediately to the Field Supervisor on duty.
C. Turning In of Keys and Cars:
1. At the end of their regular tour of duty officers will again inspect the
vehicle for damage, safety hazards, the interior condition, and the
garage gas key prior to turning in the keys.
2. Keys for Fleet vehicles will be signed in at the appropriate Field Office.
3. Fleet vehicles will not be used as Take Home Cars unless approved by
the Special Projects Office.
D. Garage Computer Gas Key:
1. Each city vehicle is assigned a computer gas key. This gas key is to be
kept in the vehicle to which it is assigned.
2. It is the responsibility of each officer using a city vehicle to ensure that

the gas key is in the vehicle.
3. Any officer using a vehicle that does not have a computer gas key will
report the same to the Field Supervisor on duty, write a Special Report
documenting the information and forward it through their Chain of
Command to the Special Projects Office. The officer will then report to
the City Garage Administrative Office to have a new gas key issued. If
the Garage Administrative Office is closed, a copy of the report will be
forwarded to a Day Shift Supervisor to see that it is done.
E. Maintenance of Vehicles:
1. When deadlining vehicles after-hours, a drop box is located at the City

Garage at the main entrance to the building next to the ready line.
Envelopes are provided for officers deadlining their vehicles to list
information needed for vehicle maintenance (City Garage’s Vehicle
Maintenance Form). (See P&P #1509, Deadlining Police Vehicles)
2. Appointments will be scheduled for annual and semi-annual service for

both fleet and Take Home vehicles. Officers are encouraged to review
P&P #1501 – CAR KEYS AND GARAGE GAS KEYS Page 3 of 3
the scheduled day for service of their assigned vehicle.
3. Supervisors should review the list of fleet vehicles for maintenance and
ensure these vehicles are available according to the scheduled
appointments. Oil change notifications will continue to be made on
Police Vehicle Maintenance notification forms. Oil changes for fleet
vehicles will continue on a monthly basis and Take Home vehicles will be
every 3,000 miles.
4. When fleet vehicle repairs are completed, the vehicle will be brought
back to the appropriate Field Office and the keys placed back on the
keyboard.
P&P #1501 – CAR KEYS AND GARAGE GAS KEYS Page 4 of
3
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
04/08/15
OPERATION OF POLICE
VEHICLES
OVERSIGHT
Operations
ALL MANUALS P&P # 1502 dated 07/10/12 .
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish procedures for the operation of police vehicles
during emergency and nonemergency situations.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to operate police vehicles in a manner
consistent with law and in consideration of the safety of the public.
III. DEFINITION:
A. Due Regard for the Safety of Persons and Property – The duty to protect
other persons from unreasonable risk. A reasonably careful person, performing
similar duties and under similar circumstances, would act in the same manner.
B. Emergency Vehicle – For the purposes of this policy, this term shall apply to
any law enforcement vehicle operated by or under the direction of a Hampton
Police Officer charged with the responsibility of emergency response or the
pursuit and apprehension of violators of the law.
C. Emergency Response – A situation in which there is a high probability of death

or serious injury to an individual or significant property loss and the immediate
presence and action by an emergency vehicle operator may reduce or eliminate
the seriousness of the situation.
The following are examples of situations where an emergency response may be

necessary. The decision to engage in an emergency response must weigh the
necessity of the response based on the information known at the time versus
the danger to the public.
1. Officer needs assistance
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1502 – OPERATION OF POLICE VEHICLES Page 2 of 7
2. A felony that involves risk to the safety of the public or significant

property loss
3. Persons calling for help
4. Hold up alarm activations
5. Any other situation which requires the immediate and urgent presence of
an officer.
IV: PROCEDURE:
A. Emergency Operation of Police Vehicles
1. Emergency vehicle operators are subject to all traffic regulations, unless

a specific exemption is made in Virginia State Code. Virginia State Code
§46.2-920 exempts emergency vehicles from certain regulations. The
following procedures are a combination of Virginia State Law and
Division policy constraints, which shall serve as guidelines for the
emergency operation of police vehicles by officer of the Hampton Police
Division.
a. The driver of any emergency vehicle, when such vehicle is being

used in the performance of public services, and when such
vehicle is operated under emergency conditions, may, without
subjecting himself to criminal prosecution:
1) Disregard speed limits, while having due regard for safety

of persons and property.
2) Proceed past any steady or flashing red signal, traffic light,

stop sign, or device indicating moving traffic shall stop
after:
a) Stopping the police vehicle.

b) Yielding right-of-way as necessary to moving
vehicles, self-propelled vehicles, and pedestrians.
c) Determining that the intersection may be entered
safely.
3) Park or stop notwithstanding the other provisions of

Virginia State Code or the Hampton City Code.
4) Disregard regulations governing a direction of movement

of vehicles turning in specified directions so long as the
operator does not endanger life or property.
5) Pass or overtake, with due regard to the safety of persons

and property, another vehicle at any intersection.
6) Pass or overtake with due regard to the safety of persons
and property, while en route to an emergency, stopped or
slow-moving vehicles, by going to the left of the stopped or
slow-moving vehicle either in a no-passing zone or by
crossing the highway centerline.
7) Pass or overtake with due regard to the safety of persons

and property, while en route to an emergency, stopped or
slow-moving vehicles, by going off the paved or main
traveled portion of the roadway on the right.
Notwithstanding other provisions of this policy and the
Code of Virginia, vehicles exempted in this instance will
not be required to sound a siren or any device to give
automatically intermittent signals.
8) Any law-enforcement vehicle operated by or under the

direction of a federal, state, or local law-enforcement
officer may disregard speed limits, while having due regard
for safety of persons and property, (i) in testing the
accuracy of speedometers of such vehicles, (ii) in testing
the accuracy of speed measuring devices specified in §
46.2-882, or (iii) in following another vehicle for the
purpose of determining its speed.
i. This specific exemption does not require the

activation of emergency equipment as outlined in
the paragraph below.
b. All exemptions granted to emergency vehicles shall apply only

when the operator of such vehicle displays a flashing, blinking, or
alternating emergency light or lights as provided in §§ 46.2-1022
and 46.2-1023 and sounds a siren, exhaust whistle, or air horn
designed to give automatically intermittent signals, as may be
reasonably necessary, unless otherwise specified in this policy.
c. Such exemptions shall not, however, protect the operator of any

such vehicle from criminal prosecution for conduct constituting
reckless disregard of the safety of persons and property.
d. Nothing in this section shall be construed to release the operator

of any such vehicle from civil liability for failure to use reasonable
care in such operation.
e. Due to traffic volume in the region and the increased potential for
accidents at intersections, police vehicles operating in emergency
response mode will do the following when approaching green
lights at major intersections:
1) Decrease speed by removing foot from the accelerator and

cover the brake pedal. Be prepared to brake and stop if
necessary.
2) Increase speed only after passing through the intersection

and ensuring it is safe to do so.
f. Officers who operate Division vehicles are prohibited from

operating the vehicle in emergency mode while the vehicles are
occupied by non-police passengers.
1) In the event it becomes necessary to engage in an

emergency response, the officer will immediately contact
the field supervisor and advise him of the situation.
2) The operator will deposit the passenger at a safe location

before responding in an emergency mode. The supervisor
will ensure the passenger is picked up as soon as
practical.
g. All civilian employees are specifically prohibited from engaging in

the emergency operation of police vehicles.
h. Patrol Service Officers and Police Cadets are authorized to utilize

emergency equipment while performing authorized escorts and
parades.
i. Officers engaged in the transportation of prisoners will not initiate

an emergency response unless the following circumstances exist:
1) Emergency medical attention is needed for the prisoner

and emergency response to the nearest medical provider
(i.e. hospital, fire station) is more appropriate than stopping
and summoning fire department personnel, or
2) In all other situations, officers should transport prisoners

directly to their designated secure facility unless approval
to do otherwise is granted by a supervisor.
j. Regardless of the nature of the emergency, operators will not

drive in such a manner as to endanger the life and property of
others.
k. Officers will consider the following when making the decision to

operate in an emergency response:
1) Road conditions
2) Traffic conditions
3) Weather conditions
4) Driver capability and condition
5) Vehicle capability and condition
l. In addition to the guidelines in this policy, police pursuits will also

be governed by the procedures set forth in P&P 1128, Police
Pursuits.
m. Vehicles not equipped with emergency equipment (lights and

siren) will not be operated in an emergency mode.
B. Non-Emergency Operation of Police Vehicles
1. Police vehicles will be driven in a safe and proper manner, with the driver
acting in full compliance with all traffic laws and regulations. Police
vehicles are conspicuous symbols of authority on the streets and the
actions of police drivers are observed by many. This places the
responsibility on each police driver to set the visible example of good
driving behavior and habits.
2. Police vehicles are equipped with a public address system which has the
capability to broadcast directions or emergency messages as necessary.
Care and judgment must be used to ensure that appropriate volume
levels are utilized so as not to unnecessarily disturb citizens.
3. Other vehicular lighting equipment available includes hazardous warning

lights, spotlights, alley lights and take down lights, which should be used
as appropriate. Hazardous warning lights will be used at any time the
police vehicle is parked where vehicular traffic is present or high visibility
is necessary. Alley lights and spotlights may be used when the vehicle is
stationary or moving slowly and in such a manner as not to interfere with
the operations of the police vehicle or the vision of operators of other
approaching vehicles. Take down lights may be used to illuminate a
vehicle when the police vehicle is stationary.
C. Towing Trailers
Employees are required to have completed the Division’s Trailer Towing Course
prior to being authorized to tow any of the Division’s trailers. Examples of the
division’s trailers are but not limited to: boat trailers, light trailers, utility trailers,
and speed generators.
D. Police Vehicle Accidents
Employees are required to comply with all existing policies pertaining to the
reporting of accidents, whether the accident involves a motor vehicle or is an
industrial accident.
1. All accidents, regardless of their severity or the parties involved, are

reportable according to City Policy.
2. Employees will report all accidents at the scene and time of their
occurrence or as soon and as near as reasonable under the prevailing
circumstances.
3. The employee involved in an accident will notify Public Safety

Communications who in turn will make proper notification of the
following:
a. The employee’s supervisor
b. An ambulance, if needed
c. The city wrecker, if needed
4. If necessary the employee involved in an accident will provide any life-

saving or first aid measures required by an injured party.
5. The employee will not move his vehicle (if involved in a motor vehicle
accident) from its final resting position unless it presents an immediate
traffic danger.
6. Employees involved in accidents or supervisors investigating accidents

will not make any statements as to the city’s liability or the liability of any
employee to members of the press, other parties involved in the
accident, or within the general hearing of the public. Inquiries should be
referred to Risk Management.
7. The employee involved in an accident will detain and/or obtain the

names and proper identification of any and all witnesses to the accident,
if possible.
8. The employee involved in an accident will make proper identification of
himself and the city equipment involved in an accident to the other
parties of the accident.
9. An employee involved in an accident will be required to complete the

following reports:
a. Special Report
b. State Accident Report
E. TRAINING
1. All sworn personnel will successfully complete all aspects of driver

training prescribed by DCJS before operating police vehicles in the field.
2. Patrol Service Officers and Police Cadets will complete an authorized

City of Hampton or Hampton Police Division driver training course,
including a review of this policy.
P&P #1502 – OPERATION OF POLICE VEHICLES Page 9
of 7
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
OPERATION AND CARE OF 5/30/98
CANINE VEHICLES OVERSIGHT

Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish procedures for the operation and care of
canine (K-9) vehicles.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy of the Hampton Police Division to maintain the K-9 vehicles and operate
them in a safe manner.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Maintenance of K-9 Vehicle
1. It shall be the responsibility of each officer operating his vehicle to

ensure that the vehicle is cleaned at the end of his tour of duty.
2. The K-9 Trainer will ensure that the vehicles are taken to the central
garage whenever preventive maintenance is scheduled. A regular
schedule will be provided by the central garage for this service.
B. Operation
1. Unless otherwise approved by the Shift Commander, K-9 vehicles will be

operated only by officers assigned to the K-9 Corps (See P&P 1105 for
qualifications). These officers will be solely responsible for care and
condition of these vehicles. Any officer abusing the vehicles or failing to
report damage will face disciplinary action.
2. If the operator of a K-9 vehicle initiates a pursuit, the pursuit will be

abandoned when a patrol vehicle is in position to assume the pursuit.
3. K-9 Officers will have the following items, at a minimum with them when
operating the K-9 vehicle on duty:
a. Water bucket
b. Traffic leash
c. Six foot leash
d. Leather collar
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1503 – OPERATION & CARE OF K-9 VEHCILES Page 2 of 2
e. Choke chain
f. Medical muzzle
g. Tracking harness
h. First Aid kit
i. Rewards for narcotic location
4. K-9 vehicles will be equipped with a cage and platform in order to safely
transport a K-9.
5. Any additional non-issued equipment must be approved by the Training

Unit Commander.
6. The K-9 vehicle is used to transport the K-9 in a manner that protects the
K-9, the officer, and the public.
P&P #1503 – OPERATION & CARE OF K-9 VEHCILES Page 3 of
2
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
10/21/14
TAKE HOME CAR PROGRAM OVERSIGHT
Support Services
ALL MANUALS P&P #1504 dated 01/28/10 and Gen. Orders #02-166 and #12-222.
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy and procedure is to establish guidelines for the conduct
and administration of the Take Home Car Program.
II. POLICY:
The overall goal of the Take Home Car Program is to provide better police services
to the community. To meet this end, the objectives are:
A. Increase visibility and availability of units throughout the City.
B. Decrease average vehicle costs through increased vehicle life and decreased
maintenance/repair expenses.
C. Increase operational readiness within the Hampton Police Division.
The assignment of a vehicle under this program is considered to be a management

prerogative. Vehicles may be assigned to the program or returned to general fleet
usage by the organization as provided under guidelines set forth.
This policy does not apply to police vehicles which with the authorization of the Chief
of Police, may be taken home to fulfill other Division objectives.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. ADMINISTRATION:
The Office of the Chief of Police has designated the Support Services Branch
Commander’s Office responsible for assignment of all vehicles under this
program. The office will closely monitor the officers’ activities who are
assigned vehicles under this program. Also, the Support Services Branch
Commander, or his designee will investigate any indiscretions which occur
and report such to the Chief of Police for appropriate action. If disciplinary
action is required; all actions shall be in accordance with Division Policy.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1504 – TAKE HOME CAR PROGRAM Page 2 of 6
The Support Services Branch will also monitor maintenance performed on the
vehicles assigned and will coordinate maintenance with the fleet manager at
the City Garage.
B. ELIGIBILITY:
1. Officers must have a good employment record to include a positive

attitude, acceptable conduct, and a professional appearance.
2. Officers must reside within the City of Hampton except as authorized

by the Chief of Police.
3. Officers must have completed 3 years or more as a sworn officer for

the Hampton Police Division.
4. Accident Review Board records reflecting a history of preventable

accidents caused by negligence and disregard for established policies
and procedures will be a basis for ineligibility.
5. Ineligibility based on traffic accident records shall be determined by the

Eligibility Board (see P&P 1004, Accident and Eligibility Review
Boards).
6. Eligibility for the Take Home Car Program does not of itself insure
assignment of a vehicle nor require that an officer accept such a
vehicle if offered.
7. Non-compliance with eligibility requirements will terminate participation

in the program. Officers are reminded that having a Take Home Car is
a privilege and not a right; and as such can be withdrawn for non-
compliance with Division directives, poor attitude, appearance and
conduct; as well as non-compliance with eligibility requirements.
C. OVERTIME:
1. Off-duty officers who become involved in a police activity will indicate

their on-duty status to Communications as an Alpha Unit. At the
conclusion of the event and when practical the officer will record the
time with his/her supervisor for compensation pursuant to the Federal
Fair Labor Standards Act.
2. This provision will not be construed to deny full overtime compensation

to personnel assigned vehicles who are requested to work overtime or
become involved in an incident in an on-duty status that carries over
beyond normal working hours.
D. VEHICLE OPERATION:
1. Communications procedures will follow Division Policy and Procedure

except as modified:
a. When using the Communications network, off-duty officers will

be designated by “A” (alpha) followed by their assigned CAD
number.
b. Shift supervisors and Communications personnel may

periodically request locations of off-duty officers available as
circumstances dictate.
2. All Rules and Regulations, Policies and Procedures of the Hampton

Police Division will apply to off-duty officers while operating an
assigned vehicle, the same as if he/she were on duty.
3. Division operated vehicles shall be driven by police officers to whom

the vehicles have been assigned. Any other temporary operation must
have authority from the Commander of the Support Services Branch,
their designee, or the Chief of Police. Officers shall not permit non-
police personnel to accompany them, except in accordance with
Division Policy. This does not preclude operation of vehicles assigned
to Field Training Officers by recruit personnel in on-the-job training
under the supervision of the Field Training Instructor.
4. Division personnel are not to be provided transportation, except in

accordance with Division policy.
5. Officers shall drive Division vehicles with reasonable prudence to

conserve the usefulness and maintain them at the highest operating
efficiency.
6. Officers and passengers shall use the seat belts provided while driving
or riding in Division vehicles.
7. Any damage or accident involving an assigned unit will be reported

immediately to the Communications Section and the on-duty shift
supervisor in accordance with Division policy.
8. Officers to whom marked vehicles have been issued are prohibited

from stopping at restaurants or drive-in restaurants, if two (2) marked
Division units are already present at that location (see P&P 607 “Meal
Breaks…”), unless responding to an emergency situation or
dispatched to that location.
9. At no time will an officer use a Division vehicle either in an on-duty or

off-duty status for the purchase, transport and/or consumption of
alcoholic beverages except in the course of duty.
10. Off-duty assigned vehicle officers will not be expected to be strict

traffic enforcers; however, an indifference to flagrant traffic law
violations can not be exhibited and enforcement action should be
taken as deemed necessary when such violations are witnessed.
11. Officers will not use assigned vehicles on a part-time job as a part of
that employment. The vehicle may, however, be driven to and from
the part-time job within the City.
12. Officers who drive assigned vehicles while off-duty will not presume
any special privileges; for instance, parking in no-parking or restricted
zones, driving above the posted speed limit, etc. Officers will use good
judgement at all times and not drive the vehicles in such a manner that
will cause unfavorable comments or reflect discredit on the City or the
Police Division.
13. Vehicles will not be taken outside of the City of Hampton except on
authorized City business.
E. MAINTENANCE:
1. Officers will be responsible for the cleanliness of assigned automobiles.
2. Routine maintenance must be taken care of while on-duty. This will

require that all preventive maintenance be scheduled while the officer
is off on-duty. This includes fueling, servicing, minor repairs and
washing and/or cleaning the vehicle. The officer assigned to a unit will
not be allowed to perform maintenance on his/her unit.
In those cases where it is not feasible to schedule maintenance on the

officer’s on-duty time, the officer will leave his assigned vehicle at the
City Garage for the required maintenance. When the vehicle
maintenance requires only an oil change, the officer will coordinate
with his supervisor to have the vehicle transported and the oil change
completed. The vehicle maintenance sheet shall be completed by the
supervisor or his designee and forwarded to Special Projects.
3. No alterations or additions to the unit may be done unless by

permission of the Chief of Police or his designee.
4. Officers on vacation or sick leave which extends more than three days
will be required to leave the keys where readily available to insure
scheduled maintenance can be accomplished, and the vehicle is
available if needed. The officer will arrange for his/her immediate
supervisor to have access to the vehicle and keys.
5. Each Shift Commander will conduct an inspection of units assigned,

record the results on the Monthly Vehicle Inspection Report. Copies of
inspection sheets indicating problems or discrepancies (i.e., decals
pealing, paint fading, etc.) shall be forwarded to Special Projects for
follow-up.
6. All personnel participating in the program will be responsible for the

maintenance, condition and security of their assigned vehicles and
equipment.
F. AVAILABILITY:
1. An officer must be capable of responding to calls in case of an

emergency.
2. When operating a take home vehicle, Officers shall be dressed so that

they can function effectively as a police officer. All pants must have a
belt with belt loops to retain the off-duty holster. Prohibited are
swimsuits, tee shirts and/or hats with profanity, indecent language or
gestures, or names of alcoholic beverages. Additionally, bluejeans
with holes or similar attire will not be permitted. Shorts, if worn, will be
similar in design to those issued by the Division. The officers’ attire will
always project the professional image of the Division.
3. An officer must have his/her badge, Police Division Identification and

authorized weapon in his/her possession at all times while operating
any police vehicle. Exceptions may be granted by supervisors for
authorized law enforcement purposes.
G. ASSIGNMENT:
1. Vehicles in the Take Home Car Program will be issued dependent on

availability and operational requirements. After operational
requirements are satisfied, (i.e., individual shift vehicle needs) vehicles
will be assigned according to seniority to eligible personnel desiring to
participate. Once assigned, Take Home vehicles will not be
reassigned, except for reasons of non-compliance with program
guidelines, misconduct, or operational requirements within the
Division.
2. Support Services shall conduct an annual review of all vehicles taken

out of the City of Hampton. This review will evaluate the continued
operational need of each request. This review will be forwarded to the
Chief of Police for final determination.
P&P #1505 – TACTICAL UNIT VEHICLES Page 2 of 3
2. All designated operators will successfully complete a four-hour training

program for the respective vehicle.
3. Each team will have one primary operator and an alternate operator.
4. The Tactical Unit Commander will maintain a list of tactical officers

approved to operate the Tactical Unit vehicles.
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
TACTICAL PLANS
C. OUTSIDE AGENCY OPERATION:
1. All mutual aid requests for Tactical Unit vehicles from other
jurisdictions will be approved by the Chief of Police.
2. Authorization for operating the Tactical Rescue vehicle outside

Hampton’s jurisdiction for training will be granted by order of:
a. Chief of Police, or his designee.
b. Commander of Operations.
c. Tactical Unit Commander.
d. Tactical Unit Deputy Commander.
3. Two operators will accompany and operate the vehicle during operations
with outside agencies. One will serve as driver and the other will assist
and make tactical deployment recommendations to the outside agency.
D. MAINTENANCE:
1. The Tactical Unit Techs will be responsible for keeping all equipment
and operating systems on the Tactical Unit vehicles in proper working
condition. They will also be responsible for coordinating scheduled
and unscheduled maintenance of the Tactical Unit vehicles.
2. The Tactical Unit Techs will be responsible for notifying the Tactical Unit
Command Staff when the vehicle will be out of service for scheduled or
unscheduled maintenance.
3. The Tactical Unit Techs will be responsible for:
a. Removing all equipment from the Tactical Unit vehicle prior to

releasing the vehicle from service for maintenance or repairs.
Equipment will be restored on the vehicle when the vehicle is
returned to service.
b. Notifying the Tactical Unit Command Staff of the status of the

Tactical Unit vehicle and equipment.
4. All maintenance will be coordinated through the Hampton City garage.
E. TACTICAL UNIT INVENTORY:
1. The Tactical Unit Techs will be accountable for all equipment stored on
the vehicles. They will insure that an inventory of equipment and
supplies assigned to the vehicle is conducted quarterly. An inventory
report will be forwarded to the Unit Commander and Accreditation.
2. The Tactical Unit vehicle inventory of equipment and supplies will be

maintained by the Tactical Unit Commander or designee.
TACTICAL
3. The shall have the following equipment, at a minimum:
a. Emergency Blanket
b. Fire Extinguisher
c. First Aid Kit
d. Trauma Kit
e. Flares
f. Ballistic Blanket
E. VEHICLE SECURITY:
1. Access to the Tactical Unit vehicles will be restricted to only authorized

persons.
2. Vehicle keys are issued to the Tactical Unit Commander, Tactical Unit
Deputy Commander, Team Leaders, Assistant Team Leaders, Techs
and designated vehicle operators.
3. A vehicle key will be maintained in the Police Division’s Communication’s

Section. This key will only be issued to Tactical Unit personnel on a
sign-out basis.
Redaction Log




3 1
Redaction Log

Pages
3(1)

extent that such records contain specific 1(1)
Code §2.2-3706(B)(5).
P&P 1506 MARINE PATROL OPERATIONS APPENDIX I
ANNUAL WATERMANSHIP TEST
Evaluation Parameters
There are five exercises that evaluate stamina and comfort in the water, each rated by points.
The candidate must successfully complete all stations and score a minimum of 12 points to pass the test.
The test should be completed with not more than 15 minutes between exercises.
Exercise 1: 500 Yard Swim

The candidate must swim 500 yards without stopping using a forward stroke and without using any swim aids such as
a dive mask, fins, snorkel, or flotation device. Stopping or standing up in the shallow end of the pool at any point
during this exercise will constitute a failure of this evaluation station.
Time to Complete Points Awarded

Under 10 minutes 5
10-13 minutes 4
13-16 minutes 3
16-19 minutes 2
More than 19 minutes 1
Stopped or incomplete Incomplete
Exercise 2: 15 Minute Tread

Using no swim aids and wearing only a swimsuit the candidate will stay afloat by treading water, drown proofing,
bobbing or floating for 15 minutes with hands only out of the water for the last 2 minutes.
Performance Criteria Points Awarded

Performed satisfactorily 5
Stayed afloat, hands not out of water for 2 minutes 3
Used side or bottom for support at any time 1
Used side or bottom for support >twice Incomplete
Exercise 3: 800 Yard Snorkel Swim

Using a dive mask, fins, snorkel, and a swimsuit (no BCD or other flotation aid) and swimming the entire time with the
face in the water, the diver must swim nonstop for 800 yards. The candidate must not use arms to swim at any time.

Under 15 minutes 5
15-17 minutes 4
17-19 minutes 3
19-21 minutes 2
Stopped at any time Incomplete
Exercise 4: 100 Yard Inert Rescue Tow

The swimmer must push or tow an inert victim wearing appropriate PPE on the surface 100 yards non stop and
without assistance.

Under 2 minutes 5
2-3 minutes 4
3-4 minutes 3
4-5 minutes 2
Stopped at any time Incomplete
Exercise 5: Free Dive to a depth of nine feet and retrieve an object

Performed satisfactorily Pass
Stopped or incomplete Incomplete
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
01/11/2021
MARINE PATROL OPERATIONS OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the Police Division’s Marine
Patrol.
II. POLICY:
The Hampton Police Division’s Marine Patrol provides for the protection of life and
property and the enforcement of city, state, and federal laws within the city’s 83 square
miles of waterway jurisdiction. In addition, the Marine Patrol is responsible for
providing search and rescue capabilities and coordinating with other agencies to
provide police marine services as approved by the Chief of Police.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. AUTHORITY
1. The Marine Patrol operates under the authority of city, state, and federal
laws and is under the direction of the Chief of Police or his designee.
2. The Marine Patrol is a component of the Homeland Security Unit and the
Commander of the Homeland Security Unit is responsible for the
Division Marine Patrol operation.
B. QUALIFICATIONS
1. Vacancies within the Homeland Security Unit will be posted, selected

and evaluated per Division Policy and Procedures #641 (Position
Assignment).
2. Officers must be able to perform the essential functions of the job with or
without reasonable accommodation(s). Officers must be able to pass a
basic swimming test administered by the Division of Fire and Rescue’s
Marine Emergency Response Team (M.E.R.T.) which meets the United
States Coast Guard’s Physical Fitness Swim Requirements.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1506 – MARINE PATROL OPERATIONS Page 2 of 6
3. Officers must have the ability to work in a marine environment without

suffering from untreatable motion sickness, or claustrophobia.
Mechanical knowledge of watercraft, local waterway knowledge and
previous training and experience are preferred.
C. OPERATION
1. Seasonal operation of the Division’s patrol boats is between the months

of May and October. The actual patrol schedule is flexible and will be
determined by the Commander of the Homeland Security Unit based on
the weather and water-related activity levels. During the remainder of the
year, the Marine Patrol is available for “call-out” with the approval of on-
duty Watch Commander.
2. Temporary duty assignments to the Marine Patrol may be used to

supplement the boat crews or for training purposes.
3. The position of “Boat Captain” will be reviewed each season by the

Commander of the Homeland Security Unit. The officer selected for this
position will have demonstrated the knowledge, skills and ability
necessary to operate a vessel under a wide variety of conditions,
coordinate the crew’s activities and exercise the judgement necessary for
working with a minimum of direct supervision.
4. The “Boat Captain” is responsible for the safety of the boat and all
passengers. Without exception, everyone on the vessel will be required
to wear a personal floatation device (P.F.D.) under the following
conditions:
a. While the vessel is engaged in any rescue operation.
b. While the vessel is involved in any special operation or

enforcement activity in conjunction with any other agency.
c. Anytime the vessel is operated in close proximity to another

vessel.
d. When operating during the hours of darkness.
e. Under any weather or wind conditions which would adversely

impact on the handling of the vessel.
5. Routine boat patrols will cease during adverse weather conditions. If

weather conditions prevent boat operations, Homeland Security
supervisors will assign the boat crews to other duties (marine related
activities when possible, i.e. marina visits, boat maintenance, fishing
checks, etc.).
D. MAINTENANCE
The Commander of the Homeland Security Unit will be responsible for the care
and maintenance of the Division’s patrol vessels, their crews and all assigned
equipment. The vessels Captain will report all maintenance needs and
equipment discrepancies to their supervisors. Routine inspections of the
vessels, crews and equipment will be completed and maintained by the unit
supervisors.
E. TRAINING
Boat Operators are required to pass a Department of Criminal Justice Services

(DCJS) approved Maritime Patrol Training class before operating Marine Patrol
vessels.
1. Officers assigned to the position of “boat operators” (coxswains) must

have successfully completed the following minimum requirements:
a. Completion of the U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary Boating Skills and

Seamanship Course.
b. Completion of a minimum of 80-hours of on-the-job boat operation

under the direct supervision of the Boat Captain. These hours will
be documented in the vessel’s log book.
2. Once an officer is assigned to the Unit, an Orientation Checklist will be

completed. The original will remain in the officer’s personnel file and a
copy of the completed Checklist will be forwarded to Accreditation.
3. Retraining and remedial training will be accomplished on an as needed

basis determined by the Homeland Security Unit Supervisor.
F. EQUIPMENT
1. The primary Marine Patrol vessels will be equipped with the following:
a. All required safety equipment as prescribed by the USCG

b. VHF Marine Radio, and Police Radio.
c. Navigational GPS
d. Anchor and line
e. Spot Light
2. The Zodiac 420 inflatable vessel will not have any equipment assigned to
it.
G. SEARCH AND RESCUE
1. The Marine Patrol may be utilized for search and rescue operations.
Requests for assistance may be received by:
a. Dispatch by communications.
b. Requests by the Coast Guard.
c. Direct contact by distressed boater.
d. Notification by other agencies.
e. Observation.
2. Depending on the situation, the Marine Patrol can handle the complaint
with or without assistance.
3. Search and rescue operations include but are not limited to:
a. Distressed boaters.
b. Recovery of evidence or deceased persons.
c. Missing persons.
4. Complaints involving missing persons will be brought to the attention of

the Watch Commander. The Watch Commander is responsible for
coordinating resources during a search and rescue operation.
H. MARINE ANCILLARY OFFICERS
1. The position of Marine Ancillary Officer is established to support the

Marine Patrol efforts of the Homeland Security Unit. Ancillary Officers
will serve in this position as a supplementary role in addition to their full-
time assignment within the Police Division. As an ancillary officer,
officers will assist Homeland Security Unit members and the Fire Marine
Division with duties that include, but are not limited to: maritime law
enforcement patrols, security operations and search and rescue
responses.
2. Eligibility for the Ancillary Marine Patrol

a. Vacancies for the Marine Patrol Ancillary will be posted, selected
and evaluated per Division Policy and Procedures #641
(Competency Vacancy). This position is for Patrol Officers and
Corporals only.
b. Officers must be able to perform the essential functions of the job

with or without reasonable accommodation(s). Officers must be
able to pass a Division approved, basic swimming test (IADRS
standards - See attached appendix) administered by the
Supervision of the Homeland Security Unit.
c. Candidates for the Marine Patrol Ancillary are required to

complete an American Boat Operator course that is approved by
the National Association of State Boating Law Administrators
(NASBLA) and the United States Coast Guard (USCG).
d. Officers must have the ability to work in a marine environment

without suffering from untreatable motion sickness, or
claustrophobia. Mechanical knowledge of watercraft, local

waterway knowledge and previous training and experience are
preferred.
e. Endorsement of application must be approved by their Branch

Commander.
f. Minimum of two (2) years’ experience as a Hampton Police

Officer.
g. Minimum of no less than an overall “3” on the last two

performance evaluations.
h. No suspensions during the period of 12 months prior to date of

application.
i. Successful completion of the Division's Physical Assessment

during the previous 12 months with an overall rating of "3" or
better (Must have completed the run or the Aerobic Capacity
Test).
3. SELECTION:
a. Assignments to the Marine Patrol Ancillary will be made as based

on the needs of the Division.
b. Vacancies to be filled will be announced on an as needed basis.
c. All applicants will be required to attend a Marine Patrol Unit oral

board for acceptance.
d. Due to the nature of the unit’s operations, applicants must have a

response time no greater than 30 minutes.
5. OPERATION:
a. Members of the Homeland Security Ancillary may be called out

outside of duty hours to respond to marine “call-out” incidents with
full-time Homeland Security Unit members or Fire Division Marine
Officers. Ancillary Officers will not be permitted to operate any
vessel without the direct guidance of a full-time Homeland
Security Unit member or Fire Division Marine Officer unless they
have received the training and authorization from the Homeland
Security Commander.
b. Periodically, Ancillary Officers will be assigned to the Homeland

Security Unit on a rotating basis to assist with the increased
patrols/calls for service.
c. Ancillary Officers will not be considered on-call.

d. Marine Ancillary Officers will be required to assist with basic

Firefighting and basic life saving techniques and training as
required by the Hampton Fire Department.
e. Marine Ancillary Officers will also be required to attend a Basic

Marine Law Enforcement course which includes man over board
drills, search & rescue patterns and other marine/fire related
missions.
f. Marine Ancillary Officers will be required to respond with the

Hampton Fire Department’s Marine Officers during emergency
calls when the Homeland Security Unit Officers are not available.
6. RETENTION:
a. The Police Division Marine Patrol Ancillary is a competency

assignment similar to SWAT, MRT, etc. Members are required to
attend all unit assignments and training as directed. Hours
worked will be part of their regular work schedule, and will be
approved by their supervisor.
b. To remain a member of the Marine Patrol Ancillary, members

must maintain the following standards:
1) No less than a “3” on the performance evaluation.
2) Successful annual completion of the swim test (see

attachment).
3) No suspensions.
4) Preventable, State Reportable/Motor Vehicle Accidents or

excessive work injury record may be grounds for dismissal.
5) May be removed by the Unit Commander at any time for

conduct prejudicial to the team or other serious infraction
that may impede the performance of the Unit.
6) Marine Patrol Ancillary Unit members are to adhere to

Division Policies and Procedures and Rules and
Regulations at all times.
7) The Homeland Security Unit Commander will be

responsible for insuring compliance in accordance with
HPD policy.
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
08/09/2000
USE OF SEAT BELTS OVERSIGHT
CHIEF’S OFFICE
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish requirements for all City employees to wear
safety belts when operating City vehicles or a privately owned vehicle on official City
business in compliance with state law.
II. POLICY:
It is the policy that all Hampton Police Division employees who drive or occupy the
front seat of a city vehicle or a privately owned vehicle on official business will wear
their seat belt when operating the vehicle.
III. PROCEDURE:
Division employees occupying the front seat of a vehicle will wear the appropriate
safety belt system as required in State Code. Exceptions to the Code and this seat
belt policy will be limited to the following circumstances:
A. Any officer actively engaged in transporting prisoners or traveling in

circumstances that would render the wearing of a seat belt impractical. A
supervisor must be notified as soon as possible.
B. Any employee who has a physical condition or other bonafide medical reason,
determined in writing by a licensed physician and presented to the employee’s
supervisor, which will make the wearing of the seat belt impractical.
C. By prior approval from the Chief of Police when circumstances dictate the
wearing of a seat belt would be impractical.
D. All persons being transported while in police custody will be restrained by the
seat belt system installed in the police vehicle and will be placed in the vehicle
in a manner to prevent positional asphyxia. Should the use of seat belts not be
practical because of circumstances such as disability or injury the transporting
officer’s supervisor will be notified prior to transport.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1507 – USE OF SEAT BELTS Page 2 of 2
E. Children being transported in Division vehicles will be placed in restraining

systems as required by state law. Child safety seats can be accessed from the
Wythe and Chesapeake Field Offices to meet the needs of smaller children.
5
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
10/21/2020
BICYCLE PATROL OVERSIGHT
Operations
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the operation and maintenance
of the police patrol bicycles.
II. POLICY:
The use of bicycles by the Hampton Police Division is recognized as a valuable

addition to the various patrol methods currently utilized. The police bicycles are
utilized to provide an improved level of service to the community. This is accomplished
through proactive utilization in crime detection, enforcement and crime prevention
methods supporting the Division’s community policing goals. Unit Commanders are
responsible for the daily operation and effectiveness of the bicycle patrol.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Authorization for the operation of the police bicycles is granted by the Chief of
Police or his designee.
B. Officers operating the police bicycle have attended and successfully completed
an accredited police bicycle training school approved by the Chief of Police.
C. Bicycle patrols are utilized year-round except when conditions are determined
to be hazardous due to ice, sleet, snow, rain, fog, or a supervisor’s
determination that conditions are unsafe for riding. Police bicycles are operated
with due regard for the safety of the officer and the public.
D. Operation:
1. Officers assigned to bicycle patrol have a working knowledge of all

applicable state laws, City Ordinances, and Divisional Policy and
Procedures. When operating Division bicycles on public streets, officers
will comply with all laws applicable to bicycle operation unless deviation
is necessary to meet a law enforcement objective.
2. Bicycle Officers utilized for any selected enforcement assignments are

normally utilized in pairs (2) or more for officer safety. This provides for
one (1) contact officer and one (1) cover officer (ex: F.I.’s, and
arrests/summonses).
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P # 1508 – BICYCLE PATROL Page 2 of 4
3. Normal patrol assignments are assigned by the Unit Commander to

accomplish the unit’s goals as needed.
E. Uniforms:
1. Specific equipment and uniforms are necessary to provide for the

comfort and safety of bicycle officers. The Unit Commanders are
responsible for selecting the uniform of the day taking into consideration
the weather conditions and the assignment. Division issued/approved
helmets will be worn while operating Division bicycles.
NOTE: Bicycle Officers do not wear any of the issued bicycle uniform or
parts of that uniform with the regular Divisional uniform (ex: bicycle
jacket/nylon web gear duty belt with regular uniform).
a. Summer Uniform – The summer uniform consists of the Polo

short sleeve shirt, black crew neck shirt and approved navy blue
bicycle shorts/pants. Officers are required to wear black laced
type shoes suitable for athletic use. Black ankle type socks are
worn with the bicycle shorts. Division issued hats or caps may be
worn when appropriate. Only Division issued headgear may be
worn.
b. Winter Uniform – The winter uniform consists of the Polo short

sleeve shirt with a black crew neck T-shirt. The approved bicycle
long pants are worn with black laced type shoes suitable for
athletic use. The approved bicycle winter jacket is worn with HPD
patches and cloth badge with POLICE on the back. The jacket is
also worn as a vest (removable sleeves). Division issued hats or
caps may be worn when appropriate.
2. Officers will only wear their bike uniforms when available for bike patrol
as designated by their Unit Commander or his/her designee. If the officer
does not have their bike, they will wear the Class “B” uniform of the day.
F. Issued Police Bicycle:
1. Selected personnel operate a Division approved 21-speed Mountain

Bicycle (ATB).
2. No accessories other than those listed are installed on the bike.
G. Maintenance/Care of Equipment:
1. Officers assigned are responsible for the maintenance and care of the
bicycle. This is accomplished by daily pre-tour and post-tour inspections
of their bicycles. All deficiencies are reported and repairs made as soon
as possible. No officer operates any police bicycle that is mechanically
unsafe.
2. The pre-tour inspection for safe operation of the bicycle includes the
following:
a. brakes/cable
b. tires/proper inflation/wear
c. wheels/spokes
d. gears/sprockets/chain tension
e. lighting system
f. seat/post adjustment
g. handlebars/head stem
h. general cleanliness
3. The police bicycle is secured to the bicycle carrier with the issued cable
lock when not being operated. The cable lock is utilized by the assigned
officer any time the bicycle is left unattended during the daily operation.
In cases of emergencies where time does not permit, the bicycle is
secured as soon as practical.
4. Damage to bicycles occurring during the shift is reported to a supervisor

as soon as possible.
5. When officers assigned to bicycle patrol are reassigned to a non-bicycle

patrol unit, all issued bicycle gear will be returned to the Special Projects
Commander or his/her designee immediately.
H. Qualifications:
1. Applicants seeking assignment to operate the Hampton Police Division

ATB’s are required to meet the following criteria:
a. Endorsement of application by individual’s Unit Commander
b. Must have completed and been released from the Patrol Training
Officer (PTO) Program
c. Minimum of an overall “3” on the performance evaluation
d. Successful completion of the Division’s physical assessment with

an overall rating of “3” or better (applies to applicants and officers
currently assigned).
e. No suspensions during the period of 12 months prior to the date

of application
f. Must not use tobacco products
g. Preventable motor vehicle accidents may be grounds for

ineligibility
h. Must be flexible in shift assignment (Special patrol assignments

on different shifts)
i. Achieve a minimum score of “80” with the Division issued weapon

on a Division sanctioned course of fire
2. Selection:
Assignments to the bicycle patrol are made as bicycles are available.

Only one officer is assigned to each bicycle. Requests for assignment to
the ATB are kept on file for twelve (12) months. Vacancies are
announced on an as needed basis.
a. Officers selected are highly motivated, self-supervising and

productive personnel who are interested in making the bicycle
patrol an effective crime fighting tool.
b. Officers selected have demonstrated good human relations skills

as they will be in constant contact with the public.
3. Training:
Prior to assuming ATB patrol duties, each officer assigned to an ATB

has successfully completed the Division’s 40-hour On/Off Road Bicycle
Training Course (DCJS Certified 36 hours).
4. Retention:
The remain a member of the Bicycle Patrol Unit, members must maintain
the following standards:
a. No less that a “3” on the officer’s annual performance evaluation
b. No suspensions
c. An overall rating of “3” or greater on Division Physical

Assessment
d. Firearms qualifications of at least an “80” based on a Division

sanctioned course of fire
e. No use of tobacco
f. Preventable, state reportable motor vehicle accidents or an

excessive work injury record may be grounds for removal from the
unit.
P&P # 1508 – BICYCLE PATROL Page 6 of
4
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
3/26/03
DEADLINING POLICE VEHICLES OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish a guideline to be followed when it becomes

necessary to deadline a vehicle assigned to the Police Division.
II. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Police Division to make police vehicles available to the City
Garage for necessary repairs and maintenance as quickly as possible.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. No vehicle assigned to this Division will be deadlined during the tour of duty
without knowledge and consent of the shift supervisor.
B. All vehicles which are deadlined will be deadlined at the City Garage.
C. If the vehicle is deadlined during the normal operating hours of the City Garage,
the officer will leave the vehicle keys with the appropriate Garage employees in
the shop office and have a work order completed.
D. If the vehicle is deadlined after normal operating hours for the City Garage, the
officer will place the vehicle keys in the drop box at the City Garage and provide
the necessary information on the Police Operations Vehicle Maintenance Form
for the repairs.
E. When fleet repairs are completed, the vehicle will be brought back to the
designated Field Office and the keys placed back on the keyboard. Take Home
Vehicles should be picked up at the City Garage by the assigned officer.
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
-
SUBJECT
EFFECTIVE DATE
03/19/2019
MOBILE COMMAND CENTER OVERSIGHT
Support Services
I. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the operation and
deployment of the City’s Mobile Command Center (MCC).
II. POLICY:
The City of Hampton’s Mobile Command Center (MCC) is under the command of the
Office of Emergency Management. The MCC may be deployed during any incident
demanding the establishment of a command post in proximity to the occurrence of
such an event. It is designed to supplement emergency operations in high service
demand locations during critical incidents. Overall objectives are to increase public
safety authority visibility, provide a centralized location to conduct incident related
activities while remaining in the field, and serve as a command center during such
occurrences.
The MCC may also be deployed to other non-critical events as authorized.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. AUTHORIZATION:
1. Authorization to activate the MCC will be granted by the Chief of

Police, Fire Chief, Emergency Manager, or incident commander.
2. Scheduled operation (e.g., maintenance, repair, training operations,

special events) will be coordinated through the City of Hampton Office
of Emergency Management.
3. Deployment for support to jurisdictions other than the City of Hampton

will be determined by mutual aid agreements and memos of
understanding currently in place.
B. DEPLOYMENT
1. Upon activation in response to a critical incident, available MCC

personnel will be notified by the Public Safety Communications Center
APPROVED:
CHIEF OF POLICE
P&P #1510 – MOBILE COMMAND CENTER Page 2 of 3
(PSC, E911 Center). A current operators list will be maintained at the

PSC.
2. Notification to activate the Mobile Command Center will include the

following information:
a. nature of incident
b. location of incident
c. location to stage the command center
d. communications channel assigned to the incident
e. designation of the on-scene commander
C. OPERATION:
1. Only those persons designated as Mobile Command Center operators

will operate the MCC.
2. During operation, the MCC will be manned by a minimum of two

designated operators (driver and spotter).
3. The E911 Center will be notified when, and for what reason, the unit is
taken out of service and when it is returned for operation.
4. The MCC will mark into service through the E911 Center in
accordance with agency protocol (e.g., operator CAD number and unit
designation number).
5. The MCC will not be operated in an emergency mode (i.e., no lights

and siren) and all rules of the road will be observed (i.e., speed limits,
traffic signals, road markings, vehicle signals, etc.).
D. OPERATOR TRAINING:
1. Mobile Command Center operators will be certified upon completion of

an equipment driving course and a command center familiarization
course.
2. Periodic training for personnel assigned as command center operators

will be provided through the Training Unit in coordination with the City
Office of Emergency Management.
E. MAINTENANCE:
1. The City of Hampton Office of Emergency Management is responsible

for the coordination of scheduled maintenance, repair, and inspection
of the MCC.
P&P #1510 – MOBILE COMMAND CENTER Page 3 of 3
2. All maintenance will be coordinated by the Office of Emergency

Management through the Hampton City Fire Garage.
F. ONBOARD SYSTEMS
The MCC is a self contained unit capable of providing a climate controlled

environment for incident management operations. Information regarding
operation of onboard systems will be maintained on the MCC and be
promulgated via training bulletins as equipment is added or deleted.
G. COMMAND CENTER INVENTORY:
1. The City’s Office of Emergency Management will be accountable for all

equipment stored on the vehicle.
2. A list of expendable supplies on the Mobile Command Center will be

maintained by the Office of Emergency Management.
H. VEHICLE SECURITY:
A vehicle key will be kept at Hampton Fire Station 10 with the Mobile
Command Center. Additional keys will be maintained in the custody of the
Office of Emergency Management and the Police Special Projects Unit.

Hampton Police Division Policy &amp; Procedures Manual (VFOIA, 2022)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hampton Police Division Policy &amp; Procedures Manual (VFOIA, 2022)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hampton Police Division

Policy And Procedure Manual

05/29/19 100 DIVISION WRITTEN DIRECTIVE SYSTEM

05/30/98 101 STRATEGIC POLICE OBJECTIVES

07/15/86 102 CRIME AND CRIME PREVENTION

04/08/99 103 ENFORCING THE LAW

07/15/86 104 LOYALTY

04/25/22 105 COMMAND AUTHORITY / RELATIONSHIPS /

03/04/14 107 DISCIPLINARY PHILOSOPHY

03/15/98 108 PHILOSOPHY ON ALLEGATIONS OF MISCONDUCT

11/27/06 109 POLICE REPORTING SYSTEM

08/13/10 111 CODE OF ETHICS

03/15/98 112 PHILOSOPHY OF PROFESSIONAL STANDARDS

07/27/86 113 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT PHILOSOPHY

09/11/86 115 INSPECTIONS PHILOSOPHY

03/29/10 116 PROMOTIONAL PHILOSOPHY

10/11/89 117 SAFETY PHILOSOPHY

05/30/98 118 USE OF FORCE PHILOSOPHY STATEMENT

09/04/03 119 HOMELAND DEFENSE PHILOSOPHY

01/27/21 501 RELATIONSHIPS WITH COMMONWEALTH

02/17/21 503 POLICE INVOLVEMENT IN DOMESTIC DISPUTES

01/04/21 504 HANDLING OF INDIVIDUALS WITH PHYSICAL OR

08/16/12 505 RELATIONSHIPS WITH JURISDICTIONS WITHIN THE

10/05/15 508 VEHICLE SEIZURE AND FORFEITURE

3/22/2022 509 PUBLIC INFORMATION

02/05/21 510 VICTIM/WITNESS ASSISTANCE

08/11/14 511 POLICE - FIRE DIVISION OPERATION

11/20/18 512 AWARDS PROGRAMS

02/28/17 513 REPORTING CONFISCATED FIREARMS

09/28/09 514 TRAVEL EXPENSE

11/20/18 515 INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM (ICS)

02/17/21 516 HIGH RISK SITUATIONS and CRITICAL INCIDENTS

03/03/21 517 DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CRIME

12/14/20 519 TACTICAL UNIT APPLICANTS AND MEMBERS

12/14/20 519.1 MRT Mobile Response Team

03/27/19 520 BOMB THREATS

03/27/19 521 DISPOSAL OF EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS

07/09/14 523 LINE OF DUTY DEATH/SERIOUS INJURY

04/08/15 524 CRISIS NEGOTIATIONS

10/27/16 525 SPECIAL EVENT PLANNING AND COORDINATION

05/02/18 526 DIGNITARY PROTECTION

09/30/08 527 SPECIAL CONSERVATORS OF THE PEACE

03/26/07 528 SPECIAL OPERATIONS

11/06/18 529 CONCEALED WEAPON AUTHORIZATION

11/20/18 530 HOMELAND SECURITY UNIT

04/20/20 531 INFECTIOUS DISEASE CONTROL

04/23/13 532 CLOTHING

10/12/21 533 USE OF FORCE & RELATED EQUIPMENT

11/13/19 534 AUTOMATED SYSTEMS

11/01/04 535 INTERAGENCY MONITORING OF

03/01/18 538 REPORTING PROCEDURES FOR DISCHARGE OF

09/03/98 540 ORDER MAINTENANCE AND CROWD CONTROL AT

09/05/19 542 SEPARATION FROM EMPLOYMENT

10/21/14 543 ACTIVE THREATS

05/09/05 544 BIAS BASED PROFILING

10/12/20 545 Senior Police Officer

11/27/17 547 DIVE TEAM

12/17/19 548 GANG ACTIVITY

3/22/2022 549 MOBILE DATA TERMINALS

09/12/05 550 RESPIRATORS

05/24/06 551 MOST WANTED PROGRAM

09/16/2021 552 Continuity of Operations Plan (COOP)

10/26/2021 553 Automatic License Plate Readers (LAPR)

Hampton Police Division Policy & Procedures Manual (VFOIA, 2022)

Hampton Police Division Policy & Procedures Manual (VFOIA, 2022)